



















.. - 














. 


















































a" 












: 






^ ^ 






































.<y> 





■I %p 












^ 



1 * 



x ^. 







G V 



,0 c 



^% 






0{ 













- 






' 




I 








, 








s 




















THE 

SELF-INSTRUCTING 
MODEL ENGLISH GRAMMAR; 

EMBRACING 

EXERCISES IN ORTHOGRAPHY, ETYMOLOGY, 
SYNTAX, AND PROSODY. 

LIKEWISE IN 

ANALYSIS, PARSING, FALSE SYNTAX, PUNCTUATION, 
COMPOSITION, AND SCANNING. 

TO WHICH IS ADDED, 

A COMPLETE KEY TO THE METHOD OF ANALYZING AND PARSING. 

INTENDED AS AN AID TO TEACHERS AND PRIVATE STUDENTS, WHO, BY THE USE 

OF THIS WORK, MAY, IN A SHORT TIME, OBTAIN A GOOD 

KNOWLEDGE OP ENGLISH GRAMMAR 

WITHOUT THE ASSISTANCE OF A TEACHER. 

BY 

JOHN A. McROBERT, of Tennessee, 

TEACHER OF ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 



PHILADELPHIA : 
CHARLES DESILVER, 

No. 253 Market Street. 
1855. 



-fE^ 



,143*7 



Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1855, by 

ROBERT S. FEILD, 

in the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the United States for 
the Eastern District of Pennsylvania. 

STEREOTYPED BY J. FAGAN. 



/ 



PREFACE 



The object in compiling this book, is to furnish students with a 
manual of English Grammar, in which its principles are methodi- 
cally arranged, and rendered easy of comprehension by simple and 
appropriate exercises. The author has endeavored to write in a 
style so plain, that the language may be comprehended by the 
younger classes of learners ; and it has been his aim to afford older 
pupils such aid, that, with proper application on their part, they 
may obtain a knowledge of English Grammar without further 
assistance. 

Those who are interested in the education of youth, are respect- 
fully invited to examine the following peculiarities of the work : 

1. Orthography and Etymology are preceded by introductory 
lessons, in which the derivations of the terms used in those two 
parts of grammar, are given, the words are defined in plain lan- 
guage, and the principles are illustrated by short and appropriate 
examples. When learners have a clear perception of the meaning 
of these terms, they can engage in the study of Orthography and 
Etymology with both pleasure and profit. 

2. Models for the manner of reciting are given throughout the . 
work, which teach students what they must learn about a subject, 
and the order in which it should be learned. By the aid of these 

(iii) 



IV PREFACE. 

models, pupils are taught to spell, define, analyze, parse, and to 
correct words and sentences systematically. The habit thus formed, 
of treating subjects in order, will be beneficial to the student in 
many respects. It will teach him to think, to compose, to speak, 
and to transact all his business with method. 

3. In the parsing lessons, so much assistance is given to the 
pupil, that it is seldom necessary for him to apply to his teacher 
for information. Over a greater part of the words are placed 
figures, referring to the models for parsing contained in \ 64; and 
after the figures are letters, which point out in what respects the 
word must be parsed differently from the form prescribed in the 
model. Much valuable time is thus gained by both pupil and 
teacher, the latter of whom is relieved from the unnecessary trou- 
ble, during recitation, of propounding numerous questions to the 
former, to ascertain his proficiency. The student should be taught 
to recite his parsing lesson without being questioned by the 
teacher, except when actually necessary. 

4. The vocabularies of the words used in illustrating the different 
parts of speech, and likewise of the principal words contained in 
the parsing lessons, will save the student much time and labor; for 
without them, he must refer to a separate book in order to learn 
the meaning of the words. Without being able to spell correctly, 
the student cannot write with propriety ; without a knowledge of 
the meaning of words, he can neither speak properly, nor under- 
stand what is spoken or written by others. Yet, in many schools, 
spelling and definitions are almost wholly neglected after the pupil 
has been thrashed, through the spelling-book, and a few readers ! 
How can we distinguish and classify the different parts of speech, 
except we have a knowledge of their import? How can we parse, 
speak, write, or understand, unless we have some acquaintance 
with the signification of words? 



PREFACE. V 

5. Entire pieces have been selected for parsing lessons. Students 
will comprehend such pieces much more readily than short extracts, 
and take more interest in learning each lesson. They should be 
taught to scan arid read the lessons in concert — a very pleasing 
exercise after the labors of the day. 

Other peculiarities in the method of imparting instruction, will 
be found in the work. Suggestions are made to teachers when 
deemed necessary; but it is presumed that every teacher has a 
method of his own, and therefore little is said with regard to the 
manner in which this work is to be used. The larger type distin- 
guishes the portions which are to be committed to memory ; but 
the notes and observations should be carefully studied, in connec- 
tion with the examples for elucidation. Questions have been 
appended for those who prefer them. They may be useful to 
the pupil in directing his attention to the important points ; but 
if taught to write a synopsis of the subjects of his lesson, to memo- 
rize this synopsis, and to recite as he would demonstrate a theorem 
in geometry, the advantage gained would be incomparably greater. 
His judgment would thus be exercised in hunting out principles, a 
knowledge of which would be more easily acquired, ana 1 longer 
retained in the memory. The student would form a habit of self- 
dependence, which, in truth, is independence, and leads to inde- 
pendent scholarship. His mind would be expanded by a wider 
range of thought, instead of being cramped by questions requiring 
the monosyllabic answers of yes and no. The saving of much 
time and trouble, is a sufficient reason why the teacher should 
adopt this method of training the judgment and memory of the 
pupil. 

But whatever plan is adopted by the teacher, the pupil should be 

made to understand every thing as he advances, and to impress his 

knowledge indelibly on the memory by frequent reviews, at least 

every week. But to clog the memory with rules and definitior° 

1* 



VI PREFACE. 

which are not understood, is productive of no benefit ; on the con- 
trary, it is the cause of much injury; for the student will form the 
ruinous habit of passing over things without comprehending — he 
will take them upon trust, and never become an independent 
scholar. 

In preparing this compilation, acknowledgments are due to 
Goold Brown, Bailey, Bullions, Butler, Clark, Kirkham, Murray, 
Quackenbos, Webster ,Weld, Wells, and others, (of whose works he 
has made free use,) as well as to several teachers who have not 
written upon the subject of grammar. 

Hoping that the book may prove serviceable to schools, as well 
as to private learners, it is submitted to the judgment of a discern- 
ing public. 

JOHN A. McROBERT. 

September, 1855. 



CONTENTS. 



Page 

English Grammar — treats of — Orthography — Alphabet 11 

Synthesis — Analysis — Vocals — Consonants — Diphthong — Triph- 
thong 12, 13 

Monosyllables — Dissyllables — Trisyllables — Polysyllables — 

Simple Word — Compound — Primitive — Derivative 14, 15 



PART I. 

Orthography — Letters — English Alphabet 16 

Pvules for Capitals — Division of Letters % 18, 19 

Sounds of the Vowels — Vowels and Consonants — Diphthong 20, 21 

Table of Similar Sounds — Consonants of one Sound — More 22, 23 

Table of Terminations — Silent Letters — Equivalents 25,26 

Syllables— Words— Spelling 28, 29, 30 

Introductory Lessons in Etymology. 

Etymology— Nouns — Abstract — Proper — Common — Collective — 

Verbal 32,34 

Persons — Gender — Number — Sentence — Subject — Object.... 35, 36, 37 
Declaratory Sentence — Imperative — Interrogative — Exclamatory 
— Modified Subject — Predicate — Cases — Nominative — Posses- 
sive—Objective 38, 3 Q 

(vii) 



Vlll CONTENTS. 

Page 

Preposition — Relation — Adjunct 40 

Adjective — Comparison 42 

Personal Pronouns — Relative — Interrogative — Indefinite 44 

Verb — Transitive — Intransitive — Voices — Mode 46, 47 

Tense— Participle — Auxiliary — Regular — Irregular 48, 51, 52 

Defective Verb — Conjugation — Unipersonal 53 

Compound Verbs — Adverbs — Conjunctions ; 54, 55. 



PART II. 

Etymology — Classes ofWords — Nouns — Properties— Persons.... 56, 57 

Gender — Number — Cases 58, 61 

Declension — Proper Nouns — Irregular Nouns 64, 66 

Vocabulary of the Nouns 70 

Adjectives — Comparison — Irregular Comparison 84, 85, 86 

Vocabulary of Adjectives 87 

Pronouns — Personal Pronouns 90, 91 

Indefinite — Demonstrative — Distributive Personal Pronouns 92 

Compound Personal Pronouns — Relative Pronouns 93 

Interrogative Pronoun — Verb 95 

Classes of Verbs— Forms of Verbs 96,97 

Unipersonal Verbs — Compound Verb 99 

Modes — Tenses — Numbers and Persons — Participles, 100, 101, 102, 103 

Conjugation of the Verb " To be"—"To love" 104, 106 

Passive Voice, " To be loved" — Formation of the Tenses 110, 112 

Irregular Verbs — Formation of the Tenses 113, 115 

Defective Verbs — Adverbs — Adverbial Phrases 116, 117 

Conjunctive Adverbs — Comparison of Adverbs 118 

Prepositions — Conjunctions — Interjections ,. 119, 120 

Vocabulary of the Pronouns — Verbs 121, 122 

Vocabulary of the Prepositions — Conjunctions — Interjections, 126, 127 

Exercises in Parsing— Nouns and Adjectives 128 

Exercises in Writing 138 



CONTENTS. IX 



PART III. 

Page 

Syntax — Sentences— Ellipsis 143, 144, 145 

Subject— Verb— Adjective— Adverb 147, 149, 150, 151 

Simple and Compound Subjects 151 

Method of Analyzing — Table for Parsing 152, 153 

Rules and Observations 157 

Modes and Tenses 190 

Such — So — Prepositions — List of Errors 194, 195 

Lessons in Analyzing and Parsing 197 

Punctuation 208 

PART IV. 

Prosody 213 

Lessons in Analyzing, Parsing, False Syntax, and Scanning.. 217 

Questions , 255 



THE 

SELF-INSTRUCTING 

MODEL ENGLISH GRAMMAR 

INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 



LESSON I. 

English Grammar teaches us how to write and speak 
correctly. 

It treats of Orthography, Etymology, Syntax, Punctu- 
ation, and Prosody. 

Orthography. 

Orthography treats of Letters, Syllables, Words, and 
Spelling. 

Spell and define the following words : 

Orthography — from ortJws, correct, and graplw, to write, means 
writing or spelling correctly. 

Letter — a mark which represents a sound. 

Syllable — from Gr. sylldbe, taking together, means taking toge- 
ther letters to form a sound. 

Word — a sound, or marks representing a thought. 

Spelling — pronouncing the proper letters of a word. 

The Alphabet has twenty-six letters — a, h, c, d, e, /, g 7 
h h h h h ™, n 9 o, p 9 q, r, s, t, u, v, w, x, y, z. 

(11) 



12 INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 

The word Alphabet is derived from the first two Greek letters, 
called Alpha, Beta. 

Exekcises. 

A, I, m, p, o, s, i, v, w. What are those marks ? What do they 
represent ? Here are some letters taken together, having a short 
mark between them — com-mu-ni-ca-tion : what do you call each of 
the five divisions ? What, when the syllables are put together, as 
communication ? 

Now tell all you have learned in this lesson from memory, and 
give it in regular order, thus: Grammar teaches, &o. — it treats of 
— Orthography treats of — (spell) — Orthography, from — Letter — 
Syllable — Word — Alphabet — Alphabet is derived. 

Proceed in the same way with all the lessons. Do not attempt 
to memorize them, but study upon each subject until you under- 
stand it thoroughly; you can then give answers in your own words. 

LESSON II. 

A, b, c, d, e,f, g, h, i,j, Jc, I, m, n, o, p, q, r, s, t, u, v, w, x, y, z. 

Select from the Alphabet such letters as you choose, and put 
them together in syllables, with a short mark between them, and 
then form words of the syllables : thus, bo-ny, bony. Write upon 
your slate ten words, as directed. 

This placing together of letters in syllables, and sylla- 
bles in words, is called Synthesis. 

Commendation, concord, manfully, ambition. 

Separate the words above into syllables, and the syllables into 
letters : thus, bony, bo-ny, b-o-n-y. 

This separating of words into syllables, and syllables 
into letters, is called Analysis. 

Open your mouths, but not too wide. Sound the following letters 
in concert after me : a, e, i, o, u. You can sound them with your 
mouths open. You did not move any parts of the mouth except 
the tongue and lips, and those but slightly. The sounds were made 
almost entirely by the voice. 



INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 13 

These letters are called Vocals or Vowels, because they 
are sounded by the voice. 

Select the vowels in the following words, and give a reason why 
so called. Tub, not, pin, pen, mat, pine, lot, lend, rub, hat, love, sin, 
fen, scrub, line, sot, to. 

Sound the following letters ; not the name of the letters, as bee, 
but give the sound as heard in a word, thus : b-at. Sound the b 
alone, then unite it in sound with the rest of the word. B-ill, p-ill, 
d-ill, t-ill, m-ill. You find that you cannot sound b, p, d, t, m, by 
themselves. t 

Hence they are called Consonants, because they must 
be sounded together with a vowel. 

Oi or oy, pronounced aw-e, ou or ow, pronounced ah-oo, and ay, 
pronounced ah-e, are vowels. 

Sound them in the following words ; void, joy, foul, fowl, ay. 
Here we have two vowels united in one syllable, and both of them 
sounded. 

The two vowels are called a Diphthong. 

Pronounce uoy {woy), as in buoy. Here we have three sounds 
united in one syllable. 

The three vowels are called a Triphthong. 

Spell and define the following words : 

Synthesis, from syn, together, and tithami, to place, means a 
placing together. 

Analysis, from ana, apart, and luo, to loose, means a taking 
apart. v 

Vocal, Vowel, from vox, the voice, means uttered by the voice. 

Consonant, from con, together, and sonans, sounding, means a 
sounding together. 

Diphthong, from dis, two, and thonggos, a sound, means two 
sounds in one syllable. 

Triphthong, from treis, three, and tlionggos, a sound, means 
three sounds in one syllable. 

Let the teacher give more exercises on the six words just defined, 
and require the student to tell why called synthesis, analysis, &c. 

Now tell what you have learned. 
2 



14 INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 



LESSON III. 

Select from tne Alphabet letters to form ten words of one sylla- 
ble, and write them on a slate. 

The words are called Monosyllables, because they con- 
sist of one syllable only. 

Select letters to form ten words of two syllables. 

These words are called Dissyllables, because they have 
only two syllables. 

Write ten words of three syllables. 

These words of three syllables are called Trisyllables. 
Write ten words of four or more syllables. 
They are called Polysyllables. 

In the following list of words, tell which are Monosyllables, and 
why? Dissyllables and why, &c? House, houseless, edifice, artifi- 
cial, incombustibility, unreasonable, impropriety, impudent, gentle- 
man, gentle, expound, demand, band, box, bee, been. 

A Simple word is one not formed by uniting other 
words. 

Examples. 
Why simple ? Love, mind, Jcnife, street. 

A Compound word is one formed from two or more 
simple words ; as mouse-trap, school-house, wind-mill, 
silver-smith, dining-room. 

Separate the words into the simple words of which they are 
composed. Why compound? 

Write ten simple words ; ten compound words. 

A Primitive word is one not derived from any word in 
the language ; as sign, seal, write, act, build. 
Why are those words Primitive ? 



INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 15 

A Derivative word is formed from the Primitive, by 
adding a prefix or a suffix; as assign, writer, sealing, 
actor, rebuild. 

Analyze the words thus ; assign is a derivative word, composed 
of the prefix as, and the primitive word sign, &c. 

Write ten Primitive words ; ten Derivative words. 

Spell and define. 

Monosyllable, from monos, alone, and syllabe, a syllable, means 
a word of one syllable. 

Dissyllable, from dis, twice or two, and syllabe, means a word 
having two syllables. 

Trisyllable, from treis, three, and syllabe, means a word of three 
syllables. 

Polysyllable, from polys, many, and syllabe, means a word of 
many syllables, four or more. 

Compound, from com, together, and pono, to place, means placing 
words together. 

Primitive, from primus, first, means the first word, one not 
derived. 

Derivative, from de, from, and rivo, to draw, means a word drawn 
or formed from the primitive word. 

Prefix, from prai, before, and figo, to fix, means a letter or letters 
placed before the primitive. 

Suffix, from svf, after, and figo, to fix, means to place one letter 
or more after the primitive. 

The pupil will now explain what he has learned in this lesson. 
Take the subjects in order. Review, review, review, until well 
understood. 



THE 



SELF-INSTRUCTING 

MODEL ENGLISH GRAMMAR 



English Grammar teaches us to write and to speak 
the English language correctly. 

It is commonly treated under four heads ; Orthography, 
Etymology, Syntax, and Prosody. Punctuation may be 
called one of its parts, and placed after Syntax. Each 
part will be explained in order. 



PART I; 

ORTHOGRAPHY. 

Orthography treats of Letters, Syllables, Words, and 
Spelling. — G-oold Brown. 

I 1. LETTEKS. 

A Letter is a mark which represents a sound. 

The letters, when placed as they commonly are, form 
what is called the Alphabet. 

The English Alphabet contains twenty-six letters, which 
are represented in the following characters or marks : 
2 * (17) 



18 ORTHOGRAPHY. 



a i 

o 



<T3 



f Capitals —A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M, N, 0, P, Q, R, 
S, T, U, V, W, X, Y, Z. 

Small letters — a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i, j, k, 1, in, n, o, p, q, r, s, t, 

u, v, w, x, y, z. 
f Capitals —A, B, C, D, E, F, G, E, I, J, K, L, M, N, 0, P, Q, B, 

S, T, TJ,V,W,X, Y, Z. 
Small letters — a, b, c, d, e,f, g, h, i,j, Jc, I, m, n, o, p, q, r, s, t, 

u, v, w, x, y, z. 

' Capitals — 3, % ©, 2B, SB, JF, ©, m, *, % &, % » W, ©, $, <&, 

Small letters — a, fc, c, tr, e, f, fi, J), f, J, % i, m, ti, a, p, q, *, a, t, u, 
b, to, K 2, ?, 

Rules for Capitals, 

It is proper to begin with a capital letter, 

1. The first word in every sentence. 

2. The first word of every line in poetry. 

3. Proper names of persons and places, and titles of 
distinction. 

4. The pronoun I, and the interjection 0. 

5. Names of the Deity. 

6. The names of objects personified. 

7. Direct quotations. 

8. Important words in captions. 

Exercises on the Rules, 

Correct the following errors, and give the reasons. 

1. geography is A Description Of the earth. 

2. the midnight moon serenely smiles 

o'er nature's soft repose ; 
no low'ring cloud obscures the skies, 
nor ruffling tempest blows. 

3. the tomb of #eorge Washington, the first president of the wnited 



ORTHOGRAPHY. 19 

states, is at mount ?;ernon. chief justice raarshall. alexander the 
preat. 

4. i came, i saw, i conquered, o blind man ! o happy peasant! 

5. almighty yather, thou supreme 5eing. 

6. ^he spider said to the/ly. come, gentle spring. 

7. ^>ope says, u the proper study of mankind is man." 

8. "pope's essay on man." 

Italic letters are generally used for the sake of emphasis ; and 
words to he printed in Italic letters should be written with a line 
beneath ; thus, " He is truly great." 

I 2. DIVISIONS OF LETTERS. 

Letters are divided into Vowels, Consonants, Diph- 
thongs, and Triphthongs. 

"A Vowel is a letter which can be fully sounded alone. 
Vowels — a, e, i, o, u, and w and y, when they do not 
begin a word or syllable. 

A Consonant is a letter sounded, for the most part, in 
connection with a vowel. Consonants — b, <?, d, f, g, h,j, 
Jc, I, m, n, p, q, r, s, t, v, x, z, and w and y when followed 
by a vowel sound in the same syllable. 

A Diphthong is the union of two vowels in one syllable. 
If both vowels are sounded, it is called Proper ; if only 
one of the vowels is sounded, it is called Improper. 

Proper, ay, ou or oiv, oi or oy ; Improper, ea, eo, ui, ie. 
Model. Spell the word. 

B-o-i-1, boil ; oi is a Proper Diphthong, because both the vowels 
are sounded, o 3 and i 2. ($ 3. Vowels.) C-h-e-a-p, cheap; ea is 
an Improper Diphthong, because only one of the vowels, c, is 
sounded ; a is silent, that is, not sounded. 

Examples. 
Thou, oil, boy, how, meal, people, fruit, thief. 
A Triphthong has three vowels in one syllable. If all 
the vowels are sounded, it is called Proper ; but if only 



20 ORTHOGRAPHY. 

one or two of the vowels are sounded, it is called Improper. 
Proper, uoy\ Improper, eau< ieu 9 iew. (See the last 
model.) 
Buoy, beauty, adieu, view. 

Vowels and Consonants. 

Note. — The teacher should utter the sounds of all the letters 
which can be sounded, until the pupil has learned them thoroughly. 
Some consonants have an imperfect sound. 

Model. Spell the word. 

M-a-n, man. M is a consonant, because it cannot be fully 
sounded without being united with a vowel. Try to sound it — m. 

A is a vowel, because it may be sounded alone ; that is, without 
any other letter united with it — a. 

iVis a consonant, because it cannot be sounded fully except when 
united with a vowel — n. 

Examples for Practice. 

Mat, pin, not, tub, Iowa, Bardstown, Tweed, thwart, how, city, 
eye, New York, Wheeling, number, ewe, swan, yesterday, Yar- 
mouth, bedew, year, now, while, tidy. 

Diphthongs. 

Model. Spell the word. 

P-o-u-n-d, pound ; ou is a Proper Diphthong, because both the 
vowels are sounded — ou (afi-oo). 

Please ; ea is an Improper Diphthong, because only one of the 
vowels is sounded — e. 

Examples for Practice. 

Ay, boil, point, read, health, boy, please, mail, hail, meat, toy, 
how, town, round, ounce, employ, turmoil, oil, loud, down, now, 
cloy, void, wheat, people. 



ORTHOGRAPHY. 



21 



I 3. SOUNDS OF THE VOWELS. 

Note. — The pupil should be taught to explode the vowel sounds ; 
that is, to utter them quickly with a loud tone of voice. The voice 
of the teacher should be the guide of the pupil in uttering the 
sounds of the letters from \ 3 to \ 8. The pupils should utter them 
in concert after the teacher, until they can do it alone. 



1. 


2. 


3. 


4. 


5. 


6. 


mate, 
vale, 
mane. 


mat. 

began. 

am. 


bar. 
star, 
large. 


fall. 
all. 

call. 


what. 

was. 

quarrel. 


care, 
rare, 
hair. 


1. 


2. 


3. 


e. 

4. 


5. 


6. 


me. 

complete. 

supreme. 


met. 
men. 
fell. 


her. 

mercy. 

alert. 


prey, 
they, 
whey. 


their. 

where. 

there. 


pretty. 

England, 

matches. 


1. 

pine, 
fine, 
mine. 


2. 
pin. 
his. ' 
dip. 


3. 
bird, 
firm, 
dirt. 


i. 

4. 

marine. 

ravine. 

antique. 


5. 
alien, 
onion, 
valiant. 





Note. — The fifth sound of i is the same as that of the conso- 
nant y 

o. 



1. 


2. 


3. 


4. 


5. 


6. 


no. 


not. 


nor. 


wolf. 


move. 


dove. 


old. 


stop. 


for. 


book. 


who. 


monk. 


tone. 


lot. 


lord. 


look. 


prove. 


month. 


1. 


2. 


3. 


4. 


5. 


6. 


tube. 


tub. 


fur. 


full. 


rude. 


languid, 


tune. 


but. 


slur. 


pull. 


crude. 


quill. 


fuse. 


hut. 


burn. 


put. 


true. 


quite. 



22 



ORTHOGRAPHY. 



Note.— The 6th sound of u, is like that of the consonant w. In 
some words, u has the consonant sound of y prefixed, as use, union 
Such is the sound of u in the first column. 



y- 



i. 

rhyme, 
tyrant. 

fly. 



2. 
hymn, 
syntax, 
myriad. 



3. 
myrrh, 
myrtle, 
myrmidon. 



4. » 
yonder, 
yardstick, 
yellow. 



Note. — In the fourth column, y has its consonant sound. 

draw. town. law. dew. how. 

Note. — W, when a vowel, represents the sound ofu. It is often 

silent. 

Table of similar Sounds. 



1st SOI 


md oi 


a, 


and the 4th 


sound o1 


' e. Examples. 


6th 


(< 


a, 


tt 


5th 


" 


e. Ex. 


4th 


a 


a, 


tt 


3d 


tt 


o. Ex. 


5th 


it 


a, 


a 


2d 


a 


o. Ex. 


1st 


it 


e, 


a 


4th 


a 


i. Ex. 


3d 


tt 


e, 


tt 


3d 


a 


i and y. Ex. 


3d 


it 


e, 


tt 


3d 


it 


u. Ex. 


6th 


a 


e, 


tt 


2d 


a 


i and y. Ex. 


1st 


a 


i> 


tt 


1st 


tt 


y. Ex. 


5th 


a 


h 


a 


4th 


a 


y. Ex. 


2d 


it 


i, 


a 


2d 


a 


y. Ex. 


4th 


it 


o, 


tt 


4th 


a 


u. Ex. 


5 th 


n 


o, 


tt 


5th 


a 


u. Ex. 


6th 


tt 


o, 


ti 


2d 


a 


u. Ex. 



Exercise on the Towel Sounds. 
Model. 
First column of a — spell the word. 
M-a-t-e, mate ; 1st sound of a, sounded a. 
V-a-l-e, vale ; 
M-a-n-e, mane : " " " " &c. 



TThas trnt one sound as a vowel, which is like u. 



ORTHOGKAPHY. 



23 



Second column of a — spell the word. 
M-a-t, mat ; 2d sound of a, sounded a. 
B-e-g-a-n, began ; 2d sound of a, sounded a. 
Continue the exercises in the same way through all the table. 



I 4. CONSONANTS HAVING BUT ONE SOUND. 

Spell the words, taking care to utter the consonant sounds dis- 
tinctly. 



B — Bib, bible. 

H — Hoarhound, hobby-horse. 

J — Jejune, jujube. 

K — King-like, kipskin. 

L — Levelling, laconically. 



M — Mammon, memento. 
P — Paper-mill, peppermint. 
Q — Quinquennial, conquest. 
R — Rare-ripe, rear-rank. 
V — Valved, velvet. 



§ 5. CONSONANTS HAVING MORE THAN ONE SOUND. 





a* 






1. Like Jc. 


2. Like s (hissir 


»g). 


3. Like z. 


cap. 


cell. 




sacrifice. 


cup. 


cite. 
Ch. 




suffice. 


1. 


2. Like sh. 




3. Like 7c. 


church. 


machine. 




chasm. 


march. 


chaise. 




chord. 


1. 


2. Like t 




3. Like/. 


day. 


braced. 




soldier. 


add. 


mixed. 
F. 






1. 






2. Like v. 


fan, effort. 






of. 



* sounds like k, before a, I, o, u, r; like s, before e, i, and y. 



24 





uxvin 


G. 


Ljrnx . 




1. Hard. 






2. Like/. 




go- 






gem. 




gave. 




Gh. 


gin. 




1. Like/. 






2. Like k. 


cough. 






hough, pronounced hock. 


rough. 




K 






1. 






2. Like ng. 




nun. 






finger. 


• 


nineteen. 




S. 


longer. 




1. Hissing. 


2. Like z. 




3. Like sh. 


4. Like zh. 


assassin. 


his. 




sugar. 


measure. 


Mississippi. 


was. 


Ph. 


sumach. 


treasure. 


1. Like/. 






2. Like v. 




phantom. 






Stephen. 




epitaph. 




T. 






1. 






2. Like 1st sound of ch. 


tetter. 






nature. 




despot. 






creature. 





Th. 

1. Aspirate (sounded with the 2. Vocal (sounded with the 

breath). voice), 

thin. thou, 

thistle. those. 

X. 

1. Like z. 2. Like ks. 3. Like gz. 

Xenophon. Wax exalt. 

Xerxes. mix. exist. 



ORTHOGRAPHY. 25 



1. 2. Like zh. 

zone, breeze. . azure. 

Exercise on Consonants of more than one Sound. 

Model. Spell the word. 

C-a-p, cap ; 1st sound of c, like k. Through the column. 
C-e-1-1, cell ; 2d sound of c, like hissing s. Proceed in like 
manner through the whole table. 

I 6. TABLE OF TERMINATIONS. 

1. Tian, cian, pronounced shan. 

2. Tial, cial, " shal. 

3. Tient, cient, " shent. 

4. Science, tience, " shence. 

5. Tian, tion, " chan, chun. 

6. Tial, " chal. 

7. Cean, cion, sion, and tion, pronounced shun. 

8. Chre, pronounced kur, 

9. Si, zi, " like zh. 

10. Ce, ti, ci, sci, pronounced like sh. 

Exercise. 
Model. Spell the word. 
G-e-n-t-i-a-n, gentian ; tian is sounded like shan. 

1. Gentian, musician. 

2. Partial, social. 

3. Patient, ancient. 

4. Conscience, patience. 

5. Bastion, christian. 

6. Bestial, celestial. 

7. Ocean, coercion, mansion, emotion. 

8. Ochre, sepulchre (centre, acre, like ur). 

9. Brazier, fusion. 

10. Cetaceous, gracious, conscious, cautious, 
3 



26 ORTHOGRAPHY. 



§ 7. SILENT LETTERS. 

Spell each word in the list below, and name the letters which are 
silent; thus, 

S-p-e-a-k, speak ; in this word, the letter a is not sounded. 

List of Words having Silent Letters. 

A — Speak, breath. K — Knob, knife. 

B — Debt, dumb. L —Walk, calm. 

C — Czarina, czar. M — Mnemonics, Mnemosyne. 

Ch — Schism, yacht. N — Hymn, column. 

D — Wednesday, stadtholder. — Feoffment, people. 

E — Fable, fasten. P — Psalm, pneumatics. 

G — Gnat, gnash. S — Isle, island. 

Gh — Thought, plough. T — Often, rustle. 

H — Heir, hour. U — Rogue, etiquette. 

I — Grief, relief. W — Write, answer, snow. 



Diphthongs and Triphthongs {Equivalents). 
Table of Sounds. (See Model after the Table.) 



aa. 




ae. 


1. Like al. % a 2. 


1. el. 


2.6 2. 


Baalam. Canaan. 


sedile. 
ai. 


aphaeresis. 


1. a 2. 2. e 2. 3 


i. i 1. 4. a 1. 


5. i 2. 6. u 2. 


plaid. said. i 


aisle. rain. 


mountain. Britain. 


ao. 


aw. 


ay. 


1. a I. 2. a 4. 


1. a 4. 1. a 1 


. 2. e2. 3. a3andel 


gaol, extraordinary. 


straw. say. 
au. 


says. ay. 


1. a I. 2. a 2. 


3. a 4. 4. 


o 2 or a 4. 5. o 1. 


gauge. draught. 


taught. 


laurel. hautboy. 



ORTHOGRAPHY. 



27 



ea. 
1. e 1. 2. a 1. 3. a 3. 4. e 2. 

meat. steak. hearth. wealth. 



ee. 
1. e 1. 2. i 2. 

see. been. 



1. el. 

receive. 

1. ol. 

yeoman. 



2. a I. 

veil. 



3. a 2. 

heir. 



4. 6 2. 
heifer. 



ew. 
1. y 4 and w 1. 
Europe. 

ey. 
1. a 1. 2. e 1. 

they. key. 



2. o3. 
georgio. 

2. w5. 
rheum. 



eo. 
3. el. 

people. 



5. it 

sleight. 

4. e2. 

feoffment. 



ew>. 



1. Ml. 

few. 



6. z 2. 

forfeit. 

5. m 2. 
surgeon. 

2. ol. 
sew. 



xa. 
1. ?/4anda2. 2. i2. 
filial. carriage. 



l.t'2andl. 2. i 1. 

Pompeii. 



1. i 1. 

die. 



w. 

2. el. 

thief. 



3. i 2. 

sieve. 



genu. 

1. ol. 

float. 



2. a 4. 
broad. 



oe. oi. 

1. ol. 2. o5. 3. el. 4. e2. I.a4andi2. 2.*1. 3. i2„ 
foe. shoe, antoeci. foetid. boil. choir, tortoise. 



oo. 



1. ol. 

floor. 

1. a 3 and o 5. 
bound. 

ow\ 
1. a 3 and o 5. 
town. 



2. o5. 
school. 



2. a 4. 

bought. 



ow. 
3. ol. 
dough. 



3. 06. 
blood. 

4. ©5. 

ragout. 



4. o4. 

good. 



5. w2. 
tough. 



ua. 



1. a 5. 

quality. 



2. a 3. 
guard. 



3. al. 
quake. 



6. «4 
would. 

4. a 2. 
quack. 



!8 


ORTHOGRAPHY. 


- 








ue. 






1. «5. 


2. w3. 


2. el. 


3. e2. 




rude. 


conquer. 
ui. 


querist. 


quell, 
wo. 




1. i 1. 


2. i 2. 


3. w5. 


1. w3. 




guile. 


quilt. 


suit. 


liquor. 




w?/. awe. 


aye. 


eaw. 




e#e. 


1. i 1. 1. a 4. 


Lai 


1. o 1. 2 


!. « 1. 


1. il, 


buy. awe. 


aye. 


beau. beauty. 


eye. 


tew. 


iew. 


ceu. 


ewe. 




1. «1. 


1. Ml. 


1. Ml. 


1. ol. 




lieu. 


view. 


manoeuvre. 


owe. 





The author, in this table, has received material aid from A. H. 
Weld, A. M., and a few others. 

Model. Spell the word. 

B-a-a-1-a-m, Baalam ; aa has the first sound of a, as in mate. 
Explode — a. 

C-a-n-a-a-n, Canaan ; aa has the second sound of a, as in mat 
Explode — a. 

Table for sounding the Diphthongs. 

a 3 and i2. o 3 and i 2. a 3 and o 5. 

ay. oi or oy. ou or ow. 

Examples. (See last Model.) 
Ay, oil, boy, loud, town, soil, toy, mound, down, void, cloy, 
round, now. 

I 8. SYLLABLES. 

A Syllable is one letter, or more, pronounced in one 
sound, unless a Proper Diphthong, or Triphthong, occurs, 
[n-com-pre-hen-si-bil-i-ty ; name each syllable separately, 



ORTHOGRAPHY. 29 

and tell why it is a syllable ; thus, in is a syllable, because 
the letters are pronounced in one sound, &c. 

In writing a word at the end of a line, do not divide a syllable, 
but always place the hyphen between two syllables. 

1. A Monosyllable is a word of one syllable. 

2. A Dissyllable is a word of two syllables. 

3. A Trisyllable is a word of three syllables. 

4. A Polysyllable is a word of four or more syllables. 
Exercises numbered to correspond with the definitions 

above. 

Model. 

J-u-s-t, just ; a monosyllable, because it is a word of one syllable. 

1. Just, soft, rare, fate, care. 

2. Justly, softly, rarely, fatal, careless. 

3. Justify, softening, carefully, rarify, fatally. 

4. Justifying, care-expelling, rarefaction, incompatibility. 

\ 9. WORDS. 

A word is one syllable or more, either spoken or 
written, as the sign of an idea. 

Divisions. 

1. A Primitive word is one not derived from another 
word in the language. 

2. A Derivative word is one which is derived from 
some word or words in the language. 

3. A Compound word is formed of two or more words. 
Exercises corresponding to the numbers above. 

Model. Spell the word. 
B-1-a-c-k, black; a Simple word, because it is not formed by 
uniting other words. 

1. Black, bee, gold, copy, table, never, the, less. 
Heed, art, act, safe, law, command, blame, 

2. Heedful, artfully, safely, lawyer, commanding, blamable. 

3* 



30 ORTHOGRAPHY. 

3. Black-bird, bee-hive, goldsmith, copy-book, table-cloth, never- 
theless. 



§ 10. SPELLING. 

Spelling is the art of expressing words by their proper 

Ltters. 

Rules for Spelling Derivative Words. 

Rule I. The final e of a primitive word is usually 
omitted before a suffix beginning with a vowel. 

Obs. 1. Final e, preceded by c or g, is not omitted before a suffix 
commencing with a or o. (Final means last.) 

Obs. 2. Final e, preceded by e or o, is retained before the suffix 
ing. It is also retained before ing, added to the words dye, singe. 

Obs. 3. The letters ie final, are changed into y before ing. 

Exercises on the Rule and Observations. 
Model. Spell the words, and add ing. 

Cleave, cleaving ; the final e is omitted, because the suffix ing 
commences with a vowel. 

Flame, rule, charge, trace, torture, fondle, tame, change, force, 
shine, bafile, refuse, rule. 

Spell the same words, and add ed. 

Obs. 1. Correct the following errors, and give a reason for the 
correction. 

Tracable, peacable, chargable, couragous, outragous, changable, 
blameable, cureable, rateable. (Final e, in the last three words, is 
not preceded by c or g.) 

Obs. 2. Correct the following errors, and give a reason for the 
correction. 

Seing, hoing, shoing, feing, agreing, foreseing, treing, fleing, 
tying (coloring), singing (burning slightly). 

Obs. 3. Correct the following words, and give a reason for each 
correction. 



ORTHOGRAPHY. 31 

Dieing (expiring), vieing, tieing, outvieing, untieing. 

Rule II. When a monosyllable ends with a single 
consonant, preceded by a single vowel, that consonant is 
doubled before a suffix beginning with a vowel. 

Obs. 1. The letter x (ks) is never doubled. 

Exercises. 

Double the last letter of the following words, and add— 

1. Ed; wrap, chat, stop, mar, rob, jar, skip, plan. 

2. Ing ; wrap, chat, stop, mar, rob, jar, skip, plan. 
Give the reason for doubling. 

Obs. 1. Correct the following errors, and give a reason for the 
correction. 

Taxxed, mixxed, vexxed, boxxed, fixxed. 

Rule III. The final consonant of any word accented 
on the last syllable, is doubled before a suffix beginning 
with a vowel. 

Obs. 1. But if the accent is removed to another syllable, the 
consonant remains single. 

Exercises. 

Double the final consonant, and add (reason?), 

1. Ed; compel, admit, confer, occur, debar. 

2. Ing ; compel, admit, confer, occur, debar. 
Obs. 1. Correct the following errors. (Reason ?) 
Conferrence, referrence, preferrence, deferrence. 

Rule IV. Final y 9 when not preceded by a vowel, is 
generally changed into i before a suffix not commencing 
with i. 

Exercises. 

Change final y into i, and add ed. 

Try, cry, magnify, verify, imply, dry, deny, apply, defy, comply, 
reply, simplify, indemnify, ratify.. 



32 ETYMOLOGY. 

Correct the following errors. (Reason ?) 

Triing, criing, magnifiing, verifiing, impliing, driing, deniing, 
appliing, defiing, compiling, repliing. 



INTRODUCTORY LESSONS 

IN 

ETYMOLOGY. 



LESSON I. 



Etymology, from etumos, true, real, first, and logos, a 
word, means the true or first word from which others are 
derived. 

It treats of the different classes of words, of the 
changes they undergo, and their derivation. 

The first class includes the names of things. Every object which 
you can see, has a name. Just think of all the persons in the 
world ; the places, the animals, the rivers, the mountains, the trees, 
the fruits, the flowers; look at the objects in the room, in the street, 
in the yard, in the field, in the heavens ! What a large class of 
words ! 

All these objects have names. Mention or show something which 
has not a name. 

These words are all called Nouns. 

Noun is derived from the Latin word nomen, which signifies a 
name. 

Exercises. 

Why are the following words called Nouns ? George Washing- 
ton, William Penn, Thomas Jefferson. 
Ans. Because they are the names of persons. 



ETYMOLOGY. 33 

New York, Philadelphia, Boston, New Orleans? 
Aiis. Because they are the names of places. 
Table, chair, book, knife, horse, wolf, star? 
Ans. Because they are the names of things. , 

Now write upon your slate twenty nouns, the names of persons ; 
twenty, the names of places ; twenty, the names of things. 

You can learn a great deal by making use of your eyes. Seeing 
is one of the principal means of obtaining knowledge. When you 
look at a tree, you behold the object itself; if you see the word 
written or printed, it is only the sign of the object ; when you hear 
the word spoken, it is the name of the object. 

You must be careful to mark the distinction between the object, 
its sign, and its name. 

Think how much may be learned by seeing. If you had never 
seen a tree, and should hear the word spoken, it would be difficult 
to make you understand it ; but when you see the object, you can 
easily comprehend it. Thus, you have a practical knowledge of 
what the object is. 

But you must think about it, if you wish to learn. Examine its 
different parts ; as the roots, bark, wood, trunk, limbs, twigs, 
leaves; whether it is large, with spreading branches, or small; tall, 
a native of the forest, or brought from some other country ; its 
various uses, such as affording shade, timber, rails, fruit, &c, &c. 
If you do this, you will be able to write a long composition on the 
word. 

You will thus acquire the habits of observing and tJmiking. If 
you write upon this subject, begin either at the top, or at the 
bottom, and describe every part in regular order. 

You know now that the names of all the objects in the world are 
called nouns. 

But you should be told that there are many words classed with 
nouns, which are names of that which cannot be seen. 

Explain Etymology — treats of — first class includes — all objects 
have — nouns — noun derived — seeing — what distinction to be made 
— thinking — what habits acquired — if you write upon the subject 
tree — names of all objects — are all nouns the names of things 
which may be seen ? 



34 ETYMOLOGY. 

LESSON II. 

A black veil. Here the quality black, is united with the object 
veil. Wash it so as to take out the black color ; we then have the 
quality blackness, separated from the object; it is taken away, it is 
abstracted. 

We call such nouns Abstract Nouns. 

Tell why the following words are Abstract Nouns. (Abstract is 
derived from abs, from, and traho, to draw.) Roughness, hardness, 
coldness, whiteness. 

A Proper Noun is the name of an individual,, that is, 
one person or thing. 

Why are the following called Proper Nouns ? 

Daniel Webster, Henry Clay, Ohio, Richmond, Cotopaxi, Ama- 
zon, North America. 

Write on your slates six Proper Nouns. Why Proper? 

There are many shingles on the roof of a house, and each one is 
called a shingle. Hence the name shingle is common to every one 
on the roof; it is the name of a class of things. There may be 
fifty boys in a male school ; the name boy is common to them all. 

Such nouns are called Common Nouns. 

Why are the following words called Common Nouns ? 

Tree, ship, steamboat, house. 

Write ten Common Nouns. Why Common ? 

Collective means many taken in one body. 
Army is a Collective Noun, because it signifies many 
persons in a body. 

Why are the following Nouns called Collective ? 
People, nation, committee, court. 
Write six Collective Nouns. Why Collective ? 
Collective is derived from collectum, to put together. 

Some words denote the names of actions or states. 
These words are called Verbal Nouns. 
Working is a Verbal Noun, because it is the name of an action. 



ETYMOLOGY. 35 

Sleeping is a Verbal Noun, because it is the name of a state. 
Why are the following Nouns called Verbal ? 
Walking, lying, standing, writing, sitting. 
Write ten Verbal Nouns. Why Verbal? 
Explain, in-order, the subjects of this lesson. 

Note. — Verbal means derived from a verb, a word which ex- 
presses action, state, or being. 

LESSON III. 

In conversation, some one must speak; some one must be spoken 
to; and some person or thing must be spoken of. 

Hence there are three persons : 

The First, which denotes the speaker. 

The Second, which denotes the person spoken to. 

The Third, which denotes the person or thing spoken of. 

Exercises. 

Point out the person, and tell why. 

J tell you lie is in town. He said to me, you were at home. You 
know we saw them. Philadelphia is a large city. I love my 
friends, and you hate your enemies ; but they love both their friends 
and their enemies. 

Note. — I, my, mine, me, we, our, ours, us, represent the speaker, 
and are in the first person. 

Thou,, thy, thine, thee, ye, your, yours, represent the persons 
spoken to. They are in the second person. 

He, his, him, she, her, hers, they, their, theirs, them, represent 
the persons or things spoken of. They are in the third person. 

Examples. 
Point out each person, and give a reason. 

I, John, declare to you that they committed the crime. Thou, the 
merchant, and we, were present. 

Gender is derived from genus, a sort or kind. It dis- 
tinguishes males from females. 



36 ETYMOLOGY. 



Examples. 

The Masculine Gender denotes males. 
The Feminine Gender denotes females. 

Tell which words are Masculine, and why ? Which Feminine, 
and why ? 

Man, woman, girl, boy, lass, maid, he, she, mother, father, 
daughter, son. 

Give the gender of the following nouns, and why. Pitcher, 
wash-stand, bowl, glass, towel, brush. 

Can you tell ? Are they neither males nor females ? They must 
then be of the Neuter Gender, for the word neuter means neither ; 
but when we say Neuter Gender, we do not mean that it is a 
gender, but that it is neither gender. 

Write ten words in each gender. Why ? 

Number shows whether a word means one, or more. 
The singular number denotes but one. 
The plural number denotes more than one. 

Examples. 

Tell which words are singular, and why? Which plural, and 
why? 

Tables, king, queen, apples, knife, wolf, fly, marble, knives, flies, 
wolves. 

Write ten words in each number. 

Explain in order the subjects of this lesson. 

lesson iy. 

A sentence consists of two or more words which make 
complete sense ; as, fire burns. 

One sentence is called a Simple sentence. 

Two or more sentences connected together, are called a 
Compound sentence. 



ETYMOLOGY. 37 



Examples. 



Point out the Simple sentences. Why Simple ? 

Point out the Compound sentences. Why Compound? 

1. The bird sings, but the lion roars. 2. Fire burns. 3. Water 
freezes, and ice melts. 4. Snow falls. 

Write five Simple, and five Compound sentences. 

In the first sentence, which is the actor? Ans. Bird. What does 
the bird do? Ans. Sings. What does sings express ? Ans. The 
action. Which is the next actor ? Lion. What does the lion do ? 
Roars. What does roars express ? The action. 

In the second sentence, which is the actor? What does the 
•fire do? What does burns express ? 

In the third sentence, which is the actor? What does the 
water do? What does freezes express? Which is the next actor? 
What does melts express ? 

In the fourth sentence, which is the actor? What does the snow 
do ? What does falls express ? 

Now you know if there is a word to represent the actor, there 
must also be one to represent the action. 

In the sentences above, the words which express the actors, are 
Nouns ; those which express the actions, are Verbs. 

But we call the actor the Subject, and the verb we call 
the Predicate. 

Exercise. 

Now write Subjects before the following Predicates : 

eats. drinks. run. walk. flow. 

bites. loves. ride. 

Write Predicates for the following Subjects : 

Man . Boy . Girl . River . Grass . 

Clouds . Rain . Trees . Pupils . Labor . 

The Subject acts ; the Predicate tells, or affirms, some- 
thing about the Subject. 

_ The Object is that which is acted upon ; as, the farmer 
cuts grass. 
4 



38 ETYMOLOGY. 

Farmer is the Subject, because he acts. Cuts is the Predicate, 
because it tells the action performed by the farmer. Grass is the 
Object, because it is the thing acted upon. This method of naming 
the Subject, the Predicate, and the Object, is what we call 
analyzing. 

Analyze the following sentences, and give the reasons. 

Temperance promotes health. Men build houses. Water 
quenches thirst. Boys make kites. Horses draw carts. Bees 
make honey. 

A sentence in which a thing is merely affirmed or 
declared, is called a Declaratory Sentence; as, "It 
snows." 

A sentence in which something, is commanded, per- 
mitted, or entreated, is called an Imperative Sentence ; 
as, " Go to your work." 

When a question is asked, the sentence is called an 
Interrogative Sentence ; as, " How long have you been 
at school?" 

When anything wonderful or surprising is expressed, 
the sentence is called Exclamatory ; as, " How wonderful 
are thy works !" 

Explain in order the subjects of this lesson. 

LESSON V. 

The Subject is often limited by other words ; as, Wil- 
liam's servant draws water. 

Analyzed. 

Servant is the Subject, because he acts, he draws. 

It is limited by the noun William's. Is it John's servant? It 
is not. Is it Henry's servant? It is not. Whose' servant is it? 
It is William's. Do you not perceive that the noun William's limits 
the Subject servant, making it a particular servant. It limits, 
explains, or points out, whose servant is meant. When the subject 



ETYMOLOGY. 39 

is thus limited, we call it the Modified subject. William's servant 
is the modified subject, because the word William's limits servant. 

Draws is the Predicate, because it tells what the subject does ; it 
affirms something of the subject. It is limited by the Object water. 
Does the servant draw a cart? He does not. Does he draw his 
breath ? He does not. What does he draw ? "Water. 

Do you not see that the action of drawing is limited to a parti- 
cular thing? When the action is limited, we call it the Modified 
Predicate. 

Draws water is the modified predicate, because draws is limited 
by the object water. 

Water is the Object of the action, it is the thing acted upon ; but 
it is not limited by any word. 

We do not know whether it is hot, cold, river, well, or spring 
water. Hence it is called the Unmodified Object. 

The principal parts of a sentence are the Subject, the Predicate, 
and the Object. 

Sub. Servant. Pred. Draws. Obj. Water. Mod. Sub. Wil- 
liam's servant. Mod. Pred. Draws water. TJnmod. Obj. 

Taking a sentence apart, and showing how the principal parts 
are limited, explained, or modified, is what we call analyzing it. 

Method of Analyzing. 

1. Point out the Subject. 

2. Name the word or words which modify it. 

3. Point out the Predicate. 

4. The words which modify it. 

5. Th%Object. 

6. The words which modify it. 

7. The words which modify the modifiers. 

Cases. 

The Subject, or actor, is always in the Nominative 
Case. fe 

The Object of an action (or of a relation), is said to 
be in the Objective Case. ■ 



40 ETYMOLOGY. 

When a word denotes possession or property, it is said 
to be in the Possessive Case ; as farmer's. 
Analyze the following sentence : 
The farmer's hogs destroyed his neighbor's corn. 

Sub. Fred. ObJ. 

hogs. destroyed. corn. 

I I .1 

farmer's. corn. neighbor's. 

the. neighbor's. his. 

his. 

What destroyed? Hogs. Destroyed what? Corn. Whose 
hogs? Farmer's. Whose corn? Neighbor's. What farmer? 
The. Whose neighbor ? His. 

Here you see how the words modify each other. Hogs, the 
subject, is modified by farmer's ; farmer's is modified by the. 

The farmer's hogs, is the whole modified subject. Destroyed, the 
predicate, is modified by corn; corn is modified by neighbor's; 
neighbor's is modified by his. Destroyed his neighbor's corn, is the 
whole modified predicate. 

Corn, the object, is modified by neighbor's ; neighbor's is modi- 
fied by his. His neighbor's corn, is the whole modified object. 

Make a list of the subjects in this lesson, and explain them. 

LESSON VI. 
Preposition means a placing before. 
Relation means a connection between words^ 
Adjunct means some words added to another, to limit 
or explain it. 

They live town ; in must be placed before town to connect 

the words, and show their relation to each o'ther. Town is the 
object of this relation, and hence in the Objective Case. 

In town is an Adjunct, added to live in order to limit it, or explain 
where they live. 

" I heard the crashing of the pointed rocks through the bottom 
of the ship." ( Weld.) 



ETYMOLOGY. 



41 



Subject. 

I 



Analyzed. 

Predicate. 



heard 



the 



crashing 



of rocks 

the | pointed 



Object. 
| crashing | 

the of rocks. 

the | pointed 



through 



• bottom 
the 



of — ship, 
the 



Here we have a view of a simple sentence analyzed. 

The subject, 7, is unmodified. 

The predicate, heard, is modified by the object crashing ; crash- 
ing is modified by the, and the Adjunct, of the pointed rocks ; of 
connects rocks and crashing; the and pointed, modify rocks. 

Heard is also modified by the Adjunct through the bottom; of 
connects heard and bottom; the modifies bottom; the Adjunct, of 
the ship, modifies bottom ; of connects ship and bottom ; the 
modifies ship. 

The words of, to, for, by, with, in, from, through, and 
many others, are called Prepositions, because they are 
placed before nouns to show their relation to other words. 

The preposition, and the words following it, are called 
the Adjunct of the word they limit. 

The noun following a preposition is its object, and 
therefore in the Objective Case. 

Exercises. 

Supply modified subjects. • love. hates. fear. 

plough. reads. saw. heard. 

Supply modified objects after the same predicates. 

Supply Adjuncts. They went -. He fell . The ship 

sailed . Syllables are formed . Milk is obtained . 

The men fought . Harrisburg is the seat . Behold the 

lilies . 

Supply Possessive Case. horse. book. hat. 

land. house. goods. 

Supply Predicates. Money by industry. Bees honey. 

Children their parents. Temperance health. Intempe- 
rance the mind. 

4* 



42 ETYMOLOGY. 

Give the heads of the subjects contained in this lesson in order, 
and explain them. 

LESSON VII. 

Adjective means added to. Write on your slates the word man. 
Add the word good to it — good man. Now add the word one — one 
good man. Add next the word old — one good old man. 

Use the words this, these, thpi, those, a, an, ten, happy, indus- 
trious, just, honest, faithful, or as many of them as will make 
sense, before the following words. 

Exercise in Writing. 

lady. girl. boy. 

servant. child. men. 

horses. merchant. farmers. 

inkstand. apple. orchard. 

Now all the words which have been added, either limit the nouns, 
or both limit the meaning, and express some quality at the same 
time. 

Those words, with many more, are put into one class, called 
Adjectives. Hence 

An Adjective is a word added to a noun to limit or 
modify its meaning ; or both to limit its meaning, and to 
express quality at the same time. Crood limits and quali- 
fies man; therefore, we call it a Qualifying Adjective. 
The word one does not express any quality, but it limits 
the word, in number, to only one man : hence we call it 
a Limiting Adjective. 

If we have three apples, ooO, and call the first large, the next 
will be called larger, and the third will be called largest. 

If we have three marbles, o o, and call one small, the next 
will be smaller, and the last will be smallest. 

Varying the word to express different degrees is called 
Comparison. In Grammar we have three Degrees. 

The first degree, which expresses the simple quality, is 
called the Positive Degree ; as, good. 



ETYMOLOGY. 43 

The second, which expresses more or less of the same 
quality, is called the Comparative Degree ; as, better. 

The third, which expresses the most or least of the 
same quality, is called the Superlative Degree ; as, best. 
Superlative is derived from super, beyond, and latum, to 
bear, or carry. 

Hence Superlative means that which exceeds all three, either in 
increasing or lessening the quality possessed. 

But there are other words united with Adjectives to express 
degrees of quality ; as, blacks, very black, too black, exceedingly 
black, rather black, more black, most black, less black, least black. 

We cannot, in fact, express all the different degrees. The Earth 
is supposed to be ninety-five millions of miles from the sun. This 
sum brought to quarters of an inch, would be more than, even 
imagination can reach. One quarter of an inch is some distance ; 
one half inch is a degree further, and every quarter would be a 
degree further. Suppose we begin at the one hundreth part of an 
inch, and add the same distance every time, until we should reach 
the nearest fixed star, which is more than twenty trillions * of miles 
from the Earth ! This will give you an idea of the infinity of 
degrees. 

Repeat in order the subjects of this lesson, and explain them. 

LESSON VIII. 

When a person speaks, he does not use his own name ; as, 
" George Pattison wishes to read ;" but he says, " I wish to read." 
Here / stands for George Pattison. Since it stands for the 
speaker's name, it is the first person. 

If the speaker should say, " We wish to read," wg stands for his 
own name in connection with the names of others. 

If I speak to one person, I may say, " Thou art, or you are 
beside yourself." But if I speak to two or more persons, I must 
say, " You are beside yourselves." 

Thou, you,' and yourself, represent the person or persons spoken 
to. Hence they are in the second person. 

If I speak of a person or persons, I say, " He loves, or she 

* A million, 1,000,000. A trillion, 1,000,000,000,000. Twenty trillions, 
20,000,000,000,000. 



44 ETYMOLOGY. 

loves, or they love." He, she, and they, are in the third person, 
because they represent the names of the person or persons 
spoken of. 

When we speak of one thing, or more, we say, " It is ripe ; but 
they are green ;" it and they are in the third person, because they 
stand for the name of the thing or things spoken of. 

" The soldiers fought bravely ; but they were defeated." You 
can omit they, and put "the soldiers" in the place of it. Hence 
" they" stands for "the soldiers." 

" Caesar came, Caesar saw, Caesar conquered." In order to avoid 
the repetition of Caesar, we use the word he ; as, " Caesar came, 
he saw, he conquered." In his own words, " Vent, vidi, vici." 

These words, which stand for nouns, and show their 
persons, are called Personal Pronouns. Pronoun is 
derived from pro, for, and nomen, a noun or name. 

Kelative (from relativus, and relativus from re, back, and latum, 
to carry,) means carried back, or referring back to something 
which precedes; as, " The bird which sung, has flown." The 
word which, in this sentence, refers or relates to the noun bird, 
which precedes, or is placed before it. 

You cannot take away which, and put in its place the word bird ; 
but which represents, or refers to, or relates to bird. Bird is called 
the Antecedent of which, because it precedes it. — {Ante, before, 
and cedo, to go.) 

These words, which relate to Antecedents, are called 
Relative Pronouns. {Who, which, what, that) 

The word who, when used in asking questions, is called 
an Interrogative Pronoun; as, "Who performed the 
work?" This is a direct question. 

But when used in an indirect question, it is called an 
Indefinite Pronoun; as, "I know not who performed 
the work." 

Note. — Interrogative and Indefinite Pronouns do not relate to 
Antecedents. 

Exercise on the Pronouns. 

Supply Personal Pronouns in the following blanks: 



ETYMOLOGY. 45 

know . ■ injure . should love 

parents. have destroyed fruit-trees. 

Why are they called Personal Pronouns ? 

Supply Relative Pronouns. 

That is the man committed the deed. This is the same 

man bought the knife with the murder was committed. 

We heard was said, and saw was done. 

Why are the words inserted called Relative Pronouns ? 

What word is the Antecedent of each Relative ? 

Note. — The word thing must he supplied for the antecedent of 
what. 

Supply Interrogative Pronouns. 

has done this ? made you ? preserves you ? 

Why called Interrogative? Does an Interrogative have an Ante- 
cedent? 

Supply Indefinite Pronouns. 

We did not hear — — was elected. But we know received 

the smallest number of votes. We were not informed received 

the highest number of votes. 

Why are the words inserted called Indefinite Pronouns ? 

Because they refer to persons unknown. 

LESSON IX. 

A Verb is a word which expresses action ; as, " The boy 
runs, eats, drinks, works, plays," &c. 

Boy is the subject or actor, and the words following it affirm the 
actions of" the boy. 

But a verb is often used to affirm or assert a thing, without ex- 
pressing action; as, " Troy was." Here -the verb was asserts or 
affirms merely the being or existence of Troy. " Hector sleeps." 
Here sleeps affirms the state or condition of its subject, Hector. 

Transitive means passing beyond. The word is derived from 
trans, beyond, and Hum, to go ; passing beyond. 

Intransitive means not passing beyond. The word is derived 
from in, not, trans, beyond, and Hum, to go ; not passing beyond. 

Explanation of a Transitive Verb. 
" Men cut wood." 



46 ETYMOLOGY. 

Men is the subject, because it is that of which something is 
affirmed. Not modified. 

Cut is the predicate, or Transitive Verb, because it affirms action 
of its subject, men. It is modified by the object wood. 

Cut wood is the modified predicate. The verb cut is Transitive, 
because the action which is performed by men does not cease with 
men, but passes beyond, and acts upon wood. What do men cut ? 
Wood. 

Explanation of an Intransitive Verb. 

" The preacher smiled." 

Preacher is the subject, because something is affirmed of it, It 
is modified or limited by the, to a particular preacher. 

The preacher is the modified subject. 

Smiled is the predicate, because it affirms something of its subject, 
preacher. It is not modified. 

The verb smiled is Intransitive, because the action of smiling 
does not extend beyond the subject preacher ; it ceases with him, 
because there is nothing to be acted upon, there is no object. 

Hence, a Transitive Verb is one which has an Object. 
An Intransitive Verb is one which has no Object. 

-Exercise. 

Analyze, and tell why the verbs are Transitive, or why Intran- 
sitive. 

Small streams form large rivers. Peach trees bloom in the 
spring. The merry birds sing in the spring season. The lark 
sings his song at early morn. The mower cuts the tender grass 
with his sharp scythe. 

Now write five sentences containing Transitive Verbs, and five 
containing Intransitive Verbs. 

Transitive Verbs have two voices ; one called the Active 
Voice, and the other, the Passive Voice. 

The subject of a verb in the Active Voice, is the actor ; 
as, " Soldiers conquer." 

The subject of a verb in the Passive Voice, is acted 
upon; as, "Soldiers are conquered." 



ETYMOLOGY. 47 

Write five sentences, each containing a verb in the Active Voice, 
and five sentences, each containing a verb in the Passive Voice. 
Write in order the subjects of this lesson, and explain them. 

LESSON X. 

Mode means the manner of speaking, asserting, or 
affirming any thing. 

"Snow is white/' In this sentence, a fact is declared — it is 
spoken in a declaring or declaratory manner or mode. 

Since indicative means declaring, we call it the Indica- 
tive Mode, or manner of speaking. 

Examples. 
Tell why the verbs are in the Indicative Mode. 
I love. They hate. The ocean roars. Time flies. 

This mode, then, merely declares or indicates. It is 
also used in asking a question; as, "Is snow white?" 
"Shall we be slaves?" "Have you learned your 
lesson?" 

Potential means having power. 

Hence, when we speak in a manner which shows that 
we have power to do a thing, we say that the verb is in 
the Potential Mode; as, "I can learn," that is, I have 
power to learn. 

This mode implies also possibility; as, "It may rain;" 
liberty; as, "He may go;" duty; as, "Children should 
obey;" and necessity; as, "We all must die." 

It may be used also in asking a question ; as, " May we go ?" 
Write five sentences containing verbs in the Indicative Mode, and 

five in the Potential Mode. 

Subjunctive signifies subjoined, or added to; as, "We will go, 

unless it vain" Here, unless it rain is added to "we will go," to 

denote a contingency — the going depends on its not raining — it is 

doubtful whether it will rain or not. 



48 • ETYMOLOGY. 

"You may have the goods, if you will pay me in one week.' 7 
" If you will pay me in one week," is added to express the condi- 
tion upon which he can have the goods. 

Hence, when we speak in a conditional or doubtful 

manner, the verb is said to be in the Subjunctive Mode. 

Write five examples containing verbs in the Subjunctive Mode. 

Imperative means commanding. "March forward, 
sir." This manner of speaking is called the Imperative 
Mode. 

But this mode is not always used for commanding ; it 
is sometimes employed in entreating; as, "Forgive our 
sins;" sometimes in permitting; as, " Gfo wherever you 
wish." 

Write five sentences, each containing a verb in the Imperative 
Mode. 

Infinitive means unlimited. Hence, when we use a 
verb without a subject, and therefore not limited by 
number or person, it is said to be in the Infinitive Mode ; 
as, "We love to read ;" "They are willing to work'," 
"He is about to go" 

Write five sentences containing verbs in the Infinitive Mode. 

Explain the subjects of this lesson in order. 

LESSON XI. 

We speak of things as taking place at different times ; as, "The 
lark is singing ; he sung this morning ; he will sing again to- 
morrow morning." 7s singing refers to the present time ; he sings, 
or is singing now. Sung refers to a time completely past — this 
morning. Will sing refers to a time yet to come — to-morrow 
morning. 

How many time3 are spoken of? Three. 

Instead of the word time, we use the word Tense, which means 
time. 



ETYMOLOGY. 49 

Is singing, then, is in the Present Tense, because it 
expresses what takes place in present time. 

Sung is in the Past Tense ? because it denotes what 
happened in time wholly past. 

Will sing is in the Future Tense, because it refers to 
what will happen hereafter. 

Before proceeding further, write five sentences containing a verb 
in the Present Te'nse, five in the Past Tense, and five in the Future 
Tense. 

The Present, the Past, and the Future are the princi- 
pal divisions of time. But there are three other 
divisions. 

<; I have just written a letter." The writing was commenced in 
past time, but finished in present time. We call this division of 
time the Present Perfect Tense. 

The Present Perfect Tense denotes an action or event 
begun in past time, but completed in present time. 

Note. — The present time may include this whole day, this week, 
this month, this year, or this century. 

Write five sentences, each containing a verb in the Present Per- 
fect Tense. 

" I had written the letter before he arrived." The action of 
writing was begun in past time, and completed before another 
past time happened — the time of his arrival. We call this division 
of time the Past Perfect Tense. 

The Past Perfect Tense denotes an action or event 
which had taken place at or before some other past time 
referred to. 

Write five sentences, each containing a verb in the Past Perfect 
Tense. 

" He will have finished his work before we shall arrive." Hero 
the finishing of the work will have taken place before the arrival. 
. This division of time is called the Future Perfect Tense. 

The Future Perfect Tense denotes a future action or 
5 



50 ETYMOLOGY. 

event which will have been completed at or before the 
time of some other future action or event. 

Write five sentences, each containing a verb in the Future Perfect 
Tense. 

EXERCISE ON THE MODES AND TENSES. 
Model. 
INDICATIVE MODE. 
TENSE. ACTIVE VOICE. PASSIVE VOICE. 

Pres. I love, do love, am loving. I am loved. 

Pres. Perf I have loved, have been loving. I have been loved. 

Past. I loved, did love, was loving. I was loved. 

Past Perf. I had loved, had been loving. I had been loved. 

Future. I shall or will love, or be loving. I shall or will be loved. 

Fu. Perf. I shall or will have loved, or I shall or will have been 
been loving. loved. 

POTENTIAL MODE. 

Pres. I may, can, or must love, or I may, can, or must be 

be loving. loved. 

Pres. Perf. 1 may, can, or must have I may, can, or must have 

loved, or been loving. been loved. 

Past. I might, could, would, or I might, could, would, or 

should love, or be loving. should be loved. 

Past Perf. I might, could, would, or I might, could, would, 

should have loved, or or should have 

been loving. been loved. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. 

Begin at the Indicative Mode, and place the word if before 7", in 
every tense. All the tenses will then be in the Subjunctive Mode. 
The Subjunctive Mode is also formed from the Potential Mode by 
prefixing if to each tense. 

Note. — Instead of if, any other word expressive of doubt or 
contingency may be prefixed ; such as, though, except, whether, lest, 
&c. Require the student to repeat both forms. 



ETYMOLOGY. 51 

IMPERATIVE MODE. 
TENSE. ACTIVE YOICE. PASSIVE VOICE. 

Pres. Love, love thou, do thou love, or be Be thou loved, or, Be 
loving. you loved. 

INFINITIVE MODE. 

Pres. To love, or to be loving. To be loved. 

Per/. To have loved, or been loving. To have been loved. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Pres. Loving. Being loved. 

Past. Loved. Loved. (Passive.) 

Per/. Having loved, or having been lov- Having been loved, 
ing. 

Put the following verbs in the different mode and tenses accord- 
ing to the Model. 

Command, receive, respect. 

Repeat in order what you have learned. 

LE.SSON XII. 

The Participle is a part of the verb, and qualifies a 
noun as an Adjective. 

The Present Participle denotes continuance of the 
action, being, or state ; as, running, being, reposing. 

The Past Participle denotes an action, being, or state, 
completed in past time ; as, loved, admired, applauded. 

The Perfect Participle denotes an action, being, or 
state, completed at the time referred to; as, having 
admired, having loved, having written. 

Exercises. 

Tell which are present, which past, and which perfect parti- 
ciples ? Why ? 

We saw him leaping. The hay when cut, is spread out to dry. 
When dried, it is made into shocks ; when shocked, it is housed. 

Having learned his lesson, he went to play. Having been 
appointed minister, he proceeded on his mission. 



02 ETYMOLOGY. 

A verb should have the same number and person that 
its subject has ; as, 

Singular. Plural. 

First Person. I love. We love. 

Second Person. Thou lovest. Ye or you love. 

Third Person. He loves. They love. 

Love is the first person and singular number, because its subject 
I, is first person and singular number. 

Lovest is second person and singular number, because its subject 
Thou, is second person and singular number, &c, through the 
the numbers and persons. 

But a verb in the Infinitive Mode has neither number 
nor person. 

Auxiliary means helping. An auxiliary verb is one 
which aids in conjugating the principal verb ; the auxili- 
aries are do, be, have, shall, will, may, can, must, and 
their variations. 

Exercise. 

Tell which are auxiliaries, and which principal verbs. 

I do believe in God. You will be pardoned if you repent. God 
will have mercy. He has provided for us. My word shall stand. 
Time will destroy us. We may live, but we can not tell how long. 
We must die. 

Note. — Bo believe, will be pardoned, &c, are taken together, and 
parsed as one word. 

The principal parts of a verb are — 
Present Indicative. Past Indicative. Past Participle. 
Love. Loved., Loved. 

Write. Wrote. Written. 

Regular means according to rule. 
Irregular means not according to rule. 
The past tense and past participle of a Regular verb, 
end in ed. They are formed by rule. 



ETYMOLOGY. 53 

The past tense and past participle of an Irregular 
verb, do not both end in ed. They are not formed by 
rule. Sometimes a verb may have both forms. 
Exercise. 

Point out the Regular Verbs. Why regular? 

Point out the Irregular Verbs. Why irregular? 

The thunder rolled. The rain poured. The lightning flashed. 
The mast fell. The waves rose. They struck the ship. The vessel 
sunk. All perished. 

A Defective Verb is one in which some of the princi- 
pal parts are wanting. 

Present Indicative. Past Indicative. Past Participle. 
May. Might. 

Explain, in order, the subjects of this lesson. 

LESSON XIII. 

A verb in the Progressive form ends in ing. It denotes conti- 
nuance of the action, being, or state; as, "I am writing now ;" 
that is, the action of writing is still continuing. 

Conjugation literally means a -yoking together (from con, together, 
and jv 'go, to yoke). 

Hence, the conjugation of a verb is arranging or 
putting together its numbers, persons, tenses, and 
moods ; as, 

INDICATIVE MODE. 
Present Tense. 
Singular. Plural. 

First Person. I love. 1. We love. 

. Second Person. Thou lovest. 2. Ye or you love. 

Third Person. He loves. 3. They love. 

The Modes, Tenses, Numbers, and Persons, are here yoked or 
joined together, so that they all may be seen at one view. 

Some verbs are called Impersonal, or rather Uniper- 
sona), because they are used only in one person, the third 
5* 



54 ETYMOLOGY. 

person singular ; as, it snows, it hails, it rains, it thun- 
ders, it lightens. 

Why is each of the verbs just mentioned, called Uni personal? 
Unipersonal is derived from anus, one, nnd persona, a person. 

Verbs compounded of a verb and a preposition, or an 
adverb, are called Compound Verbs ; as, to cast up, to 
dispose of, to run up, to laugh at, to come on or upon. 

Why are the verbs just mentioned called Compound 

Verbs ? 

There is a class of words which, for the most part, denote time, 
place, degree, manner, doubt, comparison, quantity, &c. 

These words are generally joined to verbs, adjectives, 
participles, or adverbs, to modify their meaning. They 
are called Adverbs. 

1. Adverbs of Time. 

Now, to-day, soon, seldom, often, yesterday, before, &c. 

They answer to the questions when? how long? how often? &c; 
as, "When are you going?" Ans. Now. "When were you 
there ?" To-day, &c. 

2. Adverbs of Place. 

Here, there, where, above, below, upwards, downwards, &c. 
They answer to the questions where? whither? whence? as, 
"Where are you?" Ans. I am here." 

3. Adverbs of Manner. 
Wisely, foolishly, justly, well, diligently, gloriously, &c. 
They answer to the question how? as, " How did he act?" Ans. 
Wisely. " Kow did he perform the work ?" Ans. Well. 

4. Adverbs of Degree. 

Very, greatly, quite, wholly, exceedingly, too, perfectly, manly. 
They answer to the question how? as, " How much did it cost?" 
Ans. Too much. 

5. Adverbs of Doubt. 

Perhaps, peradventure, perchance, possibly, undoubtedly ; as, 
" Will you ride to-day ?" Perhaps I may. 



ETYMOLOGY. 55 

6. Adverbs of Quantity. 
Much, enough, little, &c. 

7. Adverbs of Comparison. 
More, most, less, least, &c. 

Analyze the following sentences. Point out the Adverbs, and 
tell what they modify. 

Model. 
" I now see my error." 

I is the subject, because it is the word of which something is 
affirmed. It is not modified. 

See is the predicate, because it affirms something of its subject, 
I. It is modified by the adverb of time, now, and by the object, 
error. Error is modified by the pronoun my. 

Now see my error, is the modified predicate. Error is the object, 
modified by the pronoun my. My error is the modified object. 

Whither shall I fly? How wonderfully are all things made! We 
are wholly ignorant as to what will happen hereafter. That there 
is a Supreme Being, is undoubtedly beyond dispute. We have 
made this lesson almost too long. To-day is more pleasant than 
yesterday was. (Compound sentence — the clauses are connected 
by the conjunction than.) 

Explain the subjects of this lesson. 

LESSON XIV. 
Conjunction is derived from con, together, andjwigo, to join. 

Hence, those words which join words, clauses or sen- 
tences, and phrases, belong to the class called Conjunc- 
tions ; as, "James and John live together.'' 

In this sentence, the conjunction and unites the words James 
and John, which, taken together, form the subject of the verb live. 

"Deliberate slowly, but act promptly." This is a compound 
sentence. The first clause is, " deliberate slowly ;" the second 
clause is, "act promptly." The conjunction but connects the two 
clauses, which form a compound sentence. 



56 



ETYMOLOGY. 



Some of the principal conjunctions are and, if, that, both, either ', 
neither, or, nor, &c. 

Write five sentences, each containing a conjunction. 

Bead these introductory lessons until you understand them tho- 
roughly, and you will find but little difficulty in the part which 
follows. 



PART II. 

ETYMOLOGY. 

Etymology treats of the classes of words, of the 
changes they undergo, and of their derivations.* 

1 12. CLASSES OF WORDS. 

Nouns, Adjectives, Pronouns, Verbs, Adverbs, Prepo- 
sitions, Conjunctions, and Interjections. 

§13. NOUNS. 
The word Noun means name. 

Kinds. 

1. A Common Noun is the name of a class of things. 

2. A Proper Noun is the name of an individual person, 
place, or thing. 

Among common nouns are included, 

Obs. 1. Collective Nouns, which, with a singular form, signify 
many. 

* That part of Etymology which treats of derivation, is omitted in this 
work. For a full view of this subject, the student is referred to " The 
Young Analyzer," or " The Analytical Manual of Orthography and Defini- 
tion/' by James N. McElligott. 



ETYMOLOGY. 57 

Obs. 2. Abstract Nouns, which are the names of qualities. 
Obs. 3. Verbal Nouns, which are the names of actions or 
states. 

Exercises. 

Model. Spell and define the words. 

Beast, a brute. A common noun, because it is the name of a 
class of things. 

Common Nouns. 

1. Beast, bird, fish, insect, boy, girl, hat, house, tree, table, 
bench, merchant, farmer, blacksmith, tailor, shoe-maker, barber. 
(Look for the definitions in the vocabulary.) 

Proper Nouns. Spell and define. Why proper ? 

2. Washington, Hudson, America, Charleston, Mexico, Andes* 
Iliad, Odyssey, Pope. 

Collective Nouns. Spell and define. Why collective ? 

Obs. 1. People, army, council, flock, meeting, court, church, 
committee. 

Aestract Nouns. Spell and define. Why abstract? 

Obs. 2. Goodness, hardness, whiteness, impiety, virtue, vice, 
pride, theft, falsehood, ambition. 

Verbal Nouns. Spell and define. Why verbal? 
Obs. 3. Triumphing, reading, writing, rising, sleeping, rolling. 
Now turn to § 54, and write Exercise I. 

§ 14. Properties oe the Noun. 
Nouns have Person, Gender, Number, and Case. 

§ 15. Persons. 

1. The First Person denotes the speaker. 

2. The Second Person denotes the person spoken to. 

3. The Third Person denotes the person or thing 
spoken of. 



58 ETYMOLOGY. 

Exercise. 

Model. 

" I, Paul, have written it." Spell and define. 
Paul — a person's name — a proper noun, because it is the name 
of an individual person. 

First person, because it denotes the speaker. 

First Person. 

1. "I, Paul, have written it. I, Trojan uEneas, am present. 
Paul, an apostle unto Timothy, my own son." 

Second Person. Spell and define. Why second person ? 

2. " Robert, who did this ? My son, hear instruction. Father, 
forgive them." 

Third Person. Spell and define the word. Why third person ? 

3. " Iron is a useful metal. Brutus stabbed Ccesar." 

§16. GENDER. 

Gender is the property of a noun or pronoun which 
distinguishes sex. 

1. The Masculine Gender denotes males. 

2. The Feminine Gender denotes females. 

3. The Neuter Gender denotes objects which are 
neither male nor female. Neuter means neither. Neuter 
Gender is neither Gender. 

Exercise. 

Model. Spell and define. 

Father — a male parent — a Common Noun, because it is the 
name of a class of persons. 

Masculine Gender, it denotes a male. 

Third Person, it represents the person spoken of. 

Masculine Gender. Why? 
1. Bachelor, boy, brother, man, king, son. 



ETYMOLOGY, 



59 



Feminine Gender. Why? 
2. Maid, girl, sister, woman, queen, daughter. 



Neuter Gender. 
paper, ink, pen, coal, 



Why? 
3. Book, knife, paper, ink, pen, coal, stove. 
The Masculine and the Feminine Gender are distinguished, 



1. By different loords. 

Kequire the pupil to spell and define a word in the column of 
masculine nouns, and to name the gender ; then, to spell and define 
the feminine, and name the gender ; thus, 

Teacher. — King. Pupil. — K-i-n-g, king, the ruler of a kingdom ; 
Masculine. Q-u-e-e-n, queen, a female who rules a kingdom ; Femi- 
nine, (wife or widow of a King.) 

Note. — The definitions may be found in the Vocabulary of the 
nouns, \ 19. 

Masculine. Feminine. 

Lord. Lady. 

Male. Female. 

Master. Miss. 

Master. Mistress. 

Nephew. Niece. 

Papa. Mamma. 

Sir. Madam. 

Stag. Hind. 

Sloven. Slut. 

Uncle. Aunt. 

Wizard. Witch. 



2. By different terminations. Spell and define. 

Masculine. Feminine. Masculine. Feminine. 

Abbot. Abbess. Don. Donna. 

Administrator. Administratrix. Duke. Dutchess. 

Bridegroom. Bride. Emperor. Empress. 

Caterer. Cateress. Executor. Executrix. 

Czar. Czarina. God. Goddess. 



Masculine. 


Feminine. 


Beau. 


Belle. 


Buck. 


Doe. 


Drake. 


Duck. 


Earl. 


Countess. 


Father. 


Mother. 


Gander. 


Goose? 


Gentleman. 


Lady. 


Hart. 


Roe. 


Horse. 


Mare. 


Husband. 


Wife. 


Lad. 


Lass. 


Landlord. 


Landlady. 



60 


ETYMOLOGY. 




Masculine. 


Feminine. 


Masculine. 


Feminine. 


Governor. 


Governess. 


Signior. 


Sign or a. 


Hero. 


Heroine. 


Sorcerer. 


Sorceress. 


Infant. 


Infanta. 


Sultan. 


Sultana, Sultan- 


Landgrave. 


Landgravine. 




ess. 


Margrave. 


Margravine. 


Testator. 


Testatrix. 


Marquis. 


Marchioness. 


Votary. 


Votaress. 


Prince. 


Princess. 


Widower. 


Widow. 


Form the Feminine of the following nouns, 


by adding ess. Dc 


not neglect the spelling and defi 


nitions. 




Author. 


Heir. 


Peer. 


Shepherd. 


Baron. 


Host. 


Poet. 


Tailor. 


Count. 


Jew. 


Priest. 


Tutor. 


Dauphin. 


Lion. 


Prior. 


Viscount. 


Deacon. 


Patron. 


Prophet. 





Form the Feminine of the following nouns by omitting the last 
vowel, and adding ess. Spell and define. 

Actor. Chanter. Instructor. Songster. 

Ambassador. Conductor. Negro. Tig^r. 

Arbiter. Enchanter. Protector. Traitor. 

Benefactor. Hunter. 



3. By annexing another word. Spell and define. 
Masculine. Feminine. Masculine. Feminine. 



Landlord. 


Landlady. Gentleman. 


Gentlewoman. 


Man-servant. 


Maid-servant. Male child. 
Neuter Gender. 


Female child. 


Bench. 


Cap. Flower. 


Slate. 


Bell. 


Chair. House. 


Table. 


Candle. 


Desk. Key. 


Umbrella. 



Obs. 1. Nouns naturally neuter, when personified, may be either 
masculine or feminine, according as they possess some of the 
qualities of a male or female. 

Masculine. — Sun, death, time, winter, war, sleep, anger. 



ETYMOLOGY. 61 

Feminine. — Ship, moon, earth, nature, spring, peace, hope, 
virtue. 

Obs. 2. Some nouns may be either masculine or feminine ; as, 
cousin, parent, child, friend, neighbor, person. 

Note. — When such words are used in the plural, they may in- 
clude both males and females, or either. 

I 17. NUMBER. 

Number is the property of a noun or pronoun, by which 
it signifies one or more. 

1. The Singular Number denotes one. 

2. The Plural Number denotes more than one. 

Exercises. / 

Model. Do not forget to spell and define. 
" The bird sings." 
Bird, a fowl ; a Common Noun, because it is the name of a class 
of things. 

Masculine or Feminine Gender, because it may represent a male 
or female. 

Third person, because it is spoken of. 
Singular Number, because it denotes but one. 

1. Land, sea, fox, house, wolf, fly, spy. Why singular ? 

2. Lands, seas, foxes, houses, wolves, flies, spies. Why plural? 

I 18. CASES. 

Case is the state of a noun or pronoun with regard to 
other words. 

1. The Nominative Case is used as the name of an 
object. 

(b.) As the subject of a verb. 

(c.) As a predicate after the verb. 

(d.) Absolutely with a participle, by direct address, by 
pleonasm, or by exclamation. (Absolute means uncon- 
nected with any word except those which limit it.) 
6 



62 ETYMOLOGY. 

2. The Possessive Case denotes ownership or pos- 
session. 

3. The Objective Case denotes the object (1.) of a 
Transitive Verb, or (2.) of a preposition. 

Exercises on the Nominative Case. 

Model. Spell and define. Parse the Noun. 

" Teachers teach." 

Teachers, instructors ; a Common Noun, because it is the name 
of a class of persons. 

Masculine and Feminine Gender — it includes both males and 
females, or either. 

Third Person — it is spoken of. 

Plural Number — it denotes more than one. 

In the Nominative Case, because it is the subject of the verb 
teach. Who teach ? Teachers. 

(6.) 1. Men work. The sun shines. Fire burns. Water flows. 
Snow falls. 

Who work ? What shine3 ? What burns ? What flows ? What 
falls? 

(c.) God 1 is love . Knowledge* is power". The boy 6 will become 
a poet". Washington* was elected 'president . 

(d.) (With a participle.) The day being fair, we travelled. 

(By direct address.) Plato, thou reasonest well. 

(By pleonasm.) Your fathers, where are they? 

(By exclamation,) Yileworm! 0, madness ! Pride! Impiety! 

Address signifies a speaking to. Pleonasm means the use of 
more words than are necessary. Exclamation is a crying or speak- 
ing out, or expressing a word with some passion or emotion. 

Why is God in the Nominative Case? 

Because it is the subject of the verb is. 

Why is love called & predicate nominative? 

Because it is the thing affirmed, asserted, predicated, or said, of 
the subject God. 

Why is day in the Nominative Absolute? 

Because it is placed before a participle {being), and is not con- 
nected with any words in the sentence, except those which imme- 
diately relate to it {the, being, and jftuV). 



ETYMOLOGY. 63 

The grammarians now call such a phrase as "the day being fair/' 
an abridged expression for " since the day was fair," or " as the 
day was fair." 

Why is Plato in the Nominative Absolute? 

Because it is addressed, and not connected with any other word; 
it is used independently. 

Why is fathers in the Nominative Absolute? 

Because it is pleonastic ; that is, it is a word more than is 
necessary. 

Why is worm in the Nominative Absolute? 

Because it is an exclamatory expression, without any verb or 
predicate. 

As a reason, the student may say that a noun is in the Nomina- 
tive Case Absolute, because it is not the subject of any verb. 

Exercises on the Possessive Case. 
See the last Model. 

2. The king's crown. Kings' crowns. Tlie farmer' 's land. The 
farmers' horses. The man's watch. Men's watches. 

King's, ruler of a kingdom; a common noun. (Why?) Mas- 
culine gender. (Why?) Third person. (Why?) Singular 
number. (Why?) Possessive case. (Why?) What does it pos- 
sess ? What mark is the sign of this case ? What does king's 
limit? 

Parse the word crown in the same way, but omit the case. 

Whose crown? Whose crowns? Whose land? Whose horses? 
Whose watch? Who possesses* it? Whose watches ? What does 
kings' limit? Farmer's? Farmers'? &c. When farmer's is 
placed before land, how does it limit land? 

Exercises on the Objective Case. 
Parse the Nouns. See last Model. 

3. (1.) Carpenters build houses. The man cuts wood. Children 
read books. Soldiers kill enemies. The teacher instructs the pupil. 
Water quenches thirst. See $ 18. 3. (1.) 

2. A house of worship. The law of nature. In & place. With 
a friend. On the ground. By the river. From the city to the 
country. See § 18. 3. (2.) 



64 ETYMOLOGY. 

3. (1.) Houses is a Common Noun, because it is the name of a 
class of things. 

Neuter Gender, because it denotes objects -which are neither male 
nor female. 

Third Person, because it is spoken of. 

Plural Number, because it denotes more than one. 

Objective Case, because it is the object of the transitive verb 
build. 

(2.) Worship is a Common Noun. (Why?) Neuter Gender. 
(Why?) Third Person. (Why?) Singular Number. (Why?) 
Objective Case, because it is the object of the preposition of. Of 
worship limits house to a particular kind. 

Note. — Omit the case in parsing house and law ; or say they are 
in the Nominative Case, because they are the names of objects. 
§ 18. 1. 

I 19. DECLENSION. 

Declension is the arrangement of the numbers and 
cases of a noun or pronoun. 

1. First Declension. 
The plural is formed by adding s to the nominative 



singular. 




Singular. 


Plural. 


1. JSfom. King. 


Kings. 


Poss. King's. 


Kings'. 


Obj. King. 


Kings. 
Houses. 


2. Nom. House. 


Poss. House's. 


Houses'. 


Obj. House. 


Houses. 



Spell and define the following nouns, and decline them as king 
or house. The students may decline in concert. 

1. Boy, mother, tree, grate, day, key, friend, town, stove, slate, 
pen, brother (same family), die (a stamp), pea (a seed), talisman. 

2. Prince, fence, breeze, spice, cheese, page, place, race, vice, 
virtue, stage. 



ETYMOLOGY. 65 

2. Second Declension. 

The plural is formed by adding es to the nominative 
singular. 

. Singular. Plural. 

Nom. Church. Churches. 

Poss. Church's. Churches'. 

Obj. Church. Churches. 

Spell and define the following nouns, and decline them in like 
manner. Decline in concert. 

Rebus, bush, topaz, box, lass, echo, wo, hero, ditch, phiz, kiss, 
gas, tax, loss, dress, mass, fish. 

3. Third Declension. 

The plural is formed from the nominative singular, by 
changing y into i, and adding es. 

Singular. Plural. 

Nom. Fly. Flies. 

Poss. Fly's. Flies'. 

Obj. Fly. Flies. 

Spell and define the following nouns, and decline them in like 
manner. Decline in concert. 

Lady, sky, ally, folly, beauty, ferry, history, energy, inquiry, 
lottery, frailty, cry, city, story, army. 

Note. — Proper nouns ending in y, and common nouns ending in 
y preceded by a vowel, are declined like nouns of the First Declen- 
sion ; as, Henry, valley. 

4. Fourth Declension. 

The plural is formed from the nominative singular, by 
dropping /, fe, or ff, and adding ves. 
6* 



66 





ETYMOLOGY. 


Sinnular. 


Plural 


Horn. Loaf. 


Loaves. 


Poss. Loaf 8. 


Loaves', 


Obj. Loaf. 


Loaves. 


Worn. Life. 


Lives. 


Poss. Life's. 


Lives'. 


Obj. Life. 


Lives. 


Norn. Staff. 


Staves. 


Poss. Staff's. 


Staves'. 


Obj. Staff. 


Staves. 



Spell and define the following nouns, and decline them as above. 
Half, wolf, beef, thief, shelf, leaf, sheaf, calf, wife, knife. 

5. Proper Nouns. 
Proper Nouns, for the most part, want the plural form. 
When used in the plural, they are declined like nouns of 
the first or second declension. 

Additional Examples. Spell and define. 

First Declension. — 1. Monarch, toy, play, Tully, Pompey, chief, 
gulf, hoof, strife, muff, cliff, flagstaff, staff (a military term), tyro, 
grotto, chimney, valley, spoonful, mousetrap, courtyard, handful, 
alley. 

2. Rose, cage, maze, pledge, grace, slice. 

Second Declension. — Peach, glass, fox, miss, negro, octavo, cargo, 
genius, (person of abilities,') index, (table of contents). 

Third Declension. — Glory, ruby, fury, berry, mercy, vacancy, 
penny, (a coin). 

Fourth Declension. — Wharf, self, elf. 

6. Irregular Nouns. 
Singular. Plural. 

Nom. Man. Men. 

Poss. Man's. Men's. 

Obj. Man. Men. 



ETYMOLOGY. 



67 



Spell and define the following words, and decline them in like 
manner. 



Singular. 


Plural. 




Woman. 




"Women. 




Foot. 




Feet. 




Tooth: 




Teeth. 




Mouse. 




Mice. 




Die (for gaming). 


Dice. 




Child. 




Children. 




Ox. 




Oxen. 




Goose. 




Geese. 




Louse. 




Lice. 




Penny (a sum). 




Pence. 




Statesman. 




Statesmen. 




Brother (of the ! 


same society) 


Brethren. 




Index (sign in 


algebra). 


Indices. 




Fisherman. 




Fishermen. 




Pea (species of 


grain). 


Pease. 




Genius (a spiri 


t). 


Genii. 




7. Nouns having the Singular and Plural alike 


in Form. 




Spell and define. 




Singular. 


Plural. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


Means. 


Means. 


Amends. 


Amends. 


Deer. 


Deer. 


Sheep. 


Sheep. 


Apparatus. 


Apparatus. 


Series. 


Series. 


Vermin. 


Vermin. 


Salmon. 


Salmon. 


Species. 


Species. 


Tench. 


Tench. 


Swine. 


Swine. 







The Possessive Case of such nouns should be written 
thus : 

Singular. Plural. 

Poss. Deer's. Deers'. 

8. Nouns used in the Singular only. 
Spell and define. 
Gold, sloth, pride, justice, intemperance, botany, wheat, know- 
ledge, measles, molasses, &c. 



68 ETYMOLOGY. 

But things weighed or measured have a plural, when we speak 
of the different kinds. 





9. Nouns 


used in the Plural only. 






Spell and define. 




- 


Archives. 


Annals. 


Antipodes. 


Assets. 


Ashes. 


Goods. 


Morals. 


Ides. 


Tidings. 


Thanks. 


Tongs. 


Victuals. 


Clothes. 


Breeches. 


Dregs. 


Scissors. 


Snuffers. 


Shears. 


Vitals. 


Pincers. 



10. Compound Nouns, having the principal Yford placed first. 
Spell and define. 
Singular. Plural. 

Commander-in-chief. Commanders-in-chief. 

Aid-de-camp. Aids-de-camp. 

Court-martial. Courts-martial. 

Cousin-german. Cousins-german. 

Father-in-law. Fathers-in-law. 

Knight-errant. Knights-errant. 

11. Nouns which change both Words. 
Singular. Plural. 

Man-servant. Meti-servants. 

Woman-servant. Women-servants. 

12. Letters and Figures. 
Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. 



0. 


o's. 


l. 


i's. 


7. 


7's. 


6. 


G's. 


4. 


4's. 


2. 


2's. 



10. 10's. 

13. Words Singular in Form, but often Plural in Sense. 
Horse, foot, infantry, cavalry, cannon, shot, sail. 

14. Nouns derived from foreign Languages. 
The letter s indicates that the plural may also be formed by 
adding s to the nominative singular. 

The letters es, indicate that the plural may also be formed by 
adding es to the nominative singular. 

Spell and define both the singular and the plural. 





ETYMOLOGY. 


t>y 


Singular. 


Plural. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


Alumnus. 


Alumni. 


Erratum. 


Errata. 


Focus. 


Foci. 


Gymnasium (s). Gymnasia. 


Fungus (es). 


Fungi. 


Medium (s). 


Media. 


Magus. 


Magi. 


Memorandum 


Memoranda. 


Radius. 


Radii. 


(*). 




Stimulus. 


Stimuli. 


Momentum (5). 


Momenta. 






Scholium (s). 


Scholia. 


Genus. 


Genera. 


Speculum. 


Specula. 






Stratum. 


Strata. 


Amanuensis. 


Amanuenses. 






Analysis. 


Analyses. 


Apex (es). 


Apices. 


Antithesis. 


Antitheses. 


Appendix (es). 


Appendices. 


Axis. 


Axes. 


Calix (es). 


Calices. 


Basis. 


Bases. 


Vertex (es). 


Vertices. 


Chrysalis. 


Chrysalides. 


Vortex (es). 


Vortices. 


Crisis. 


Crises. 






Diaeresis. 


Diaereses. 


Automaton (s). 


Automata. 


Ellipsis. 


Ellipses. 


Criterion. 


Criteria. 


Emphasis. 


Emphases. 


Phenomenon. 


Phenomena. 


Ephemeris. 


Ephemerides. 






Hypothesis. 


Hypotheses. 


Bandit (.?). 


Banditti. 


Ignis fatuus. 


Ignes fatui. 






Metamorphosis 


. Metamorphoses. Beau (s). 


Beaux. 


Oasis. 


Oases. 






Parenthesis. 


Parentheses. 


Cherub (s) 


Cherubim. 


Phasis. 


Phases. 


Seraph (s). 


Seraphim. 


Thesis. 


Theses. 










Formula. 


Formulae. 


Animalculum. 


Animalcula.* 


Lamina. 


Laminae. 


Arcanum. 


Arcana. 


Larva. 


Larvae. 


Datum. 


Data. 


Nebula. 


Nebulae. 


Desideratum. 


Desiderata. 


Scoria. 


Scoriae. 


Effluvium. 


Effluvia. 


Vertebra. 


Vertebrae. 


Encomium (s). 


Encomia. 







* " Animal culse is a barbarism." — Wells. 



70 ETYMOLOGY. 

Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. 

Dogma (.§). Dogmata. Stamen. Stamina. 

Miasma. Miasmata. 

Virtuoso. Virtuosi. 

Monsieur. Messieurs. 

15. In the Possessive Case, s is sometimes omitted, 
and the apostrophe only retained, in order to avoid a 
harsh sound ; thus, 

" For conscience' sake ;" " For goodness' sake." 

Now turn to \ 54, and write Exercises II. and III. 

VOCABULARY OF THE NOUNS. 

Spell and define, and tell how the plural is formed. 

The letters following a 'word designate the ending of the plural. 

A. 

Abbess, es. A governess ot nuns. 

Abbot, s. A governor of monks. 

Actor, s. One who acts or performs. 

Administrator, s. A person who manages the estate of one dying 

without a will. 
Administratrix, es. A female who administers on the estate of one 

dying without a will. 
iEneas, \ 19. 5. The name of a Trojan hero. 
Aid-de-camp, \ 19. 10. An officer who receives and communicates 

the orders of a general. 
Ally, ies. A state united to another by treaty. 
Alumnus, i. A pupil : one educated at a seminary. 
Amanuensis, es. One who copies what another has written. 
Ambassador, s. A minister sent from one country to another, to 

transact public business. 
Ambition, § 19. 8. A desire of honor or power. 
America, g 19. 5. The name of the western continent. 
Analysis, es. Separating a compound into its several parts. 
Andes, $ 19. 5. A chain of mountains in South America. 
Anger, \ 19. 8. A violent passion of the mind. 
Animalculuin, a. A little animal. 
Annals, \ 19. 9. Register of yearly events. 



ETYMOLOGY. 71 

Antipodes, § 19. 9. People -with their feet opposite to ours. 

Antithesis, es. Opposition of words or sentiments. 

Apex, es or ices. The top or summit of any thing. 

Apparatus, \ 19. 7." Instruments for performing experiments. 

Appendix, es or ices. That which is added or appended. 

Arbiter, s. One appointed to decide differences. 

Arcanum, a. A secret. 

Archives, \ 19. 9. Records, or the place where records are kept. 

Army, ies. A body of persons armed for war ; a great number. 

Assets, § 19. 9. Goods or estate of a deceased person. 

Aunt, s. The sister of one's father or mother. 

Author, s. A producer, creator, writer, or composer. 

Automaton, s or a. A self-moving machine. 

Axis, es. A straight line through the centre of a body. 

B. 

Bachelor, s. An unmarried man. 

Bandit, s or ti. A robber; a highwayman. 

Barber, s. One who shaves, and dresses hair. 

Baron, s. A title of nobility in England. 

Basis, es. Foundation, bottom, support. 

Beast, s. A brute ; an animal void of reason. 

Beau, 5 or x. A line, gay man ; one who attends a lady. 

Beauty, ies. Assemblage of graces ; personal charms. 

Beef, ves. An t ox; a cow; the flesh of either. 

Bell, s. A hollow body for making sounds. 

Belle, s. A gay, beautiful, and much-admired young lady. 

Beneh, es. A long seat of board or plank. 

Benefactor, s. One who confers a benefit. 

Berry, ies. A small fruit. 

Bird, $. A flying animal, a fowl. 

Blacksmith, s. One who makes utensils of iron. 

Book, s. A printed or written composition bound ; a volume. 

Botany, $ 19. 8. The science which treats of plants. 

Box, es. A chest ; a case ; a coffer. 

Boy, s. A male child ; a lad. 

Breeches, $ 19. 9. Pantaloons ; trowsers. 

Breeze, s. A light wind ; a gentle gale. 

Bride, s. A newly married woman. 



72 ETYMOLOGY. 

Bridegroom, s. A newly married man. 

Brother, s. One born of the same parents. 

Brother, brethren. One of the same society. 

Brutus, 1 19. 5. The name of a Roman; name of a male. 

Buck, 5. A male deer. 

Bush, es. A thick underwood ; a shrub. 



Csesar, s. A name given to several of the ancient Komans. 

Cage, s. An inclosure for confining beasts or birds. 

Calf, ves. The young of the cow. 

Calix, es or ices. A cup. 

Candle, s. A body of wax, tallow, or spermaceti, around a wick; a 

light ; a luminary. 
Cannon, $ 19. 13. A large gun. 
Cap, s. A cover for the head. 
Carpenter, s. One who builds houses or ships, &c. 
Caterer, s. A male who provides eatables. 
Cateress, es. A female who provides eatables. 
Cavalry, $ 19. 13. A body of military troops on horses. 
Chair, s. A movable seat. 
Chanter, s. A singer, or songster. 
Charleston, § 19. 5. The name of a city. 
Cheese, s. The curd of milk pressed. 
Cherub, s or im. An order of angels. 
Chief, s. Principal person or part. 
Child, ren. An infant ; *a young human. 
Chimney, s. A funnel, or flue for conveying smoke. 
Church, es. The Lord's house ; the collective body of Christians. 
Chrysalis, ides. The form of a butterfly before its winged state. 
Cicero, $ 19. 5. The most distinguished orator among the Romans. 
City, ies. A large town. 

Cliff, s. A steep bank ; a high and steep rock. 
Clothes, \ 19. 9. Articles of dress ; covering for the body. 
Coal, \ 19. 8. A mineral ; charred wood. 

Commander-in-chief, § 19. 10. The principal officer of an army. 
Committee, s, or \ 13. Obs. 1. Persons to whom business is referred. 
Conductor, 5. A leader ; a guide. 
Conscience, s. Internal knowledge of right and wrong. 



ETYMOLOGY. 73 

Council, s, or \ 13, O.bs. 1. An assembly for consultation. 

Count, s. A title of nobility, equivalent to the English earl. 

Countess, es. The consort of an earl or count. 

Country, ies. A. territory; region. 

Court, s. One or more persons appointed to hear causes. 

Court-martial, \ 19, 10. A body of military officers for the trial of 

offences. 
Court-yard, s. A yard about a court-house. 

Cousin-german, g 19. 10. The son or daughter of an uncle or aunt. 
Crisis, \ 19. 14. The point of time for determining an affair. 
Criterion, \ 19. 14. A standard of judging. 
Crown, s. An ornament worn on the head by kings. 
Cry, ies. A clamor ; loud sound. 
Czar, s. The title of the emperor of Russia. 
Czarina, s. The title of the empress of Russia. 

D. 

Datum, § 19. 14. Something given or admitted. 

Daughter, s. A female child. 

Dauphin, s. Eldest son of the king of France. 

Day, s. A period of twenty-four hours. 

Deacon, s. A person in the lowest degree of holy orders. 

Death, s. Extinction of life ; cessation of life. 

Deer, \ 19. 7. A stag, or hind. 

Desideratum, § 19. 14. That which is desired, or desirable. 

Desk, s. Inclining table, with a box or drawer. 

Diaeresis, g 19. 14. Dots over a vowel, which forms a separate 

syllable. 
Ditch, es. A trench made in the earth by digging. 
Doe, s. A female deer. 
Dogma, -ta. A settled opinion. 
Don, s. Title of a gentleman in Spain. 
Donna, s. Title of a lady in Spain or Portugal. 
Drake, s. Male of the duck kind. 
Dregs, | 19. 9. Sediment ; lees ; refuse. 
Dress, es. Clothes ; garment ; covering for the body. 
Duchess, es. Wife or widow of a duke. 
Duck, s. Water-fowl, so called from its plunging. 
Duke, s. A title of nobility, 

7 



74 ETYMOLOGY. 



E. 

Earl, 8. A British title of nobility, third in rank. 

Earth, 1 19. 5. The planet we inhabit. 

Echo. es. Sound returned or reflected. 

Eluvium, a. Minute particles exhaled from bodies. 

Elf, ves. Aspirit; ghost: hag; witch. 

El'ipsis, es. The omission of a word or words. 

Emperor, s. The ruler of an empire. 

Emphasis, es. Stress of voice on words. 

Ench inter, s. A sorcerer; magician; one who charms. 

Encomium, § 19. 14. Praise; panegyric. 

Enemy, ies. A foe ; an adversary. 

Energy, ies. Internal or inherent power. 

Ephemeris, ides. A diary ; astronomical table. 

Erratum, a. Error ; mistake. 

Exclama ion, s. Outcry; noisy talk; clamor. 

Execut r, s. A male person appointed to execute a will. 

Executrix, es. A female appointed to execute a will. 

F. 

Falsehood, s. "Want of truth or veracity. 

Farmer, $. One who cultivates land. 

Father, s. A male parent. 

Father-in-law, § 19. 10. The father of one's husband or wife 

step-father. 
Female, s. The sex which bears young. 
Fence, s. A wall or hedge. 
Ferry, ies. A place for crossing a river, or lake. 
Fire, s. Heat and light; combustible body ignited. 
Fish, es. An animal living in water. 

Fisherman, # 19. 6. One whose occupation is to catch fish. 
Flagstaff, s. A staff to support a flag. 
Flock, 8. A collection, a crowd of small animals. 
Flower, s. The blossom of a plant. 
Fly, ies. A winged insect. 

F ens, i and es. The point in which the rays of light meet. 
Folly, ies. Weakness ; absurd or sinful action. 



ETYMOLOGY. 75 

Foot, \ 19. 13. A body of soldiers on foot. 

Foot, \ 19. 6. Bottom of the leg ; that on which a thing stands. 

Formula, ce. Prescribed form. 

Fox, es. An animal remarkable for cunning. 

Frailty, ies. Weakness ; infirmity ; folly. 

Friend, s. A person attached to another ; a quaker. 

Fungus, es or i. A mushroom ; proud flesh. 

Fury, ies. Violence ; rage ; frenzy ; goddess of vengeance. 

G. 

Gander, s. Male of the goose kind. 

Gas, es. iEriform, elastic fluid. 

Gate, s. A large door. 

Genius, es. Persons of mental abilities. 

Genius, ii. A good or evil spirit. 

Gentleman, \ 19. 6. A man of good breeding and education. 

Gentlewoman, \ 19. 6. A woman of good breeding. 

Genus, era. A class, or kind. 

Girl, s. A female child, or young woman. 

Glass, es. Transparent substance, made of sand and an alkali. 

Glory, ies. Splendor; honor; renown. 

God, s. The Supreme Being; a heathen deity. 

Goddess, es. A heathen deity of the female sex. 

Gold, # 19. 8. A precious metal, of a yellow color. 

Goodness, \ 19. 8. Excellence ; quality or state of being good. 

Goods, 1 19, 9. Movables ; merchandize. 

Goose, I 19. 6. An aquatic fowl ; a tailor's smoothing iron. 

Governess, es. A female invested with authority to control. 

Governor, s. A ruler, or director. 

Grace, s. Favor: goodwill; kindness; elegance with dignity. 

Grotto, es. A cave ; a subterranean cavern. 

Ground, s. Land ; soil ; the Earth. 

Gulf, s. A recess in the sea ; an abyss. 

Gymnasium, s. or a. A place of exercise. 

H. 

Half, ves. One of two equal parts. 
Handful, s. As much as the hand can hold. 



76 . ETYMOLOGY. 

Hardness, \ 19. 8. Compactness, firmness, severity. 

Hart. s. A stag, or male deer. 

Hat, s. A covering for the head. 

Heir, s. One who inherits an estate. 

Hero, es. A man brave and adventurous in danger. 

Heroine, s. A woman of brave spirit. 

Hind, s. A female of the red deer. 

History, ies. An account o-f past events. . 

Hoof, s. The horny cover of a beast's foot. 

Hope, s. A desire of good, with the expectation of receiving it. 

Horse, 1 19. 13. Cavalry ; body of soldiers on horses. 

Horse, s. A quadruped of the genus equus. 

Host, s. An entertainer ; one entertained ; an army. 

House, s. An edifice ; a building. 

Hudson, \ 19. 5. The name of a river, place, or person. 

Hunter, s. One who pursues game. 

Husband, s. A man united with a woman in marriage. 

Hypothesis, es. A supposition ; thing taken for granted. 

1. 

Ides, 1 19. 9. The 15th of March, May, July, and October, and the 

13th of the other months. 
Ignis Fatuus, $ 19. 14. A meteor; jack-with-a-lantern. 
Iliad § 19. 5. A poem written by Homer. 
Impiety, \ 19. 8. Ungodliness ; wickedness. 
Index, es. A table of reference. 
Index, ices. A sign in Algebra. 
Infant, s. A young child ; son of a king. 

Infanta, s. A princess of the royal blood in Spain or Portugal. 
Infantry, \ 19. 13. Body of foot soldiers. 
Ink, \ 19. 8. A liquor for writing. 

Inquiry, ies. Act of asking or searching for information, 
Insect, s. A small animal. 
Instructor, s. One who teaches or instructs. 
Iron, § 19. 8. The name of a metal. 

J. 

Jew, s. A Hebrew or Israelite. 

Justice, $ 19. 8. The giving to every one his due ; equity. 



ETYMOLOGY. 77 



K. 

Key, s. An instrument to fasten and open locks. 
King, s. The ruler of a kingdom. 
Kiss, es. A salute with the lips ; small piece of candy. 
Knife, ves. An instrument for cutting. 
Knight-errant, \ 19. 10. A wandering knight. 
Knowledge, § 19. 8. Clear perception of a thing. 

L. 

Lad, s. A boy ; a young man. 

Lady, ies. A well-bred woman. 

Lamina, ce. A thin plate. 

Land, s. Ground; country; region. 

Landgrave, s. A title taken by some German counts in the 12th 

century. 
Landgravine, s. The feminine of landgrave. 
Landlady, ies. The mistress of an inn. 
Landlord, s. The master of an inn. 
Larva, ce. An insect in the caterpillar state. 
Lass, es. A girl ; a young woman. 
Law, s. Rule of action ; statute. 
Leaf, ves. Part of a plant; part of a book. 
Life, ves. State of being animated; existence. 
Lion, s. A rapacions quadruped. 
Loaf, ves. A mass of bread or sugar. 
Lord, s. A master; tyrant; Supreme Being. 
Loss, es. Privation ; ruin ; waste. 
Lottery, ies. A distribution of prizes by chance. 
Louse, g 19. 6. An insect. 
Love, s. Affection, excited by what is pleasing. 

M. 

Madam, s. Address to a woman. 
Madness, \ 19. 8. Distraction ; anger. 
Magus, i. Wise man ; philosopher of the east. 
Maid, s. An unmarried woman. 
Maid-servant, *. A female waiter, or attendant. 

7* 



78 ETYMOLOGY. 

Male, s. The he kind. 

Mamma, s. A name for mother. 

Man, § 19. 6. A grown male human being. 

Man-servant, \ 19. 11. A male attendant, or waiter. 

Marchioness, es. The lady of a marquis. 

Mare, s. The female of the horse kind. 

Margrave, s. A title of nobility in Germany. 

Margravine, s. The wife or widow of a margrave. 

Marquis, es. A title of nobility. 

Mass, es. A lump ; a collective body. 

Master, s. A ruler ; director ; head ; chief. 

Maze, s. A winding and turning; a labyrinth; perplexity. 

Means, $ 19. 7. Medium; instrument; income. 

Measles, \ 19. 8. A disease characterized by red spots on the skin. 

Medium, s or a. Middle term; means; instrument; that through 

which a body passes. 
Meeting, s, § 13, Obs. 1. A collective body ; a coming together. 
Memorandum, s or a. A note to help the memory. 
Merchant, 5. A trader; dealer in goods. 

Mercy, ies. Pity; compassion; kindness; forgiving disposition. 
Metamorphosis, ses. Change of form. 
Mexico, $ 19. 5. The name of a city and country. 
Miasma, ta. Noxious effluvia. 
Milton, \ 19. 5. An eminent English poet. 
Miss, es. A girl, or young woman. 
Mistress, es. A woman who governs. 
Molasses, $ 19. 8. The sirup which drains from sugar. 
Momentum, s or a. Quantity of motion. 
Monarch, s. A king or emperor. 
Monsieur, §19. 14. Sir; Mr. 

Moon, s. A secondary planet revolving around the Earth, &o. 
Morals, $ 19. 9. Practice of the duties of life. 
Mother, s. A female parent. 
Mouse, I 19. 6. A small animal. 
Mousetrap, s. A trap for catching mice. 
Muff, s. A cover of fur for the hands. 



ETYMOLOGY. 70 



N. 



Nature, s. Whatever is made ; essential qualities ; sort; kind. 
Nebula, ce, A dark spot ; film in the eye. 
Negro, es. An African, or descendant of an African. 
Neighbor, s. One who lives near another; kind friend (in Scrip- 
ture). 
Nephew, s. Son of a brother or sister. 
News, $ 19. 8. Tidings ; late accounts of events. 
Niece, s. Daughter of a brother or sister. 

0. 

Oasis, es. A fertile spot in a desert. 

Octavo, es. A book with eight leaves to a sheet. 

Odyssey, § 19. 5. A poem attributed to Homer. 

Orator, s. An eloquent speaker ; a petitioner. 

Ox, \ 19. 6. Male of the bovine genus of quadrupeds. 



Page, s. A boy ; one side of a leaf. 
Papa, s. A father ; male parent. 

Paper, s. Substance made of linen or cotton rags ; a printed sheet. 
Parent, s. A father or mother. 

Parenthesis, ses. A sentence included within two curved lines, ( ). 
Patron, s. A supporter ; defender ; protector. 
Paul, 1 19. 5. A man's name ; the name of a male. 
Pea, s. A distinct seed. 
Pea, 1 19. 6. A species of grain. 
Peace, g 19. 8. Quiet ; freedom from war. 
Peach, cs. A fruit. 
Peer, s. An equal ; a nobleman. 
Pen, s. An instrument for writing ; an inclosure. 
Penny, ies. A coin. 
Penny, g 19. 6, A sum of money. 
People, 1 13, Obs. 1. A body of persons. 
Person, s. A man, woman, or child. 

Phasis, ses. An appearance; generally applied to the moon's 
appearance. 



80 ETYMOLOGY. 

Phenomenon, a. An appearance ; any thing visible. 

Phiz, es. The face ; visage. 

Pincers, § 19. 9. An instrument for drawing nails or tacks. 

Place, s. Portion of space or ground ; room. 

Plato, g 19. 5. A Grecian philosopher. 

Play, s. Sport ; game ; recreation. 

Pledge, s. A pawn ; a deposit. 

Pleonasm, s. Redundancy of words. 

Poet, s. A writer of verse. 

Pompey, \ 19. 5. A person's name. 

Pope, s. The .bishop of Rome ; head of the Roman Catholic 

Church. 
Power, s. Faculty of doing ; force ; strength ; ability ; a state. 
Predicate, s. The thing which is affirmed. 
President, s. One at the head of a state or society. 
Pride, § 19. 8. Self-esteem. 
Priest, s. A man in orders. 
Prince, s. A king's son ; a ruler. 
Princess, es. Feminine of prince. 
Prior, s. The superior of a convent. 
Prophet, s. A foreteller. 
Protector, s. A defender from injury. 
Pupil, s. A scholar ; a student. 

Q. 

Queen, s. Consort of a king ; a female who rules a kingdom. - 

R. 

Race, s. A running ; a breed. 

Radius, ii. A right line from the centre to the circumference 

Reading, s. Perusal ; public recital. 

Rebus, es. A kind of enigma or riddle. 

Rising, s. The act of getting up ; ascending ; insurrection. 

River, s. A large stream of water. 

Robert, $ 19. 5. The name of a male. 

Roe, s. The female of the hart. 

Rolling, s. A turning ; a revolution. 

Rose, s. A tree and flower of many species. 

Ruby, ies. A precious stone ; a mineral of a red color. 



ETYMOLOGY. 81 

s. 

Sail, s. Canvass for a ship; § 19. 13, Ships. 

Salmon, \ 19. 7. A large fish. 

Scholium, s or a. Annotation ; remark subjoined. 

Scissors, $ 19. 9. A cutting instrument with two blades. 

Sea, s. A body of water smaller than an ocean. 

Self, ves. Identity of person. 

Seraph, s or im. An angel of the highest order. 

Series, $ 19. 7. Connected succession of things in the same order. 

Sheaf, ves. Bundle of grain, or straw. 

Shears, \ 19. 9. A cutting instrument, larger than scissors. 

Sheep, \ 19. 7. An animal from which wool is procured. 

Shelf, ves. A board to lay things on. 

Shepherd, s. A man that tends sheep. 

Ship, s. A square rigged vessel, having three masts. 

Shoemaker, s. One who makes shoes. 

Shot, s, or \ 19. 13. Small round masses of lead ; act of shooting. 

Signior, s. A title of respect among the Italians. 

Signora, s. Feminine of signior. 

Sir, s. A word of respect used in addressing a man. 

Sister, s. A female born of the same parents. 

Sky, ies. The serial regions over our heads ; the firmament. 

Slate, s. An argillaceous stone which may be split into plates. 

Sleep, I 19. 8. Repose ; slumber ; rest. 

Sleeping, § 19. 8. Reposing; slumbering; resting. 

Slice, s. Thin broad piece cut off. 

Sloth, § 19. 8. Slowness ; a slow-moving animal. 

Sloven, 5. A man careless of dress and neatness. 

Slut, s. A woman careless of dress and neatness. 

Snow, s. Frozen vapor. 

Snuffers, \ 19. 9. An instrument for. clipping the wicks of candles. 

Soldier, s. A man in military service. 

Son, s. A male child. 

Songster, s. A singer. 

Sorcerer, 5. .A conjurer ; an enchanter. 

Sorceress, es. An enchantress ; a witch. 

Species, g 19. 7. Sort; kind; class. 

Speculum, a. A glass that reflects images. 



82 ETYMOLOGY. 

Spice, s. An aromatic plant. 

Spoonful, s. As much as a spoon holds. 

Spring, s. A season of the year ; a fountain. 

Spy, ies. One who watches the actions of an enemy. 

Staff, ves. A stick for support ; five lines and spaces in music. 

Stag, s. A male red deer. 

Stage, s. Elevated platform ; a coach. 

Stamen, ina or s. The fixed, firm part of a body. 

Statesman, § 19. 6. One skilled in the art of government. 

Stimulus, i. Something that increases animal action. 

Story, ies. A tale ; history ; distance from one floor to another. 

Stove, s. A place for fire ; an iron box. 

Stratum, a. A layer, as of earth. 

Strife, s. Contention ; rivalship. 

Subject, s. The thing spoken of. 

Sultan, s. The emperor of the Turks. 

Sultana, s., or Sultaness, es. The Empress of the Turks. 

Sun, s. The luminary that enlightens and warms the earth. 

Swine, § 19. 7. A hog. 

T 

Table, s. A flat surface ; board ; index ; set of numbers. 

Tailor, s. One who makes men's garments. 

Talisman, s. A magical character. 

Tax, es. A rate assessed on a person or his property. 

Teacher, s. One who teaches or instructs. 

Tench, 1 19. 7. A fish of the carp family. 

Testator, s. One who leaves a will at his death. 

Testatrix, es. A woman who leaves a will at her death. 

Thanks, § 19. 9. Expression of gratitude for favor. 

Theft, s. The act of stealing. 

Thesis, ses. A theme ; a subject. 

Thief, ves. A person who steals. 

Thirst, 1 19. 8. A vehement desire of a thing. 

Tidings, § 19. 9. News. 

Tiger, s. A rapacious animal of the genus felis, or cat kind. 

Time, s. Part of duration. 

Tongs, 1 19. 9. An instrument to handle fire, or heated metals. 

Tooth, 1 19. 6. A bony substance in the jaw ; a tine ; a prong. 



ETYMOLOGY. 83 

Topaz, es. A precious stone. 

Town, s. A collection of houses larger than a village. 

Toy, s. A plaything. 

Traitor, s. A betrayer of his country or trust. 

Tree, s. The largest of the vegetable kind. 

Triumphing, s. or \ 19. 8. Celebrating victory; rejoicing. 

Tully, 1 19. 5. For Marcus Tullius Cicero. 

Tutor, s. A guardian ; a teacher. 

Tyro, s. A beginner in learning. 

U. 

Umbrella, s. A screen from the sun or rain. 
Uncle, s. A father's or mother's brother. 

V. 

Vacancy, ies. Empty space. 

Valley, s. Low land between hills or mountains. 

Vermin, $ 19. 7. All kinds of destructive insects, or small animals. 

Vertebra, ae. A joint of the spine or backbone of an animal. 

Vertex, es or ices. The crown ; top ; point of an angle. 

Vice, s. Wickedness; impiety; blemish; fault. 

Victuals, § 19. 9. Food; provisions; sustenance. 

Virtue, s. Moral goodness ; strength. 

Virtuoso, i. A man skilled in fine arts. 

Viscount, s. A title of nobility. 

Vitals, \ 19. 9. Parts essential to life. 

Vortex, es or ices. A whirlpool. 

Votaress, es. A female devoted to any service. 

Votary, ies. One devoted, consecrated, or engaged by vow. 

W. 

War, s. Open hostility between countries. 

Washington, g 19. 5. First President of the United States. 

Watch, es. A guard ; a pocket time-piece. 

Water, s. A transparent fluid ; sea ; ocean. 

Wharf, ves. Mole for landing goods. 

Wheat, § 19. 8. Species of grain for bread. 

Whiteness, § 19. 8. Quality of being white. 

Widow, s. A woman bereaved of her husband. 

Widower, s. A man whose wife is dead. 



84 ETYMOLOGY. 

Wife, ves. The lawful consort of a man. 

"Winter, s. The coldest season of the year. 

Witch, es, A sorceress ; a hag. 

Wizard, s. A sorcerer; a conjurer; an enchanter. 

Wo, or Woe, s. Grief; sorrow; misery. 

Wolf, ves. A rapacious animal of the genus canis, or dog kind. 

Woman, $ 19. 6. A female of the human race fully grown. 

Woman-servant, $ 19. 11. Female servant. 

Wood, s. A forest ; substance of trees. 

Worm, s. An insect that crawls ; reptile. 

Worship, \ 19. 8. Religious homage ; adoration. 

Writing, s. Making letters with a pen ; composition. 

§ 20. ADJECTIVES. 

An Adjective is a word which may qualify or limit, 

1. A Noun. 

2. A Pronoun. 

3. A Phrase, or verb in the Infinitive Mode. 

4. A Sentence. 

Exercises. 

Model. 

That good man. — That is an adjective, because it limits or 
defines the noun man. 

Good is an adjective, because it qualifies the noun man. 

1. A wise statesman. A great king. A virtuous woman. 

2. He is vicious. They are brave. We are wicked. 

3. To slander a person is wrong. To lie is base. To excel in 
virtue is praiseworthy. (What is praiseworthy? Ans. — To excel 
in virtue.) 

4. That any person should deny the existence of a Supreme 
Being is unaccountable. (What is unaccountable ?) 

5. Qualifying Adjectives, or those which express 
quality. 

Good, bad, wise, ignorant, great, small, virtuous, vicious, brave, 
cowardly, industrious, lazy, dutiful, disobedient, sweet, bitter, 



ETYMOLOGY. 85 

black, white, &c. Why called Qualifying Adjectives? Use a noun 
after each of the preceding adjectives. Thus, a good hoy; a bad 
man, &c. 

6. Limiting Adjectives, or those "which limit the 
meaning. 

A, an, the, one, two, three, four, first, fifth, tenth, this, that, these, 
those, each, every, either, neither, some, other, another, any, all, 
such, both, same, which, what, whichever, whichsoever, -whatever, 
whatsoever, &c. Why called Limiting Adjectives? Use a noun 
after each of the preceding limiting adjectives. Thus, A house ; an 
elephant, &c. 

§ 21. COMPARISON. 

Comparison is the variation of an adjective to express 
its meaning in different degrees. 

1. The Positive Degree expresses the quality simply. 

2. The Comparative Degree expresses a higher or 
lower degree of the same quality than is expressed by 
the Positive. 

3. The Superlative Degree expresses the highest or 
lowest state of the quality expressed by the Positive. 

4. Adjectives compared — positive not ending in e, 
(er, est.) 

Model. 

Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 

Rich. Richer. Richest. 

In like manner compare short, fair, high, dark, bright, great, 
long, tall, gay, smooth, rough. Use a noun after each. 

5. Adjectives compared — positive ending in e, (r, si:) 

Model. 
Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 

Wise. Wiser. Wisest. 

. 8 



86 ETYMOLOGY. 

In like manner compare white, fine, vile, pale, blithe, stale, ripe, 
able, free, polite. Use a noun after each. 

6. Adjectives ending in y, change y into ier and iest. 

Model. 

Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 

Happy. Happier. Happiest. 

In like manner compare dry, silly, tidy, clumsy, jolly, flimsy, 
greasy, early, lovely. Use a noun after each. 

7. Adjectives in which the final consonant is doubled. 

Model. 
Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 

Red. Redder. Reddest. 

In like manner compare fit, hot, sad, mad, flat, big, thin, glad, 
fat, wet. Use a noun after each. 

8. Adjectives compared by means of Adverbs. 

Model. 
Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 

Wise. More wise. Most wise. 

Bold. Less bold. Least bold. 

In like manner compare rich, happy, red, virtuous, useful, pleas- 
ant, honorable. Use a noun after each. 

9. Adjectives whose signification can be neither in- 
creased nor diminished, do not, strictly speaking, admit 
of comparison ; such as : one, four, first, fourth, this, 
Roman, square ? wooden, each, all, perfect, right, chief, 
extreme, universal, and supreme. Use a noun after each. 

Obs. 1. A few of these, however, are sometimes compared. 

10. Irregular Comparison. 

Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 

Good. Better. Best. 

Bad, evil, ill. Worse. Worst. 



Little. 

Much, many. 
Far. 
Fore. 




Low. 
Top. 



ETYMOLOGY. 


87 


Less. 


Least. 


More. 


Most. 


Farther. 


Farthest. 


Former. 


Foremost, or first. 


Further. 


Furthest. 


Later, latter. 


Latest, last. 


Older, elder. 


Oldest, eldest. 


Nearer. 


Nearest, next. 


Hinder. 


Hindermost,hindmost. 


Outer, utter. 


Outermost, uttermost, 




outmost, utmost. 


Inner. 


Innermost, inmost. 


Upper. 


Uppermost, upmost. 


Lower. 


Lowermost, lowmost. 




Topmost. 




Superior. 


Supreme. 


Inferior. 
Exterior. 




Extreme. 



Use a noun after each. 

Model for Parsing. Analyze. Parse the Adjectives. 

"A modest lady gains many admirers." — A is a limiting adjective, 
not compared, and limits the noun lady to one in number. Modest 
is a qualifying adjective, because it expresses the quality of the 
noun lady. Positive degree, because it expresses the simple 
quality; Pos. modest, Com p. more modest, Sup. most modest. It 
modifies or qualifies the noun lady. Many is a limiting adjective, 
because it limits the meaning of the noun admirers. Positive 
degree, &c, as above. 

Vocabulary of the Adjectives used in \ 20 and \ 21. 
Spell and define. 



A. One; contraction of an. 

Able. Capable ; having power. 

All. Every one. 

An. One. 

Anv. One indefinitely ; some. 

Bad. Wicked; ill. 

Base. Mean ; vile. 



Big. Large. 

Bitter. Sharp; afflictive. 
Black. Dark ; cloudy. 
Blithe. Gay; merry. 
Bold. Brave; daring. 
Both. Two; the one and 
other. 



the 



88 



ETYMOLOGY. 



Brave. Gallant ; courageous. 
Bright. Shining ; clear. 
Chief, § 21. 9. Principal. 
Clumsy. Awkward. 
Cowardly. Meanly timid. 
Dark. Obscure ; void of light. 
Disobedient, § 21. 8. Neglecting 

to obey ; refractory. 
Dry. Without moisture ; arid ; 

thirsty. 
Dutiful, §21. 8. Obedient to what 

is required. 
Each. Every one taken sepa- 
rately. 
Either. One of two. 
Every. Each one of the whole 

number taken separately. 
Evil. Ill ; wicked ; bad. 
Exterior. Outward ; foreign. 

Fair. Beautiful ; handsome ; 
clear. 

Far. Remote ; distant. 

Fat. Plump ; gross; greasy. 

Fifth. Next in order to fourth. 

Fine. Minute ; small ; nice ; 
elegant. 

First. Foremost ; chief. 

Fit. Suitable ; convenient. 

Flat. Level ; stale ; positive. 

Fore. Coming first ; in front. 

Four. Twice two. 

Fourth. Next in order to third. 

Free. Having liberty. 

Further. More remote. 

Gay. Merry ; fine ; jovial. 

Glad. Pleased ; cheerful. 

Good. Pious; virtuous; sound. 

Greaey. Oily ; fat. 



Great. Large ; chief. 

Happy. Contented; blessed. 

High. Lofty; elevated. 

Hind. Backward; opposed to 
fore. 

Honorable, \ 21. 8. High-minded ; 
noble. 

Hot. Very warm; eager; furious. 

Ignorant, § 21. 8. Without know- 
ledge. 

111. Bad; sick. 

Industrious, § 21. 8. Diligent. 

Inferior. Lower in place or value. 

Inner. Interior. 

Jolly. Lively ; merry ; gay. 

Late. After the time. 

Lazy. Slothful ; sluggish. 

Little. Small; diminutive. 

Long. Extended in length. 

Lovely. Amiable. 

Low. Not elevated ; humble. 

Mad. Angry ; enraged. 

Many. Numerous. 

Much. Great in quantity. 

Near. Close ; adjacent. 

Neither. Not either. 

One. Single in number. 

Other. Different. 

Outer. Outward ; without. 

Pale. Without color. 

Perfect. Complete ; finished. 

Pleasant, § 21. 8. Agreeable. 

Polite. Polished ; well-bred. 

Praiseworthy, § 21. 8. Com- 
mendable. 

Red. Bright in color ; like blood. 

Rich. Opulent^ wealthy; fruit- 
ful. 



ETYMOLOGY. 



89 



Right, irupu ■; jast; true. 
Ripe. Mature ; fit for use. 
Roman. Pertaining to Rome. 
Rough. Uneven ; not smooth ; 

harsh. . 
Sad. Sorrowful ; not cheerful. 
Same. Identical ; not different. 
Short. Not extended in length or 

time. 
Silly. Foolish ; simple. 
Small. Little ; slender. 
Smooth. Of even surface. 
Some. A part ; not all. 
Square. Having four equal sides 

and right angles. 
Stale. Insipid ; flat. 
Such. Of a similar kind. 
Superior. Higher; of better 

quality. 
Sweet. Pleasing to the taste. 
Tall. High; lofty. 
Tenth. Next in order to ninth. 
That. A word which points 

out. 
The. A word which points out a 

particular person or thing. 
TJiese. Plural of this. 



Thin. Not dens^ 

This. A word which points out. 

Those. Plural of that. 

Three. Two and one. 

Tidy. Cleanly, neat. 

Top. The highest. 

Two. One and one. 

Unaccountable. That cannot be 
explained. 

Universal. All ; total ; whole. 

Upper. Higher; above. 

Useful, 1 21. 8. Serviceable. 

Utter. Outward ; extreme. 

Vicious, I 21. 8. Wicked; im- 
moral. 

Vile. Base ; mean ; worthless. 

Virtuous, § 21. 8. Morally good ; 
pious. 

Wet. Moist; damp. 

White. Pale ; without color. 

Wicked, § 21. 8. Vicious; un- 
godly. 

Wise. Having knowledge ; know- 
ing. 

Wooden. Made of wood. 

Wrong. Unjust; not right; 
erroneous. 



Exercise. 

1. Use one adjective, or more than one, in the positive degree, 
before each of the following nouns. 

Model. 

day. town. A fair day. This large town. 

River, mountain, island, sea, ocean, city, soil, railroad, tree, 
garden, farm, meadow, yard, orchard, fruit, book, pen, sun, moon. 

2. Use an adjective in the comparative degree, before each of the 
following words. 

Hopes, pleasures, studies, manners, love, friendship, talents, 
companion, scholar, reader, teacher. 
8* 



90 ETYMOLOGY. 

3. Place an adjective in the superlative degree, before each of the 
following nouns. 

Cloud, tempest, passion, heart, scene, form, fortune, wit, smile, 
joy, torrent, sorrow. 

Now turn to g 54, and write Exercise IV. 

§ 22. PRONOUNS. 

A Pronoun is a word which may be used for — 

1. A noun. 

2. A verb in the Infinitive Mood. 

3. A phrase. 

4. A whole sentence. 

Exercise. Model. 
"Alexander was surnamed the Great; he conquered many 
nations/' He is a pronoun, because it is used for the noun Alex- 
ander. 

1. " Milton wrote ' Paradise Lost' — he was blind." 

2. "It is wrong to slander." It stands for "to slander." 

3. " It is glorious to die for one's country." It is used for "to 
die for one's country." 

4. She is handsome, and she has the misfortune of knowing it." 
It represents "she is handsome." 

Use a suitable pronoun in place of the words in the following 
sentences, which are printed in Italic letters : 

" A woman went to a man, and told the man that the man was 
in danger of being murdered by a gang of robbers, as a gang of 
robbers had made preparations for attacking the man. The man 
thanked the woman for the woman's kindness ; and, as the man was 
unable to defend the man's self from the gang of robbers, the man 
left the man's house, and went to a neighbor's. Thus the woman 
saved the man's life." The student may use the words he, his, him, 
who, them, she, her. — (Kirkham.) 

Use a noun in place of each of the pronouns in the following 
Sentences, and supply also the words required to complete the sense. 

" The king was informed- by the queen, that his guards were 
forming a plot among themselves to take his life ; that they intended 
to execute their design on the next niffht. She assured him that 



ETYMOLOGY. 91 

Tier information -was correct, for it was received through her most 
faithful attendant, who had just heard their conversation." 

There are three principal kinds of pronouns; Personal, 
Relative, and Interrogative. 

I 23. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

A Personal Pronoun shows, by -its form, what person 
the noun is for which it stands. 

The Simple Personal Pronouns are, I, thou, lie, she, 
and it. 

Declension of the Simple Personal Pronouns. 

FIRST PERSON. MAS. OR FEM. SECOND PERSON. MAS. OR FEM. 

Case. Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. 

JVom. I. We. Thou. Ye or you. 

Poss. My, mine. Our, ours. Thy, thine. Your, yours. 

Obj. Me. Us. Thee. You. 

THIRD PERSON. MAS. THIRD PERSON. FEM. 

Case. Singular. Plural. . Singular. Plural. 

Norn. He. They. She. They. 

Poss. His. Their, theirs. Her, hers. Their, theirs. 

Obj. Him. Them. Her. Them. 

THIRD PERSON. NEUTER GENDER. 

Singular. Plural. 

Norn. It. They. 

Poss. Its. Their, theirs. 

Obj. It. Them. 

Note. You may refer to one person or more, but its verb must 
be in the plural form. 

Adjectives whose signification is not limited to any particular 
person or thing, when used without the nouns to which they be- 
long, mny be called' — 



92 etymology. 

1. Indefinite Personal Pronouns. 





THIRD PERSON. 




Singular. 


Plural, Singular. 


Plural. 


Nom. One. 


Ones. Other. 


Others. 


Poss. One's. 


Ones'. Other's. 


Others'. 


Obj. One. 


Ones. Other. 

THIRD PERSON. 


Others. 


Singular. 


Plural. 












Obj. Another. 





The words some, both, any, same, none, &c, when used for the 
nouns to which they belong, may be parsed as Indefinite Pronouns. 
None is singular or plural. Both is plural. 

This, that, these, those, former, latter, used without the nouns 
which they would modify, may be called — 

2. Demonstrative Personal Pronouns. 

THIRD PERSON. 

Singular. Plural. 

Nom. and Obj. This. Nom. and Obj. These. 

" " That. " " Those. 

They are called Demonstrative, because they precisely point out 
the subjects to which they relate. 

Some Adjectives point out the persons or things to which they 
refer, as taken separately and singly; as, each, every, either, neither. 
They divide or distribute the persons or things. When used with- 
out nouns, they may be called — 

3. Distributive Personal Pronouns. 

THIRD PERSON. 

Singular. 

Nom. and Obj. Each, either, neither. 

When the word self (plural selves), is added to the 
Simple Personal Pronouns, the words formed are called — 



etymology. 93 

Compound Personal Pronouns. 

FIRST PERSON. MAS. OR FEM. 

Singular. Plural. 

Nom. and Obj. Myself. Ourselves. 

SECOND PERSON. MAS. OR FEM. 

Singular. Plural. 

Norn, and Obj. Thyself, yourself. Yourselves. 

THIRD PERSON. MASCULINE. 

Singular. Plural. 

Norn, and Obj. Himself. Themselves. 

TniRD PERSON. FEMININE. 

Singular. Plural. 

Norn, and Obj. Herself. Themselves. 

THIRD PERSON. — NEUTER. 

Singular. Plural. 

Nom. and Obj. Itself. Norn, and Obj. Themselves. 

Exercise. Model. 

I is a personal pronoun, because its form distinguishes the 
person. Masculine or feminine gender, first person, and singular 
number, because the speaker's name, if used, would be of the same 
gender, person, and number. In the Nominative case. 

In like manner parse us, my, mine, me, our, ours, we, thee, thine, 
thy, thou, you, ye, yours, your, him, his, he, them, theirs, their, 
her, hers, she, its, it, ones, ones', one's, one, other's, others', others, 
none, another's. 

Note. — The pronoun it appears to be sometimes used without 
obvious reference to any word for which it stands. 

I 24. EELATIVE PRONOUNS. 

A Relative Pronoun is one that may relate to 
1. A Noun. 2. A Pronoun. 

3. A Phrase. 4. A Sentence. 



94 ETYMOLOGY. 

Simple Relative Pronouns. — Who, which, what, that. 

Compound Relative Pronouns. — Whoever, whosoever, 
whichever, whichsoever, whatever, whatsoever. 

The noun, pronoun, phrase, or sentence, to which the 
relative refers, is called its Antecedent. 

The antecedents of what, and the compound relatives, 
are usually omitted. 

Declension of the Simple Relative Pronouns. 



Singular. 


Plural. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


Nom. Who. 


Who. 


Which. 


Which. 


Poss. Whose. 


Whose. 


Whose. 


Whose. 


Obj. Whom. 


Whom. 


Which. 


Which. 


om. and Obj. What. 


What. 


That. 


That. 



The Compound Relative Pronouns are declined as the 
Simple Relatives. 

The word as is sometimes used as a Relative Pronoun. 

Exercise on Relative Pronouns. 
Model. 

" This is the friend whom I love." — Whom is a Relative Pronoun, 
because it relates to the noun friend for its antecedent. Third 
person, masculine gender, and singular number, because its ante- 
cedent friend is third person, masculine gender, and singular 
number. In the objective case, because it is the object of the 
transitive verb love. 

" Respect him who has virtue." — The pronoun him is the ante- 
cedent. 

"He died for his country, which is glorious." — He died for his 
country, is the antecedent. 

"He that acts wisely, deserves praise." — He is the antecedent. 

" They removed what was in the way." — Antecedent, thing 
understood. 

" Whoever attends, may learn." — Antecedent, person understood. 

" Whatever purifies, also fortifies the heart." — Thing understood. 

"Let such persons as are able contribute liberally. Persons. 



ETYMOLOGY. 95 

I 25. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN. 

1. When the word who is used in asking a question, it 
is called an Interrogative Pronoun. It stands for tohat 
person. 

2. In indirect questions, who is an Indefinite Pro- 
noun. 

Exercise. Model. 

" Who has sorrow?'' — Who is an Interrogative pronoun, because 
it is used in asking a question ; it represents what person. Third 
person ; it represents the person spoken of. Nominative case ; it 
is the subject of the verb has. Singular number; it implies but 
one. 

"Nobody knows who he is." — Who is an Indefinite pronoun, 
because it stands for some one unknown. Third person ; it denotes 
the person spoken of. Nominative case, because it is the predicate 
after the verb is, # 18. 1. (c.) Singular number; it represents but 
one. 

1. " Whose book is this?" "Whom do you see?" " Who art 
thou?" \ 18. 1. (c). Who is the predicate nominative after art. 

2. "Do you know who wrote Junius's letters?" "I cannot say 
who wrote them." "It is uncertain to whom it belongs." 

# 3. Which and what appear to be used in direct or indirect ques- 
tions, as indefinite pronouns ; but these words are limiting adjec- 
tives, and some noun may be supplied after them. — See Butler and 
Kirkham. (Turn to $ 54, and write Exercise v. 3.) 

I 26. THE VERB. 

A verb is a word which expresses the act, being, or 
state of its subject. — (Bullion's English Grammar.) 
Exercise. Model. 
"I rule. We are. You sleep. They are hated." 
Rule is a verb, because it expresses the act of its subject /. 
Are is a verb, because it expresses the being of its subject we. 
Sleep is a verb, because it expresses the state of its subject you. 
Are hated is a verb, because it expresses the state of its subject 



96 ETYMOLOGY. 

" Men labor. Horses run. Boys play. The dog barks. The 
secretary writes. The master teaches. We exist. Troy was. He 
is beaten. They are prepared. Thou art honored. You are 
degraded." 

I 27. CLASSES OF VERBS. 

There are two classes of Verbs, Transitive and Intran- 
sitive. 

A Transitive Verb requires an object to complete the 
sense. 

An Intransitive Verb has no object. 

Transitive Verbs have two voices or forms, the Active 
and the Passive. 

1. A Transitive Verb in the Active voice expresses the 
act of the subject exerted upon some object. 

2. A Transitive Verb in the Passive voice represents 
its subject as being acted upon, the subject being the 
object. 

Note. A verb may be used to express precisely the same mean- 
ing, either in the Active or Passive Voice, by placing for the subject 
of the verb, in the Passive Voice, the word which is its object in, 
the Active Voice. 

3. An Intransitive Verb is conjugated as a Transitive Verb in 
the Active Voice. A few have a Passive form. 

Exercise. Model. 

"Virtue secures happiness." "Happiness is secured by virtue." 
"The bird flies." 

Secures is a Transitive Verb in the Active Voice, because it 
expresses the act of its subject virtue, exerted upon its object 
happiness. 

Is secured is a Transitive Verb in the Passive Voice, because its 
subject happiness is represented as being acted upon, the subject 
happiness being the object, as well as the subject, of the verb is 
secured. 

Flies is an Intransitive Verb, because it has no object. 



etymology. 97 

Transitive Verbs in the Active Voice. 

Analyze. Parse the verbs. 

1. "The cloud obscures the sky." " The sun gives light." "The 
boy cuts wood." "The tree bears fruit." "Hunters pursue game." 
" Bees collect honey." " Caesar conquers Pompey." " The farmer 
sows -wheat." " The waves toss the ship." " The caterpillar 
destroys the leaves." " Kings wear crowns." " The general com- 
mands the army." " I saw the chief." " Fire consumes wood." 

Transitive Verbs in the Passive Voice. 

Analyze. Parse the verbs. 

2. " The sky is obscured by the cloud." " The chief was seen by 
me." " Wood is consumed by fire." " Light is given by the sun." 
"Wood is cut by the* boy." " Fruit is borne by the tree." " Game 
is pursued by hunters." " Honey is collected by bees." " Pompey 
is conquered by Caesar." "Wheat is sown by the farmer." " The 
ship is tossed by the waves." " The leaves are destroyed by the 
caterpillar." " Crowns are worn by kings." " The army is com- 
manded by the general." 

Intransitive Verbs. 
Analyze. Parse the verbs. 

3. "The rvftv flows." " The ship sails." "Snow fell." "He 
has arrived." " They came in haste." " The fruit lies on the 
ground." "His army encamped these." 

(Turn to \ 54, and write Exercise VI.) 

§ 28. FORMS OF VERBS. 

According to form, a Verb may be Regular, Irregular, 
or Defective. 

1. A Regular Verb is one whose past tense of the 
Indicative Mode, and whose past participle end in ed; as, 
Indicative Mode. 
Present Tense. Past Tense. Past Participle. 

Love. Love-d. Love-d. 

Learn. Learn-ed. Learn-ed. 

9 



98 ETYMOLOGY. 

"When is d only, added in forming the Past Tense and Past Par- 
ticiple of the verb ? 

When should ed be added? To what tense must d or ed be 
added? 

Exercise in Writing. 

Form the Past Tense and Past Participle of the following verbs, 
according to the examples given above. 

Please, command, complain, name, use, walk, receive, parse, add, 
form, declare. 

2. An Irregular Yerb is one whose past tense and past 
participle do not both end in ed, though one of them 
may; as, 





Indicative Mode. 




isent Tense. 


Past Tense. 


Past Participle. 


Dare. 


Durst. 


Dared. See § 38. 


Slay. 


Slew. 


Slain. 



Note. To find the principal parts of an Irregular Verb, look at 
the list in § 38. 

3. A Defective Verb is one not used in all the modes 
and tenses ; as, 

Pres. Indie. Past. Past. Part. 

Can. Could. 

Shall. Should. 

4. A Verb in the progressive form ends in ing. It 
denotes continuance of the action, being, or state. 

5. An Auxiliary Verb is one which helps in conjugating 
the principal verb. The Auxiliaries are do, be, have, 
shall, will, may, can, and their variations. 

Exercise. Model. 
Analyze. Parse the verbs. 
" God loved the world." 
Loved is a Regular, Transitive Verb, in the Active Voice. 



ETYMOLOGY. 99 

Regular, because its Past Tense and Past Participle are formed 
by adding d to the present of the Indicative Mode, Active Voice. 

Transitive Verb, in the Active Voice, because the act of its sub- 
ject God, is exerted on the object world. 

1. "They trusted in him. Thomas planted a tree. The crow 
dropped the cheese. He replied to them. The lady walked to the 
fair." 

2. " Milton wrote poetry. Cicero zoas eloquent. A thief has 
stolen my purse. The moon shone brightly." 

3. " We ought to love one another. Beware of flatterers." 

4. " Time is marching onward. The president is writing a letter. 
The gentleman has been reading the news. The sun is shining." 

5. In each of the following examples, take the auxiliary and the 
principal verb together, and parse them as one word. Name the 
auxiliaries. 

"We do sin. They icill be punished. He has repented. Men 
should obey the law. No man can serve two masters. He may 
serve one. We must die. The wicked shall be destroyed." 

I 29. UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 

1. Unipersonal Verbs are such as are used only in one 
person — the third person, singular. 

Compound Verb. 

2. A Compound Verb is one united with a preposition, 
or an adverb following it. 

Exercise. Model. 

"It freezes" "Run up your starry flag on high." 

Freezes is an irregular, intransitive, unipersonal verb. 

Irregular, because its past tense and past participle are not 
formed by adding d or ed to the present of the indicative active. 

Intransitive, because it has no object. 

Unipersonal, because it is used only in the third person singular. 

Run up is an irregular, transitive verb, in the active voice 
(reasons heretofore given), compounded of the verb run, and the 
adverb up. 

1. "It lightens. It thunders. It hails. It snows. It happens." 



100 ETYMOLOGY. 

2. "He casts up his accounts. He disposed of the property. 
The property was disposed of by him. She smiled on him. They 
were laughed at." 

Turn to I 54, and write Exercise VII. 

I 30. MODES. 

Mode is the manner of expressing the meaning of the 
verb. 

There are five Modes : the Indicative, Potential, Sub- 
junctive, Imperative, and Infinitive. 

1. The Indicative Mode simply indicates or declares a 
thing ; or it asks a question. 

2. The Potential Mode implies the possibility, liberty, 
power, will, duty, or necessity of the act, being, or state, 
expressed by the verb. 

3. The Subjunctive Mode represents the act, state, or 
being, expressed by the verb as doubtful, contingent, or 
suppositional. 

4. The Imperative Mode is used in commanding, ex- 
horting, entreating, or permitting. 

5. The Infinitive Mode is used to express the meaning 
of the verb in a general manner, not limited by number 
or person. It is often used in the sense of a noun. 

Exercise. Model. 

"Washington was prudent." "Was "Washington prudent?" 

Was is a verb, because it denotes the being of its subject Wash- 
ington. 

Intransitive, because it has no object. 

Irregular, because its past tense and past participle do not end 
in ed. 

Voices do not belong to Intransitive verbs. 

Indicative Mode, because it simply declares, or asks a question, 
as in the second example. 



ETYMOLOGY. 101 

1. " Hannibal was a Carthaginian general. Was Hannibal a 
Carthaginian general? Virtue alone is happiness below. Time 
will cut us down. I have finished this exercise." 

2. "We may go. He can write letters. Must I stay?, You 
should obey your parents. He would learn, if he could. They 
might have gone." 

3. "He will not be pardoned, unless he repent. If I were not 
Alexander, I would be Diogenes. We could learn, if we were 
taught properly. Live temperately, if you desire health." 

4. "Depart thou. Love one another. Grant us thy blessing. 
Go not in the way of the wicked. Go where you wish." 

5. " Strive to learn. Endeavor to please your parents. To com- 
mand is easy, but to perform is difficult." 

\ 31. TENSES. 

Tenses serve to mark the time of the act, being, or 
state. 

The Tenses are six : the Present, the Present Perfect, 
the Past, the Past Perfect, the Future, and the Future 
Perfect. 

1. The Present Tense expresses what takes place in 
present time. 

2. The Present Perfect Tense represents the act, 
being, or state, as perfect or finished in present time. 

3. The Past Tense expresses what took place in past 
time. 

4. The Past Perfect Tense represents the act, being, or 
state, as perfect or finished at or before some past time 
mentioned. 

5. The Future Tense expresses what will take place 
hereafter. 

6. The Future Perfect Tense represents the act, being, 
or state, as perfect or finished at or before some future 
time referred to. 

9* 



102 ETYMOLOGY. 

Exercise. Model. 

" The moon shines, but the light is not her own (light)." 

Shines is a verb, because it expresses the act of its subject moon. 

Intransitive, because it has no object. 

Irregular, because its past tense and past participle do not gene- 
rally end in ed. (But this verb is also regular.) 

Omit the voice in parsing intransitive verbs. 

Indicative mode, because it simply indicates or declares. 

Present tense, because it represents what takes place in present 
time. 

Is is a verb, intransitive, irregular, indicative mode, present 
tense. 

1. " The master teaches grammar to-day. The lady is now writing 
a letter, and the messenger is waiting for it. ■ God is love." 

2. "We have just dined. They have been playing for two hours. 
He has recited six lessons this week." 

3. "The master taught grammar yesterday. The lady wrote a 
letter yesterday, and the messenger waited for it a long time." 

4. "The master had taught grammar before he was examined by 
the school-committee. The lady had written the letter before the 
messenger arrived." 

5. " The master will teach grammar to-morrow. The lady will 
write a letter this evening, and it will be sent by private con- 
veyance." 

6. " The master will have been teaching grammar for three years, 
at the close of this year. The lady will have written the letter 
before two o'clock, and the messenger will have delivered it before 
nine o'clock in the morning. 

I 32. NUMBERS AND PERSONS OF THE VERB. 

A verb has three persons and two numbers, corresponding to the 
persons and numbers of the subject. 

Exercise. Model. 

" I run." Run is a verb, because it expresses the act of its sub- 
ject I. 

Intransitive, because it is not followed by an object. 

Irregular, because its past tense and past participle do not end 
in ed.. 



ETYMOLOGY. 103 

Omit tlie voice when the verb is intransitive. 

Indicative mode, because it simply indicates or declares. 

Present tense, because it expresses what takes place in present 
time. 

First person and singular number, because its subject I is first 
person and singular number. 

" I love. Thou lovest. He loveih. He loves. "We love. Ye love. 
You love. They love. I am writing. Thou art writing. He is 
writing. We are writing. Ye are writing. They are writing. 
You are writing. I am ruled. Thou art ruled. He is ruled. We 
are ruled. Ye are ruled. You are ruled. They are ruled. Men 
labor. The earth produces plants." 

I 33. PARTICIPLES. 

A Participle is a word which expresses action, being, 
or state, as a verb ; and as an adjective, it qualifies a 
noun or pronoun. 

Verbs have three Participles : Present, Past, and 
Perfect. 

1. The Present Participle denotes continuance of the 
action, being, or state, at the time mentioned. 

2. The Past Participle represents the action, state, or 
being, as completed or finished in past time. 

3. The Perfect Participle represents the act, being, or 
state, as completed or finished at the time referred to. 

Exercise. Model. 

" I see him writing. I saw him writing. I will see him 
writing." 

First example. — Writing is a Participle, because it denotes action 
like a verb; and as an adjective, it qualifies the pronoun him. 
Writing is a Present Participle, because it denotes continuance of 
action at the present time. 

Second example. — Writing is a Participle, because as a verb it 
expresses action; and as an adjective, it qualifies the pronoun Mm. 
Present Participle, because it denotes action continuing in past 
time. 



104 . ETYMOLOGY. 

Third example. — "Writing is a Participle, &c. Present Participle, 
because it denotes action continuing in future time. 

1. "We saw a man cutting wood. We will bear the wolves howl- 
ing. I hear the teacher instructing his pupils." 

2. "Admired and applauded, he became vain." 

3. "The pupil, having recited his lesson, is now at play. Having 
paid his debts, he became contented." 

| 34. CONJUGATION. 

Conjugation is the arrangement of the different parts 
of a verb. 

1. Intransitive Irregular Verb " To be." 

Principal Parts. 

Pres. Indie. Past Indie. Past Part 

Am. Was. Been. 

INDICATIVE MODE. 
PRESENT TENSE. 

Singular. Plural. 

1st Per. I am. We are. 

2d Per. Thou art. Ye or you are. 

3d Per. He is. They are. 

PRESENT PERFECT TENSE. Have, Mst, has. 

I have been. We have been. 

Thou hast been. Ye or you have been. 

He has been (hath). They have been. 

PAST TENSE. 

I was. We were. 

Thou wast. Ye or you were. 

He was. They were. 

past perfect tense. Had, hadst. 
I had been. We had been. 

Thou hadst been. Ye or you had been. 

He had been. They had been. 



ETYMOLOGY. 105 

FUTURE TENSE. Shall OT Will, sJldll, Wilt. 

Singular. Plural. 

I shall or will be We shall or will be. 

Thou shalt or wilt be. Ye or you shall or will be. 

He shall or will be. They shall or will be. 

future perfect tense. Shall or will have, shall or wilt have. 

I shall or will have been. We shall or will have been. 

Thou shalt or wilt have been. Ye or you shall or will have been. 
He shall or will have been. They shall or will have been. 

POTENTIAL MODE. 

present tense. May, can, must. 

I may, can, or must be. We may, can, or must be. 

Thou mayst, canst, or must be. Ye or you may, can, or must be. 
He may, can, or must be. They may, can, or must be. 

present perfect tense. May, can, must have. 

I may, can, or must have been. We may, can, or must have been. 
Thou mayst, canst, or must have Ye or you may, can, or must 

been. have been. 

He may, can, or must have been. They may, can, or must have 

been. 

past tense. Might, could, would, should. 

I might, &c, be. We might, &c, be. 

Thou mightst, &c, be. Ye or you might, &c, be. 

He might, &c, be. They might, &c, be. 

past perfect tense. Might, could, ivould, or should have. 

I might, &c, have been. We might, &c, have been. 

Thou mightst, &c, have been. Ye or you might, &c, have been. 
He might, &c, have been. They might, &c, have been. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. 

The Potential or the Indicative Mode may become the Subjunc- 
tive, by prefixing some conjunction, such as if, though, lest, unless, 



106 



ETYMOLOGY. 



&c, expressing doubt or contingency. Shall or toill, and should^ 
are sometimes omitted in the future tense. 



Singular. 

If I were. 
If thou wert. 
If he were. 



PAST TENSE. 

Plural. 

If we were. 

If ye or you were. 

If they were. 



IMPERATIVE MODE. 

Be or be thou, or do thou be. Be, or be ye or you, or do ye or 

you be. 

INFINITIVE MODE. 
Present. To be. Perfect. To have been. 

PARTICIPLES. 
Present. Being. Past. Been. Perfect. Having been. 

2. Regular Transitive Verb, "To Love" 

I 35. ACTIVE VOICE. 
Principal Parts. 
Pres. Indie. Past Indie. Past Par. Pass. 

Love. Loved. Loved. 



Common Form. 
I love. 
Thou lovest. 
He loves (loveth). 



INDICATIVE MODE. 

PRESENT TENSE. 

Singidar. 
Emphatic Form. 

Do love. 

Dost love. 

Doth or does love. 



Progressive Form. 
Am loving. 
Art loving. 
Is loving. 





ETYMOLOGY- 


• 


Plural. 


We love. • 


Do love. Are loving. 


Ye or you love. 


Do love. Are loving. 


They love. 


Do love. Are loving. 


PRESENT PERFECT TENSE. 




Singular. 


Common Form. 


Progressive For'm, 


I have loved. 


Have been loving. 


Thou hast loved. 


Hast been loving. 


He has loved (hath). 


Hath or has been loving. 




Plural. 


We have loved. 


Have been loving. 


Ye or you have loved. 


Have been loving. 


They have loved. 


Have been loving. 




PAST TENSE. 




Singular. 


Common. 


Emphatic. Progressive. 


I loved. 


Did love. Was loving. 


Thou lovedst. 


Didst love. Wast loving. 


He loved. 


Did love. Was loving. . 




Plural. 


We loved. 


Did love. Were loving. 


Ye or you loved. 


Did love. Were loving. 


They loved. 


Did love. Were loving. 


PAST PERFECT TENSE. 




Singular. 


Common. 


Progressive. 


I had loved. 


Had been loving. 


Thou hadst loved. 


Had been loving. — 


He had loved. 


Had been loving. 




Plural. 


We had loved. 


Had been loving. 


Ye or you had loved. 


Had been loving. 


They had loved. 


Had been loving. 



107 



108 



ETYMOLOGY. 



FUTURE TENSE. 



Singular. 
I shall or will love. 
I shall or will be loving. 
Thou shalt or wilt love. 
Thou shalt or wilt be loving. 
He shall or will love. 
He shall or will be loving. 



Plural. 
"We shall or will love. 
We shall or will be loving. 
Ye or you shall or will love. 
Ye or you shall or will be loving. 
They shall or will love. 
They shall or will be loving. 



FUTURE PERFECT TENSE. 



I shall or will have loved. 
I shall or will have been loving. 
Thou shalt or wilt have loved. 
Thou shalt or wilt have been 

loving. 
He shall or will have loved. 
He shall or will have been 

loving. 



We shall or will have loved. 
We shall or will have been loving. 
Ye or you shall or will have loved. 
Ye or you shall or will have been 

loving. 
They shall or will have loved. 
They shall or will have been 

loving. 



POTENTIAL MODE. 
PRESENT TENSE. 

I may, can, or must love, or be We may, can, or must love, or be 

loving. loving. 

Thou mayst, canst, or must love, Ye or you may, can, or must 

or be loving. love, or. be loving. 

He may, can, or must love, or be They may, can, or must love, or 

loving. be loving. 



PRESENT PERFECT TENSE. 



I may, can, or must have loved, 

or been loving. 
Thou mayest, canst, or must 

have loved, or been loving. 
He may, can, or must have loved, 

or been loving. 



We may, can, or must have 

loved, or been loving. 
Ye or you may, can, or must 

have loved, or been loving. 
They may, can, or must have 

loved, or been loving. 



ETYMOLOGY 109 

PAST TENSE. 

I might, could, would or should We might, &c, love, or be lov- 

love, or be loving. ing. 

Thou mightst, &c, love, or be Ye or you might, &c, love, or 

loving. . be loving. 

He might, &c., love, or be lov- They might, &c, love, or be lov- 
ing, ing. 

PAST PERFECT TENSE. 

I might, &c, have loved, or been We might, &c, have loved, or 

loving. been loving. 

Thou mightst, &c, have loved, Ye or you might, &c, have 

or been loving. loved, or been loving. 

He might, &c, have loved, or They might, &c., have loved, or 

been loving. been loving. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. 

The Indicative or Potential Mode becomes the Subjunctive by 
prefixing a conjunction implying doubt or contingency. 

Note. — Shall, will, or should is sometimes omitted in the future 
tense. 

PAST TENSE. 
Progressive Form. 
Singular. Plural. 

If I were loving. If we were loving. 

If thou wert loving. If ye or you were loving. 

If he were loving. If they were loving, 

IMPERATIVE MODE. 

Sing. 2. Love, or love thou, or do thou love ; or, 
Be thou loving, or do thou be loving. 
Plural, 2. Love, or love ye or you, or do ye or you love ; or, 
Be ye or you loving, or do ye or you be loving. 

INFINITIVE MODE. 

Present. To love, or to be loving. 

Perfect. To have loved, or to have been loving. 

10 



110 ETYMOLOGY. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Present. Loving, or being loving. 

Past Part. Loved, [not used actively, except in the Past Indicative, 

or when combined with an auxiliary). 
Perfect. Having loved, or having been loving. 

Exercise. 

Repeat the principal parts of the following verbs : "command, 
place, trace, divide, form, plant." 

Conjugate them as the verb love is conjugated. 

Note 1. — For verbs ending in y, see g 10, Rule IV. 

Note 2. — The Past Participle, -when not used in forming the 
tenses of verbs in the Active Voice has a passive meaning. 

Regular Transitive Verb "To he Loved." 

I 36. PASSIVE VOICE. 
Principal Paris. 
Pres. Indie. Past Indie. Past Par. Pass. 

Am loved. Was loved. Loved. 

INDICATIVE MODE. 

PRESENT TENSE. 

Singular. Plural. 

I am loved. We are loved. 

Thou art loved. Ye or you are loved. 

He is loved. They are loved. 

PRESENT PERFECT TENSE. 

I have been loved. We have been loved. 

Thou hast been loved. Ye or you have been loved. 

He has been loved, (hath.) They have been loved. 

PAST TENSE. 

I was loved. We were loved. 

Thou wast loved. Ye or you were loved. 

He was loved. They were loved. 



ETYMOLOGY. Ill 

PAST PERFECT TENSE. 

Singular. Plural. 

I had been loved. "We had been loved. 

Thou hadst been loved. Ye or you had been loved. 

He had been loved. They had been loved. 

FUTURE TENSE. 

I shall or will be loved. We shall or will be loved. 

Thou shalt or wilt be loved. Ye or you shall or will be loved. 

He shall or will be loved. They shall or will be loved. 

FUTURE PERFECT TENSE. 

I shall or will have been loved. We shall or will have been loved. 

Thou shalt or wilt have been Ye or you shall or will have 

loved. been loved. 

He shall or will have been They shall or will have been 

loved. loved. 

POTENTIAL MODE. 

PRESENT TENSE. 

I may, &c, be loved. We may, &c., be loved. 

Thou mayst, &c., be loved. Ye or you may, &c., be loved. 

He may, &c., be loved. They may, &c., be loved. 

PAST TENSE. 

I might, &c., be loved. We might, &c, be loved. 

Thou mightst, &c., be loved. Ye or you might, &c, be loved. 
He might, &c., be loved. They might, &c., be loved. 

PRESENT PERFECT TENSE. 

I may, can, or must have been We may, can, or must have 

loved. been loved. 

Thou mayst, canst, or must have Ye or you may, can, or must 

been loved. have been loved. k 

He may, can, or must have been They may, can, or must have 

loved. been loved. 



112 ETYMOLOGY. 

PAST PERFECT TENSE. 

Singular. Plural. 

I might, could, would, or should We might, could, would, or 

have been loved. should have been loved. 

Thou mightst, couldst, wouldst, Ye or you might, could, would, 

or shouldst have been loved. or should have been loved. 

He might, could, would, or should They might, could, would, or 

have been loved. should have been loved. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. 

This Mode is similar to the Indicative or Potential Mode, except 
that to the Subjunctive some word is prefixed, expressing doubt 
or contingency. 

past tense. Hypothetical Form. 
If I were loved. If we were loved. 

If thou wert loved. If ye or you were loved. 

If he were loved. If they were loved. 

IMPERATIVE MODE. 
Be thou loved. Be ye or you loved. 

INFINITIVE MODE. 
Present Tense. To be loved. Perfect. To have been loved. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Present. Being loved. Past. Loved. Perfect. Having been 

loved. 
Conjugate in the Passive Voice the verbs " command, place, trace, 
divide, form, plant." 

I 37. FORMATION OF THE TENSES IN THE PASSIVE 
VOICE. 

1. A Transitive Verb is conjugated in the Passive Voice, by annex- 
ing its past participle to the verb To be, (§ 34. 1.) through all its 
modes, tenses, numbers, and persons. 

2. An Intransitive Verb, for the most part, is conjugated as the 
verb To Love, in the Active Voice, '$ 34. 2. 



ETYMOLOGY. 



113 



8. A few Intransitive Verbs have a passive form, but not a pas- 
sive meaning; as, " He is gone. They are come. The sun is risen." 
It would be better to use the active form; thus, "He has gone. 
They have come. The sun has risen." 



§38. IRREGULAR VERBS. (See §28.2.) 

The letters d and ed, in the following list, indicate that 
those parts of the verb after which they are placed are 
likewise regular. The letter d, or the letters ed, must be 
annexed to the present tense. 

Principal Parts. 



Pres. Indie. 


Past Indie. 


Past Par. 


Pres. Indie. 


Past Indie. 


Past Par. 


Abide. 


Abode. 


Abode. 


Cleave.! 


(d.) 


(d.) 


Am. 


Was. 


Been. 


Cleave.g 


Clove, cleft. 


Cloven, cleft. 


Arise. 


Arose. 


Arisen. 


Cliug. 


Clung. 


Clung. 


Awake. 


Awoke (d). 


Awaked. 


Clothe. 


Clad (d). 


Clad (d). 


Bear.* 


Bore, bare. 


Born". 


Come. 


Came. 


Come. 


Bear.f 


Bore. 


Borne. 


Cost. 


Cost. 


Cost. 


Beat. 


Beat. 


Beaten, beat 


, Creep. 


Crept. 


Crept. 


Become. 


Became. 


Become. 


Crow. 


Crew (ed). 


Crowed. 


Begin. 


Began. 


Begun. 


Cut. 


Cut. 


Cut. 


Bend. 


Bent (ed). 


Bent (ed). 


Dare.|| 


Durst. 


Dared. 


Bereave. 


Bereft (d). 


Bereft (d). 


Dare.tf 


(d.) 


(d.) 


Beseech. 


Besought. 


Besought. 


Deal. 


Dealt (ed). 


Dealt (ed). 


Bid. 


Bid, bade. 


Bidden, bid. 


Dig. 


Dug (ged), 


Dug (ged), 


Bind. 


Bound. 


Bound. 




I 10, K. II. 


§ 10, R. II. 


Bite. 


Bit. 


Bitten, bit. 


Do. 


Did. 


Done. 


Bleed. 


Bled. 


Bled. 


Draw. 


Drew. 


Drawn. 


Blow. 


Blew. 


Blown. 


Dream 


Dreamt (ed). 


Dreamt (ed). 


Break. 


Broke. 


Broken. 


Drink. 


Drank. 


Drunk, 


Breed. 


Bred. 


Bred. 






drank. 


Bring. 


Brought. 


Brought. 


Drive. 


Drove. 


Driven. 


Build. 


Built (ed). 


Built (ed). 


Dwell. 


Dwelt (ed). 


Dwelt (ed). 


Burn. 


Burnt (ed). 


Burnt (ed). 


Eat. 


Ate, eat. 


Eaten. 


Burst. 


Burst. 


Burst. 


Fall. 


Fell. 


Fallen. 


Buy. 


Bought. 


Bought. 


Feed. 


Fed. 


Fed, 


Cast. 


Cast. 


Cast. 


Feel. 


Felt. 


Felt. 


Catch. 


Caught (ed). 


Caught (ed). 


Fight. 


Fought. 


Fought. 


Chide. ' 


Chid. 


Chidden, chid. Find. 


Found. 


Found. 


Choose. 


Chose. 


Chosen. 


Flee. 


Fled. 


Fled. 


* 


To bring forth 


t 


To sustain. 


X To adhere. 


I 


To split. 


II ' 


To venture. 


If To challenge. 



10 



114 




ETYMOLOGY. 






Pres. Indie. 


Past Indie. 


Past Par. 


Pres. Indie. 


Past Indie. 


Past Par. 


Fling. 


Flung. 


Flung. 


Read. 


Read (p. red), 


, Read (p. red.) 


Fly. 


Flew. 


Flown. 


Rend. 


Rent. 


Rent. 


Forbear. 


Forbore. 


Forborne. 


Rid. 


Rid. 


Rid. 


Forget. 


Forgot. 


Forgotten, 


Ride. 


Rode. 


Rode. 






forgot. 


Ring. 


Rang, rung. 


Rung. 


Forsake. 


Forsook. 


Forsaken. 


Rise. 


Rose. 


Risen. 


Freeze. 


Froze. 


Frozen. 


Rive. 


(d.) 


Riven (d). 


Get. 


Got. 


Gotten, got. 


Run. 


Ran. 


Run. 


Gild. 


Gilt (ed). 


Gilt (ed). 


Saw. 


(ed.) 


Sawn (ed). 


Gird. 


Girt (ed). 


Girt (ed). 


Say. 


Said. 


Said. 


Give. 


Gave. 


Given. 


See. 


Saw. 


Seen. 


Go. 


Went. 


Gone. 


Seek. 


Sought. 


Sought. 


Grave. 


(d.) 


Graven (d). 


Seethe. 


Sod (d). 


Sodden (d). 


Grind. 


Ground. 


Ground. 


Sell. 


Sold. 


Sold. 


Grow. 


Grew. 


Grown. 


Send. 


Sent. 


Sent. 


Hang.* 


Hung. 


Hung. 


Set. 


Set. 


Set. 


Hang.t 


(ed.) 


(ed.) 


Shake. 


Shook. 


Shaken. 


Have. 


Had. 


Had. 


Shape. 


(d.) 


Shapen (d). 


Hear. 


Heard. 


Heard. 


Shave. 


(d.) 


Shaven (d). 


Heave. 


Hove (d). 


(d.) 


Shear. 


(ed.) 


Shorn (ed). 


Hew. 


(ed.) 


Hewn (ed). 


Shed. 


Shed. 


Shed. 


Hide. 


Hid. 


Hidden, hid. 


Shine. 


Shone (d). 


Shone (d). 


Hit. 


Hit. 


Hit. 


Shoe. 


Shod. 


Shod. 


Hold. 


Held. 


Held. 


Shoot. 


Shot. 


Shot. 


Hurt. 


Hurt. 


Hurt. 


Show. 


(ed.) 


Shown (ed). 


Keep. 


Kept. 


Kept. 


Shrink. 


Shrunk. 


Shrunk. 


Kneel. 


Knelt (ed). 


Knelt (ed). 


Shred. 


Shred. 


Shred. 


Knit. 


Knit (ted). 


Knit (ted). 


Shut. 


Shut. 


Shut. 




1 10, R. II 




Sing. 


Sang, sung. 


Sung. 


Know. 


Knew. 


Known. 


Sink. 


Sunk, sank. 


Sunk. 


Lade. 


(d.) 


Laden. 


Sit. 


Sat. 


Sat. 


Lay. 


Laid. 


Laid. 


Slay. 


Slew. 


Slain. 


Lead. 


Led. 


Led. 


Sleep. 


Slept. 


Slept. 


Leave. 


Left. 


Left 


Slide 


Slid. 


Slidden, slid. 


Lend. 


Lent. 


Lent. 


Sling. 


Slung, slang 


. Slung. 


Let. 


Let. 


Let. 


Slink. 


Slunk. 


Slunk. 


Lie.} 


Lay. 


Lain. 


Slit. 


Slit (ted). 


Slit (ted). 


Lie.g 


(d.) 


(d.) 


Smite. 


Smote. 


Smitten. 


Light. 


Lit (ed). 


Lit (ed). 


Sow. 


(ed.) 


Sown (ed). 


Lose. 


Lost. 


Lost. 


Speak. 


Spoke. 


Spoken. 


Make. 


Made. 


Made. 


Speed. 


Sped. 


Sped. 


Mean. 


Meant. 


Meant. 


Spell. 


Spelt (ed). 


Spelt (ed). 


Meet. 


Met. 


Met. 


Spend. 


Spent. 


Spent. 


Mow. 


(ed.) 


Mown (ed). 


Spill. 


Spilt (ed). 


Spilt (ed). 


Pay. 


Paid. 


Paid. 


Spin. 


Spun. 


Spun. 


Pen. 


Peut (ned). 


Pent (ned). 


Spit. 


Spit, spat. 


Spit. 


Put. 


Put. 


Put. 


Split. 


Split. 


Split. 


Quit. 


Quit (ted). 


Quit (ted). 


Spread. 


Spread. 


Spread. 


* To suspend. f To take life. 


J To recline. 


1 To tell 


an untruth. 







ETYMOLOGY. 




115 


Pres. Indie. 


Past Indie. 


Past Par. 


Pres. Indie. 


Past Indie. 


Past Par. 


Spring. 


Sprang, 


Sprung. 


Teach. 


Taught. 


Taught. 




sprung. 




Tear. 


Tore. 


Torn. 


Stand 


Stood. 


Stood. 


Tell. 


Told. 


Told. 


Steal. 


Stole. 


Stolen. 


Think. 


Thought. 


Thought. 


Stick. 


Stuck. 


Stuck. 


Thrive. 


Throve (d). 


Thriven (d). 


Sting. 


Stung. 


Stung. 


Throw. 


Threw. 


Thrown. 


Stride. 


Strode, strid. 


Stridden,strid. Thrust. 


Thrust. 


Thrust. 


Strike. 


Struck. 


Struck, 


Tread. 


Trod. 


Trodden, trod. 






stricken. 


Wax. 


(ed.) 


Waxen (ed). 


String. 


Strung. 


Strung. 


Wear. 


Wore. 


Worn. 


Strive. 


Strove. 


Striven. 


Weave. 


Wove. 


Woven. 


Strow. 


(ed.) 


Strown (ed). 


Weep. 


Wept. 


Wept. 


Strew. 


(ed.) 


Strewn (ed). 


Wet. 


Wet (ted). 


Wet (ted). 


Swear. 


Swore. 


Sworn. 


Whet. 


Whet (ted). 


Whet (ted). 


Sweat. 


Sweat (ed). 


Sweat (ed). 


Win. 


Won. 


Won. 


Sweep. 


Swept. 


Swept. 


Wind. 


Wound. 


Wound. 


Swell. 


(ed..) 


Swollen (ed). 


Work. 


Wrought (ed) 


. Wrought (ed). 


Swim. 


Swam, swum 


. Swum. 


Wring. 


Wrung (ed). 


Wrung (ed). 


Swing. 


Swung. 


Swung. 


Write. 


Wrote. 


Written. 


Take. 


Took. 


Taken. 









I 39. FORMATION OP THE TENSES OF IRREGULAR 
VERBS. 

1. The Present Indicative, Past Indicative, and Past Participle, 
are to be found in the list. 

2. Form the other tenses as in the active voice of the verb love, 
taking care to use the Past Participle of the Irregular Verb instead 
of loved, and the Present Tense instead of love. 



PAST TENSE. 

Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. 

I came. We came. I began. We began. 

Thou earnest. Ye or you came. Thou begannest. Ye or you began. 
He came. They came. He began. They began. 

3. The tenses of the Passive Voice of Irregular Verbs are formed 
as in \ 37. 1. 

Form the tenses of the Active and the Passive Voice of the 
following Irregular Verbs: "Write, blow, choose, slay, strive, 
give." 

4. In the inflection of Verbs, the student should be careful to 
apply the rules for spelling contained in § 10, 



116 ETYMOLOGY. 

\ 40. DEFECTIVE VERBS. 

1. A Defective Yerb is one which wants some of its 

modes and tenses. 

List. 



Present. 

Can. 
Shall. 
Must, 
Quoth. 


Past. 

Could. 
Should. 


Present. 

Will. 
May. 
Ought. 
Wit. 


Past. 

Would. 
Might. 
Ought. 
Wot. 


Quoth. 



2. Ought is in the present tense, when followed by the present 
of the infinitive ; and in the past tense, when followed by the per- 
fect of the infinitive. 

| 41. ADVERBS. 

An Adverb is a word which may modify the mean- 
ing of 

1. A Verb. 2. An Adjective. 3. A Participle, or 
Verbal Noun. 4. Another Adverb. 5. A Preposition. 
6. A Noun, or Pronoun. 

Exercise. Model. 
" The bird sings sweetly." 

Sweetly is an adverb, and modifies the meaning of the verb 
sings. It shows the manner of singing. 

1. " The pupil studies diligently. Where is John ? When did 
he arrive ? He will not speak again." 

2. " Plato was very wise, but Solomon was much wiser. Choose 
the most honorable course." 

3. " See that poor man' working hard. We heard him singing 
merrily. When laboring, he is happy." 

4. "We were very* much 1 surprised to hear of his acting so 4 
rashly. 3 " 

5. " He lives far beyond the river. The zenith is the point 
directly over our heads. They arrived long after the time." 

6. " The pilot only was saved. The females also were drowned. 
Even Washington had his enemies. Even he was not without 
some faults. 



ETYMOLOGY. 



117 



I 42. ADVERBIAL PHRASES. 

1. Adjuncts in which the noun is omitted, and some 
other words which are united, are called Adverbial 
Phrases ; such as in vain, in general, by and by, at most, 
at least, on high, at all, by far, in short, by no means, 
long ago, to and fro, from whence, from thence, at once, 
all along, in general, &c. 

2. Adverbs briefly express what in other words would 
be expressed by adjuncts. 

Spell and define the following adverbs, by naming their corre- 
sponding adjuncts. 



Adverbs. Adjuncts. 

Again. At another time. 
Also. In like manner. 
Always. At all times. 
Badly. In a bad manner. 
Before. At an earlier time. 
Diligently. In a diligent manner. 
Directly. In a direct manner. 
Enough. In a sufficient degree. 
Even. In like manner. 
Far. To a great distance. 
Fast. In a quick manner. 
First. In the first place. 
Forth. In a forward direction. 
Happily. In a happy manner. 
Hard. In a laborious manner. 
Henceforth. From this time. 
Here. In this place. 
How. In what manner or degree. 
111. In an ill manner. 
Late. At a late time. 
Little. In a slight degree. 
Long. In a long time. 



Adverbs. Adjuncts. 

Merrily. In a merry manner. 
More. In a greater degree. 
Most. In the greatest degree. 
Much. In a great degree. 
Never. At no time. 
Not. By no means. 
Now. At this time. 
Often. At many times. 
Prudently. In aprudent manner. 
Quietly. In a quiet manner. 
Rashly. In a rash manner. 
So. In such a manner or degree. 
Soon. At an early time. 
Slowly. In a slow manner. 
Sweetly. In a sweet manner. 
There. In that place. 
Very. In a great degree. 
Well. In a good manner. 
When. At what time. 
Where. In what place. 
Wisely. In a wise manner. 



118 ETYMOLOGY. 

* 2 43. CONJUNCTIVE ADVERBS. 

A Conjunctive Adverb is one which is used both as an 
adverb and a conjunction. 

Conjunctive Adverbs modify two words, and likewise 
connect clauses. 

Exercise. Model. 

" I know not how he lives." 

How is a Conjunctive Adverb, modifying the verbs know and 
lives, and connecting the clauses " I know not," and " He lives," 

" We will hear the news when the mail arrives. They know not 
where he is. Persevere until you meet with success. Think before 
you speak." 

I 44. COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 

1. Some Adverbs are compared by prefixing the words 
more and most, or less and least; others by annexing r 
or er, and st or est to the positive. 

Compare the following adverbs by prefixing the words more and 
most, and less and least: "Wisely, prudently, quickly, slowly, 
happily." 

Compare the following by annexing er and est : " Soon, often, 
long, fast, hard." 

1. Irregular Comparison. 



Pos. 


"Com. 


Sup. 


Badly, ill. 


Worse. 


Worst. 


Far. 


Farther. 


Farthest. 


Forth. 


Further. 


Furthest. 


Late. 


Later, latter. 


Latest, last. 


Little. 


Less. 


Least. 


Much. 


More. 


Most. 


Near. 


Nearer. 


Nearest, nest. 


Well. 


Better. 


Best. 


(Turn to f 54, and write Exercise VIII.) 





ETYMOLOGY. 



119 



I 45. PREPOSITIONS. 

1. A Preposition is a word which is placed before a 
noun or pronoun, to show its relation to some other 
word. 

2. A preposition, with its object, is called the adjunct 
of the word to which it is joined. 

Exercise. Model. 

- " Form habits of industry." 

Of is a preposition, because it shows the relation between the 
words industry and habits. 

Of industry is the adjunct of the word habits. 

Note. — The words which modify the object of a preposition 
form a part of the adjunct. 

" The house was raised above the ground. The man lives in the 
white house. Obey the laws of your country. The weather is warm 
during the summer season. Pupils should study at school and at 
home. It is pleasant under the shade of the spreading beech, when 
the summer sun shines upon the earth." 

Under the shade is the adjunct of pleasant. Of the spreading 
beech is the adjunct of shade. Upon the earth is the adjunct of 
shines. 

3. A list of the principal Prepositions. 



Aboard. 


As for. 


But. 


Of. 


Above. 


As to. 


By. 


Off. 


About. 


At. 


Concerning. 


On. 


According to. 


Athwart. 


Down. 


Out of. 


Across. 


Before. 


During. 


. Over. 


After. 


Behind. 


Except. 


Over against. 


Against. 


Below. 


Excepting. 


Overthwart. 


Along. 


Beneath. 


For. 


Past. 


Amid. 


Beside. 


From. 


Regarding. 


Amidst. 


Besides. 


From between. 


Respecting. 


Among. 


Between 


In, in order. 


Round. 


Amongst. 


Betwixt. 


Into. 


Save. 


Around. 


Beyond. 


Notwithstanding. 


Since. 



120 



ETYMOLOGY. 



Through. Touching. Underneath. With. 

Throughout. Toward. Until. Within 

Till. Towards. Unto. Without. 

To. Under. Up. Worth. 

Turn to I 54, and write Exercise IX. 

I 46. CONJUNCTIONS. 

A Conjunction is a word that connects 

1. Words. 2. Phrases. 

3. Adjuncts. 4. Sentences. 

Exercise. 
" John and William are brothers/' 

And is a conjunction, because it connects the words John and 
William. 

1. " He reads or writes. The sun and moon give light. Jupiter 
and Saturn are planets." 

2. " To love God, and to obey his law, are duties of all; but to 
take his name in vain, or to bear false witness against thy neigh- 
bor, is forbidden." 

3. " The orator was applauded by the ladies, and by the gentle- 
men. He spoke to the learned, and to the unlearned." 

4. " Straws swim on the surface, but pearls lie at the bottom. I 
respect him, because he is just. We read that we may learn." 

A list of some of the principal Conjunctions. 

Although, and, as, as well as, because, both, but, but that, either, 
except, for, if, inasmuch as, in order that, lest, neither, nor, or, 
since, than, that, then, though, unless, whether, yet, &c. 

Turn to \ 54, and write Exercise X. 

I 47. INTERJECTIONS. 

An Interjection is a word which expresses some passion 
or emotion. 

The following is a list of some of the principal Interjections. 



ETYMOLOGY. 121 

Ahl alas! oh! ha! 0! ho! hurrah! hail! welcome! hush! 
what! strange! &c. 

Model for Parsing an Interjection. 
" virtue ! how amiable thou art 1" 

is an Interjection, a word used to express some passion or 
emotion of the speaker. 

Exercise. (Write Exercise XI., g 54.) 
"Alas! I fear for life. Hail! beauteous stranger of the wood. 
Welcome ! La Fayette. Hush ! I think I hear them." 

I 48. VOCABULARY OF THE PRONOUNS. 

Spell and define the words. 

I, the word which stands for the speaker's name. 

Thou, the word standing for the name of the person spoken to. 

He, represents the name of the male spoken of. 

She, represents the name of the female spoken of. 

It, represents the person or thing spoken of. 

Himself, added to he, expresses emphasis. When in the objective, 
it shows that the agent is also the object. 

Herself, added to she, expresses emphasis. When in the objective, 
it shows that the agent is also the object. 

Itself, a substitute for the thing spoken of. 

Myself, added to /, expresses emphasis. When in the objective, it 
shows that the agent is also the object. 

Thyself, added to thou, expresses emphasis. In the objective, it 
shows that the agent is also the object. 

Yourself, added to you, expresses emphasis. When in the objec- 
tive, it shows that the agent is also the object. 

Others, not the same persons. 

Another's, a different person's. 

None, not any person or persons, thing or things. 

One, some man or woman ; a person. 

Who, a word relating to persons ; that. 

Which, a word relating mostly to things ; that. 

What, the thing or things which. 

That, a word relating to persons or things. 

Whoever, any person whatever. 
11 



122 



ETYMOLOGY. 



Whosoever, any person whatever. 
Whichever, one or the other ; any that. 
Whichsoever, one or the other ; any that. 
Whatever, any thing or things which. 
Whatsoever, any thing or things which. 
Who, what person. 



49. VOCABULARY OF THE VERBS. 



Spell and define, and give the 
abide ; a-b-o-d-e, abode, to stay or 

Abide. To stay or dwell. 
Admired. Esteemed; regarded. 
Applauded. Commended; 

praised. 
Arise. To mount up; to ascend. 
Arrive. To come to a place. 
Awake. To cease to sleep. 
Bark. To make the noise of a dog. 
Be. To exist. 
Bear. To sustain. 
Bear. To bring forth. 
Beat. To strike. 

Become. To be made ; to befit. 
Begin. To take rise; commence. 
Bend. To crook ; to bow. 
Bereave. To deprive of, strip. 
Beseech. To entreat ; to beg. 
Beware. To be cautious. 
Bid. To offer ; command. 
Bind. To tie ; confine. 
Bite. To seize with the teeth. 
Bleed. To let blood. 
Blow. To make a current of air. 
Break. To part by force. 
Breed. To hatch ; generate. 
Bring. To bear to ; to fetch. 
Build. To construct ; niake. 



principal parts 
dwell. 



thus, a-b-i-d-e, 



Burn. To consume by fire. 
Burst. To break or fly open. 
Buy. To purchase. 
Can. To be able. 
Calling. Naming; summoning. 
Cast. To throw. 
Catch. To seize ; to take hold. 
Chide. To rebuke ; to scold. 
Choose. To pick out; to select. 
Cleave. To split; to adhere. 
Cling. To adhere closely. 
Clothe. To furnish with garments. 
Collect. To assemble; to gather. 
Come. To arrive ; advance. 
Command. To order ; to direct. 
Conquer. To overcome ; subdue. 
Consume. To waste ; to spend. 
Cost. To be bought for. 
Creep. To move slowly ; to crawl. 
Crow. To utter the cry of a cock. 
Cut. To carve ; hew ; *hop. 
Dare. To venture or challenge. 
Deal. To trade; to distribute. 
Degrade. To reduce in rank. 
Deliver. To free ; release ; utter. 
Depart. To go away. 
Destroy. To demolish ; ruin. 



ETYMOLOGY. 



123 



Die. To expire. 

Dig. To turn up with a spade or 

hoe. 
Dine. To eat dinner. 
Divide. To part ; separate. 
Do. To act ; perform ; execute. 
Draw. To pull ; attract. 
Dream. To think in sleep. 
Drink. To swallow liquor. 
Drive. To urge ; compel. 
Drop. To fall. 
Dwell. To inhabit ; reside. 
Eat. To take food ; corrode. 
Encamp. To pitch tents. 
Exist. To be ; to live. 
Fall. To descend ; to drop. 
Fear. To dread; apprehend evil. 
Feed. To supply with food. 
Feel. To perceive by the touch. 
Fight. To contend in battle. 
Find. To discover. 
Finish. To complete ; end. 
Flee. To run away. 
Fling. To cast or throw. 
Flow. To move as water. 
Fly. To move with wings. 
Forbear. To cease ; abstain. 
Forget. To lose remembrance of. 
Form. To make ; fashion ; plan. 
Forsake. To desert; to abandon. 
Freeze. To congeal. 
Get. To obtain ; to acquire. 
Gild. To overlay with gold. 
Gird. To bind ; to tie round. 
Give. To grant ; bestow. 
Go. To move ; to depart. 
Grant. To yield ; to give. 
Grave. To carve. 
Grind. To reduce to powder. 



Grow. To increase ; vegetate. 

Hang. To suspend ; take life. 

Hated. Disliked very much. 

Have. To possess. 

Hear. To perceive by the ear. 

Heave. To swell; to lift; throw. 

Hew. To cut. 

Hide. To conceal. 

Hit. To strike. 

Hold. To keep ; to contain. 

Honor. To esteem ; respect. 

Howling. Crying as a dog or wolf. 

Hunt. To chase game; look for. 

Instruct. To teach ; direct. 

Keep. To preserve ; save. 

Kneel. To bend the knee. 

Knit. To unite by stitches. 

Know. To understand; perceive. 

Labor. To work ; to toil. 

Lade. To load. 

Lay. To put ; to place. 

Lead. To guide ; go before. 

Learn. To gain knowledge. 

Leave. To quit; abandon. 

Lend. To grant for a time. 

Let. To permit ; to lease. 

Lie. To recline. (Irregular.) 

Lie. To utter a falsehood. (Regu- 
lar.) 

Light. To illuminate ; descend. 

Lose. To miss; let slip; suffer 
loss. 

Love. To regard with affection. 

Make. To form ; to create. 

March. To move as soldiers. 

May. To be possible; to be 
able. 

Mean. To intend; design; sig- 
nify. 



124 



ETYMOLOGY. 



Meet. To come together. 

Mow. To cut grass with a scythe. 

Must. To be obliged. 

Obey. To comply with orders. 

Obscure. To darken ; to cloud. 

Ought. To be obliged in duty. 

Paid. Having discharged a debt. 

Pardon. To forgive ; to remit. 

Pay. To discharge a debt. 

Pen. To confine ; record with a 
pen. 

Perform. To do ; to execute. 

Place. To fix; put; locate. 

Plant. To set in the earth. 

Play. To sport ; toy ; trifle. 

Please. To gratify; give pleas- 
ure. 

Prepare. To render fit; get 



Produce. To bring forth. 

Punish. To chastise; to inflict 
pain for an offence. 

Pursue. To follow ; to chase. 

Put. To place ; lay ; set. 

Quit. To leave ; forsake. 

Quoth. Said. 

Read. To peruse. 

Recite. To call or tell over. 

Recited. Told over. 

Rend. To tear ; split. 

Repent. To feel sorrow. 

Reply. To answer. 

Rid. To free. 

Ride. To be carried on an ani- 
mal, or in a vehicle. 

Ring. To cause to sound; to 
sound. 

Rise. To mount up ; to ascend. 

Rive. To split. 



Rule. To govern ; draw lines. 
Run. To move faster than in a 

walk. 
Sail. To move by the wind on 

water, or in the air. 
Saw. To cut with a saw. 
Say. To speak ; tell. 
Secure. To make fast ; to save. 
See. To perceive by the eye. 
Seek. To look for ; search after. 
Seethe. To boil; to direct. 
Sell. To dispose of for a price. 
Send. To cause to go ; dispatch. 
Serve. To wait on ; to worship. 
Set. To place ; put ; fix. 
Shake. To cause to quake ; 

tremble. 
Shall. An auxiliary of the future 

tense. 
Shape. To form ; fashion. 
Shave. To cut or pare off. j 
Shear. To cut with shears ; clip. 
Shed. To cast off. 
Shine. To emit rays of light. 
Shoe. To put a covering on the 

feet. 
Shoot. To dart ; discharge a gun. 
Show. To exhibit to view. 
Shrink. To contract; shrivel. 
Shred. To cut into small pieces. 
Shut. To close. . 
Sin. To violate a rule of duty. 
Sing. To utter musical sounds 

with the voice. 
Sink. To descend ; to settle. 
Sit. To take a seat; to be 

placed. 
Slay. To kill. 
Sleep. To rest ; to repose. 



ETYMOLOGY. 



125 



Slide. To move along the sur- 
face ; to slip. 

Sling. To hurl or throw. 

Slink. To miscarry; -sneak away. 

Slit. To make a cut or rent. 

Smite. To strike ; to kill. 

Sow. To scatter seed. 

Speak. To utter words ; to talk. 

Speed. To hasten. 

Spell. To name the letters of a 
word. 

Spend. To waste; consume; pass. 

Spill. To suffer to run out of a 
vessel. 

Spin. To draw out in a thread 
and twist. 

Spit. To throw out saliva. 

Split. To divide lengthwise. 

Spread. To extend ; to scatter. 

Spring. To rise out of the 
ground ; to leap ; to bound. 

Stand. To remain on the feet; 
stop. 

Stay. To continue; stop; hinder. 

Steal. To take by theft. 

Stick. To pierce ; stab ; adhere. 

Sting. To pierce; to pain. 

Stride. To take long steps. 

Strike. To inflict a blow; sur- 
render. 

String. To furnish with strings ; 
or to put on a string. 

Strive.. To make an effort ; con- 
tend. 

Strow, Strew. To scatter. 

Sweat. To emit moisture through 
the pores of the skin. 

Swear. To affirm with a solemn 
appeal to God for the truth of 
what is affirmed. 
11* 



Sweep. To brush ; pass along. 

Swell. To extend ; increase. 

Swim. To move on a fluid. 

Swing. To move when suspended. 

Take. To catch ; seize ; receive. 

Teach. To instruct. 

Tear. To rend. 

Tell. To relate ; to inform. 

Think. To judge; suppose; re- 
flect. 

Thrive. To prosper by industry. 

Throw. To cast or hurl. 

Thrust. To push or drive with 
force. 

Toss. To throw ; to roll and 
tumble. 

Trace. To follow, or mark out. 

Tread. To step, or set. the foot 
upon. 

Trust. To repose confidence in. 

Walk. To go by steps. 

Wait. To tarry ; delay ; stay ; 
attend. 

Wax. To grow ; increase. 

Wear. To waste ; carry as 
clothes. 

Weave. To unite threads. 

Weep. To shed tears ; express 
sorrow! 

Will. An auxiliary of the future 
tense. 

Wet. To moisten with a liquid. 

Whet. To sharpen by rubbing. 

Win. To gain or procure. 

Wind. To turn or twist. 

Wit. To know ; understand. 

Work. To labor ; to toil. 

Wring. To twist; to turn ; strain. 

Write. To make letters ; com- 
pose. 



126 



ETYMOLOGY. 



I 50. VOCABULARY OF 

Spell and define. 
Above. Higher ; more than. 
About. Near to ; concerning. 
According to. Agreeable to. 
Across. From side to side. 
After. Following in place or 

time. 
Against. Opposite to. 
Along. Onward; throughout. 
Amid, amidst. Amongst. 
Among, amongst. Mingled with. 
Around About ; encircling. 
As for, As to. With respect to. 
At. Denotes nearness ; towards. 
Athwart. Across. 
Before. In front of; prior to. 
Behind. Following; inferior to. 
Below. Under. 
Beneath. In a lower place; 

below. 
Beside. By the side of. 
Besides. Over and above. 
Between. In the intervening 

space. 
Betwixt. Same as between. 
Beyond. On the farther side of; 

past. 
But. Except. 
By. At; near; it denotes the 

agent. 
Concerning. Relating to. 
Down. Along a descent. 
During. For the time of continu- 
ance. 
Except. Exclusively of. . 
For. Because of; in place of. 
From. Away. 
From between. From amidst. 



THE PREPOSITIONS. 

In. Within ; not without. 

Into. Noting entrance. 

Notwithstanding. Not opposing. 

Of. From; concerning; belong- 
ing to. 

Off. Not on ; distant from. 

On. Upon ; at ; near. 

Over. Above; across; upon. 

Over-against. Opposite to. 

Out of. From ; without ; not in. 

Overthwart. Across. 

Past. Beyond ; above. 

Regarding. Concerning. 

Respecting. Same as regarding. 

Round. About ; on every side of. 

Save. Except. 

Since. After; from some time 
past. 

Through. From end to end of. 

Throughout. Quite through. 

Till. To the time of. 

To. Denotes motion towards. 

Touching. With respect to. 

Toward or Towards. In the 
direction to ; near to. 

Under. Below; beneath. 

Underneath. Same as under. 

Until. To the time. 

Unto. To. 

Up. From a lower to a higher 
part. 

Upon. On. 

With. Denotes nearness, or 
means. 

Within.. In"; not out. 

Without. Not within ; outside. 

Worth. Of equal value. 



ETYMOLOGY. 



127 



\ 51. VOCABULARY 

Spell and define. 
Although. Notwithstanding. 
And. A word denoting addition. 
As. Because ; since. 
As well as. Together with ; not 

less than ; one as much as the 

other. 
Because. For this reason. 
Both. As well. 
But. Except ; yet. 
But that. Except that. 
Either. The one or the other, 

referring to two words or 

clauses following. 
For. Because ; on this account. 
If. Grant; admit; suppose. 
In as much as. Seeing that; 

such being the case. 

I 52. VOCABULARY OF 

Spell and define. 

Ah ! A word expressive of pain, 
compassion, surprise, &c. 

Aha ! A word denoting pleasure. 

Alas ! Expressive of sorrow 

Alack ! Same as alas. 

All hail ! All health. 

Begone! Go away ; haste ; hence. 

Behold ! Look ; see. 

Eh ! A word expressive of pain. 

Fudge ! A word expressing con- 
tempt. 

Fie ! A word denoting aversion. 

Ha ! A word expressive of sur- 
prise. 

Hail ! A word of saluting. 

Hark ! Calling attention. 



OF CONJUNCTIONS. 

In order that. For the purpose of. 

Lest. For fear that. 

Neither. Not one nor the other. 

Nor. A negative particle. 

Or. A word connecting alterna- 
tives. 

Since. Because that. 

Than. A word used in compari- 
son. 

That. Denotes a consequence. 

Then. Therefore ; in that case 

Though. In case that ; admit ; 
grant. 

Unless. Except ; if not. 

Whether. Which of the two. 

Yet. Nevertheless. 



THE INTERJECTIONS. 

Hurrah ! A word denoting exul- 
tation. 

Ho! Expressive of calling aloud. 

Hush ! calling to silence. 

Lo ! See ; look ; behold. 

Look ! Calling the attention. 

! Expressive of wishing. 

Oh ! Denoting pain. 

Poh ! A word expressing con- 
tempt. 

Pshaw ! Same as poh. 

See ! Calling the attention. 

Strange ! Expressive of wonder. 

Welcome ! A word of salutation. 

Well-a-day! A word denoting 
sorrow. 

What! A word denoting surprise. 



128 ETYMOLOGY. 

I 53. EXERCISES IN PARSING. 

Nouns and Adjectives. 
Explanation of Abbreviations. 



The 


figure 1 over a word is intended to show that it is a noun. 


en., 


, Common noun. 


2p... 


Second person. 


pn. 


. Proper noun. 


s.. . 


Singular number. 


n.. 


. Neuter gender. 


pi.. 


Plural number. 


m . , 


. Masculine gender. 


sv. . 


Subject of the verb. 


f ... 


Feminine gender. 


otv., 


, Object of the transitive verb. 


no.. 


. Nominative case. 


op... 


, Object of the preposition. 


> 


. Possessive case 


gn., 


, Governed by the noun. 


o... 


. Objective case. 


ap.. 


. In apposition with. 


3p. 


. Third person. 


ab.. 


. Absolute with or by. 


Ip. 


. First person. 


af., 


. After the verb. 



The figure 2 over a word is intended to show that the word is an 
adjective. 

pe.. Positive degree. nc Not compared, 

ce . . Comparitive degree. ua. . Used abstractly, 

se . . Superlative degree. rn.. Relates to the noun. 

rv.. Relates to the verb. rp . Relates to the pronoun, 

rph.. Relates to the phrase. rsn.. Relates to the sentence. 

Model for Parsing a Noun. 

1. Class. Gender. Person. Case. Number. Syntax. Rule. 

en neu 3p no s sv II. 

Model for Parsing an Adjective. 

2. Part of speech. Degree. Compared. Syntax. Rule. 

adj. pe — rn V. 

Example. 

2nc 1 2 

" The tree is tall." 
TJie is an Adjective, not compared — it relates to the noun tree, 

1. An Adjective, because it limits the meaning of a noun. 

2. Not compared, because its signification can be neither in- 
creased nor diminished. 



ETYMOLOGY. 129 

Tree is a Common Noun, Neuter Gender, Third Person, Nomi- 
native Case, Singular Number, subject of the verb is. 

1. Common Noun, because it is the name of a class of things. 

2. Neuter Gender, because it does not denote sex. 

3. Third Person, because it is spoken of. 

4. Nominative Case, because it is the subject of the verb is. 

5. Singular Number, because it denotes but one. 

Tall is an Adjective of the Positive Degree, tall, taller, tallest, 
and relates to the noun tree. 

1. An Adjective, because it expresses a quality belonging to the 
noun tree. Tall tree. 

2. Positive Degree, because it expresses simply a quality of the 
tree. 

Note. — When a figure only is placed over a word, it is parsed 
just as in the model of the same number. Letters placed after a 
figure, show wherein the word is to be parsed differently from the 
form laid down in the model. 

Require the pupil to spell and define all the words in the lesson, 
and then parse them. 

LESSON I. 
The nouns are in the nominative case, because they denote the 
name of an object. (Use a dictionary for learning the definitions.) 



2 tic 1 m. 

The man 


2 nc 1 m pi. 2 nc If pi. 

The men. The women. 


2nc 1. 

The book. 


2 nc 1 pi. 

The books. 


2nc 1 (see § 16. Obs. 2). 2 nc l(seegl6. 

The fox. The foxes. 


Ob. 2., note) pi. 


2nc 1. 

A church. 


2 nc 1 pi. 2 nc 1 m. 

The churches. A hero. 


2 nc 1 in pi. 

The heroes. 


2nc 1. 

An octavo. 


2 nc 1 pi. 2 nc 1. 

The octavoes. A bamboo. 


2 nc 1 pi. 

The bamboos. 


2nc l(g 16. Obs 

A fly. 


.2). 2nc 1 (§ 16. Obs. 2., note) pi. 2 nc 1. 2 nc 

The flies. A valley. The 


• l pi. 
valleys. 


2 nc 1. 2 nc 1 pi. 2 nc 1 m. 

A leaf. The leaves. A chief. 


2 nc 1 m pi. 

The chiefs. 


2nc 1. 

A staff.. 


2 nc 1 pi. 2 nc 1. 

The staves. A flagstaff. 


2 nc 1 pi. 

The flagstaff's. 


2 nc 1 (g 16. Obs. 2.) 2 nc 1 (§ 16. Obs. 2., note) pi. 2 nc 1 m. 

A child. The children. A beau 


2 ne 1 m pi. 

l. The beaux. 



130 



ETYMOLOGY. 



2 nc 1 pi (g 19. 9). 2 nc 1 pi (19. 9). 

The embers. The scissors. 

2uc 2 nc 1 (g 16. Obs. 2, note, and g 19. 7) pi. 

The two deer. 



2 nc 1 (g 16. Obs. 2, and § 19. 7) 

A deer. 



(Write the words, omitting the abbreviations, and recite without 
the book. 



LESSON II. 
First spell and define the words. 

2nc lm(gl9. 10). 2 nc 1 m pi (g 19. 10). 



A father-in-law. 

2nc 1 m pi (g 19. 11). 

The men-servants. 

If. 2nc If. 

heroine. A poetess. 

2 nc 1 (g 16. Obs. 2, note) pi. 

The parents. 

2 nc 1 pn (g 16. Obs. 2, note) pi 

The Greeks. 

words as one). 



The fathers-in-law. 



2 nc 1 m. 

A widower. 



2 nc 1 m (g 19. 11.) 

A man-servant. 

2 nc 1 f pi. 2 nc 

The widows. A 



2 nc 1 (g 16. Obs. 2, note) pi. 2 nc 1 (g 16. Obs. 2.) 

The friends. A neighbor. 

1 pn m. 2 nc 1 pn (g 16. Obs. 2, note) pi. 

John. The Romans. 

1 pn. 1 pn m. 

Boston. James. 



nc 1 pn pi (take botb words as one name). 

Pope. The United States. 

2nc l(g 13. 3). 1(§19.8). 

Depravity. 



2 nc 1 pn. 

The Rhine. 

1 (g 19. 8). 

Virtue. 



The undertaking. 



1 (g 19. 8). 

Roundness. 



2 nc 1 (g 16. Obs. 2) pi. 

The people. 
Prepare by the book, but recite without it. 



1 pn m (both 

Alexander 

2 nc 1 pn m pi. 

The Caesars, 
i (g 19. 8). 
Wisdom. 

2 nc 1 (g 13. Obs. 1.) 

The army. 



LESSON III. 



Spell, define, and parse. 



2nc 

A 



2 lm. 

;reat kins. 



2 nc 1 m. 

American citizen. 

2nc 1 

complete building. 

2 nc 2 nc 1 pi. 



2nc 2 1. 2nc 2 1. 

The wide ocean. A peaceful mind. 

2 nc 2 nc lm, 2 nc 1 pi. 

A Grecian youth. All things. 

2 nc 2 nc 1. 2 nc 2 se 



2nc 

An 

2#c 

A 

1 m pi. 



The eternal world. 

2 nc 2 nc 1. 



The wisest men. 

2 nc lm, 



The whistling winds. The howling tempest. Each boy. 





ETYMOLOGY. 


131 


2 nc 1. 2 


nc 2 ce 1. 


2 nc 2 1. 


2 


Every way. A better form. 


The western sky. 


Many 


2 nc 1. 2 nc 


2 se 1. 


2 nc 2 se 1. 


2 nc 


a geni. The 


mildest disposition, 


The first volume. 


The 


2 se 1. 


2 nc 1 pi. 


2 nc 1 m. 


2 nc 


last century. 


Twenty pages. 


Mortal man. 


The 


2 nc 1 pn m. 


2 nc 2 1. 


2 nc 2 1 (16. Obs. 2). 


2 nc 


Immortal Being. 


A wilted leaf. 


A loving companion 


. An 



2 1. 2 nc 2 nc 1 Q 16. Obs. 2). 2 nc 2nc ' 

amusing story. A four-footed animal. The late-washed 

1. 2 nc 2 se 1 m pi. 2 ce 1 f. 

rose. The most skilful workmen. A less amiable woman, 

2 ce 1. 2 ce 1. 

A happier life. More benevolence. 

LESSON IV. 
Spell, define, and parse. 

2 ce 1 2 ce 1. 2 se 1. 

Worse conduct. Less inconvenience. The next year. The 

2 se 1. 2 se 1. 2 ce 1 m. 

last hour. The topmost sail. A superior officer. The 

2 se 1 pn m. 2 nc 1. 2 nc 2 nc 1. 

Supreme Being. A mahogany chair. An evening school. 

2 nc 2 1 pi. 2 nc 2 1 pi, 2 nc 

Those beautiful colors. These ripe strawberries. That 

2 2.2 1. 2 nc 2 nc 2 nc 

elegant, new, white house. Those two. new-fashioned, 

2 2 2nc lpl. 2nc 

variegated, beautiful, French handkerchiefs. The setting 

1 pn. 2 se 1. 2 1. 

sun. The most dangerous situation. A melancholy fact. 

2 nc 2 nc 1. 2 1 pi. 2 1 pi. 

An enclosed garden. Shady trees. Unwholesome dews. 

2nc . 1. 2 i. 

The babbling brook. A well-founded* hope. 

* Pos. TTe^-founded, Com. better-founded, Sup. JesJ-founded. 



1333 


ETYMOLOGY. 






LESSON V. 






ADJECTIVES, 


NOUNS, AND VERBS. 




Abbreviations. 




4... 


Verb. 


ppar . 


Perfect Participle. 


rg... 


Regular Verb. 


su .. . 


To agree with its subject. 


ir . . 


Irregular Verb. 


ci . . . . 


To agree with the collec- 


tv.. 


Transitive Verb. 




tive noun expressing 


it .. 


Intransitive Verb. 




individuals. 


av. . 


Active Voice. 


cw .. 


To agree with a collective 


pv.. 


Passive Voice. 




noun expressing many 


id.. 


Indicative Mode. 




as a whole. 


if.. 


Infinitive Mode. 


jno.. 


To agree with its joint 


ip.. 


Imperative Mode. 




nominatives. 


po... 


, Potential Mode. 


sno .. 


To agree with its separate 


sb.. 


Subjunctive Mode. 




nominatives. 


pt.. 


Present Tense. 


gv... 


Governed by the verb. 


ptp., 


, Present Perfect Tense. 


gn... 


Governed by the noun. 


ps.. 


Past Tense. 


uab . . 


Used absolutely. 


psp, 


, Past Perfect Tense. 


ga.. . . 


Governed by the adjective. 


fu.. 


Future Tense. 


gp,... 


Governed by the pronoun. 


fup., 


, Future Perfect Tense. 


rn . . . 


Relates to the noun. 


ing. 


Present Participle. 


rp... 


Relates to the pronoun. 


pspar . Past Participle. 








Model for 


Parsing . 


&. Verb. 


4. 


Form. Class. Voice. 


Principal 


Parts. Mode. Tense. 




rg tv av 


— 


— id pt 


(Person. Number.) Syntax, 


. Rule. 




3p 8 su 


VII. 





Examples. Spell, define, and parse. 

2 nc 2 lm4 2 1opl otv (learns). 

"An industrious boy learns long lessons." 

An is an Adjective, not compared, and relates to the noun boy. 

Industrious is an Adjective of the positive degree ; industrious, 
more industrious, &c. It qualifies boy. 

Boy, parsed by Model 1, except that it is masculine. 

Learns is a Regular Transitive Verb of the Active Voice, learn, 
learned, learned. Indicative Mode, Present Tense, Third Person, 



ETYMOLOGY. 133 

And Singular Number, to agree with its subject boy. [Parsed by 
Model 4.) 

1. Regular Verb, because its past tense and past participle are 
formed by adding ed to the present of the indicative. 

2. Transitive Verb in the Active Voice, because it expresses the 
act of its subject boy, on the object lessons. 

3. Indicative Mode, because it simply declares. 

4. Present Tense, because the act is performed in present time. 

5. Third Person and Singular Number, because its subject boy, 
with which it agrees, is Third Person and Singular Number. 

Long, parsed precisely as in Model 2. 

Lessons is a Common Noun, Neuter, Third Person, Objective, 
Plural, object of the Transitive Verb learn. 

1. A Common Noun, because it is the name of a class of things. 

2. Neuter Gender, it denotes neither male nor female. 

3. Third Person, because it denotes the things spoken of. 

4. Objective Case, because it is the object of the Transitive Verb 
learn. 

5. Plural Nnmber, because it implies more than one. 

2nc2 1f 4 2 lo otv. 1 pn m'gn 1 

The idle girl gains little knowledge. Charles's resignation 

4 ps 2 nc 2 nc 1 pn m and f o pi otv. 2 nc 1 m 4 ir 1 m 'pi gn 

astonished all the Europeans. The hatter makes men's 

2 nc 1 o pi otv. 2 nc 1 m 4 ps 2 nc 1 m or f 'gn 1 m o otv. 2 nc 

silk hats. The master whipped the servant's dog. Those 

2 2 1 m pi 4 ps pi 2 nc 1 m 'gn 2 lo otv. 2 nc 

few brave soldiers attacked the enemy's numerous army. The 

If 4ir ptp 2nc 1 f pi gn 1 o pi otv. 2 nc 1 m or f gn 

milliner has made the ladies' "bonnets. The student's 

1 4 ps 2 nc 1 m or f ' gn 1 o otv. 

diligence procured the teacher's approbation. 

LESSON VI. 
Spell, define, and parse. 

2 nc 1 4 ir it 2. 1 4 ir it fu 2. 2 nc 1 

The day is long. Winter will be cold. That book 

4 ir it 2. 2 nc 1 4 ir it psp. 2 nc 2 1 pi 

is interesting. The moon had risen. The bright stars 
12 . 



134 ETYMOLOGY. 

4 it p!. 2 1 pi 4 it ps pi. 2 nc 1 pn 4 ir it. 1 m pi 

twinkle. Many vessels sailed. The sun sets. Kings 

4 it pi. 2nc 1 m 4 it. lniandfpl 4 it pi. 2 nc 1 pi 4 it 

reign. The lion roars. Wolves howl. The roses are 

pi. 2 nc 1 pi 4 it ps pi. 2 nc 1 4 ir it pp. 

blooming. The clouds were moving. The snow was falling. 

1 4 it. 1 4 it. 1 pn m 4 ir it ps. 1 pi 4 it pi. 

Ice melts. Gold glitters. Pompey fled. Clouds move. 

1 m and f pi 4 ir it pi. 1 4 it 2 nc 2 nc 1 4 ir it 

Birds fly. Rain descends. The British nation is 

2 1 m pi 4 it pi. 

great. Men sin. 

LESSON VII. 
NOUNS, ADJECTIVES, PRONOUNS, AND VERBS. 

Abbreviations. 

3 Pronoun. in Interrogative Pronoun-. 

rl . . . Relative Pronoun. idf Indefinite Pronoun. 

Per... Personal Pronoun. dem Demonstrative Pronoun. 

lp. .. First Person. di Distributive Pronoun. 

2p. .. Second Person. prep .... Preposition. 

3p. .. Third Person. rfc Refers to the conjunc- 

adv... Adverb. tion. 

conj.. Conjunction. intj Interjection. 

sns . . Sentences. qv Qualifies the verb. 

phs... Phrases. qadj Qualifies the adjective. 

ajus.. Adjuncts. adv . Qualifies the adverb. 

conj. adv. Conjunctive adverb. 

Model for Parsing a Pronoun. 
3. Class. (Gender. Person. Number.) Syntax. Case. Syntax. 

per. (neu 3p s) To agree no sv. R. II. 

with its 
antecedent, 
R. VI. 

Note. — A pronoun must be of the same gender, number, and 
person as its antecedent, or the noun for which it stands. 

Example. 

Smorflp 4 lp 4 ir if gv 2 nc 1 m and f o pi otv 4 it ing rn. 

I love to hear the birds caroling. 



ETYMOLOGY. 135 

7 is a Personal Pronoun, of the masculine or feminine gender, 
first person and singular number, to agree with the name of the 
speaker, for which it stands, in the nominative case ; subject of 
the verb love. 

1. A Personal Pronoun, because it always stands for a noun of 
the same person. 

2. Masculine or Feminine Gender, first person, and singular 
number, because the noun for which it stands is. 

3. Nominative Case, because it is the subject of the verb love. 
Love is parsed by Model 4, except that it is in the first person. 
To hear is parsed by Model 4 ; but remember, that in parsing a 

verb in the infinitive, the number and person are to be omitted. 
The letters over it show in what it differs from Model 4. The let- 
ters gv stand for governed by the verb. 

The, parsed as before. 

Birds is a Common Noun ; may be masculine and feminine, or 
either ; third person, objective, plural ; object of the verb love. 

Caroling is a regular intransitive verb, carol, caroled, caroled; 
in the present participle, it relates to the noun birds. 

1. Regular Verb, because its past tense and past participle are 
formed by adding ed to the present tense of the indicative mode. 

2. Intransitive, because it has no object. 

3. A participle, because as a verb it expresses action, and as an 
adjective, it qualifies a noun, (birds.) 

4. Present participle, because it denotes continuance of the 
action in present time. 

Note. — Number and person are omitted in parsing a participle. 

3 m and f pi 4 ir it pi 1 m and f pi af 3 rl m and f o otv 3 m or f 1 p pi 

They are the persons whom we 

4 ir ps 1 p pi. . 

met. 

Note. — With regard to the gender of many of the pronouns, in 
examples like the preceding, it is impossible to determine, since 
we do not know in all cases whether the nouns for which they 
stand are of the masculine or feminine gender, or include both 
males and females. 

On this subject consult \ 16, OJ?s. 2, and npte ; and also g< 23, 
Declension of Personal Pronouns. 



136 ETYMOLOGY. 

1 pn f 4 ir ptp 3 f ' gn 2 no 1 o otv, 3 f 4 ir fa 3 m or f lp 'gn 

Julia has read her own book. She will read mine 

3f 4irpsp 3 m or f 2p pi 'gn. 3morflppl 

(book). She had read yours (book). "We I 

4iritlppl 2 4 if ga* 3 m or f pi o otv 3rlmorfpl 4 pi 3 m or f lp pi o otv. 

are apt to love them who love us. 

3 m 4 ir fu 3 rl o otv (to bring) 3 m 4 ps 4 ir if gv. 

He will bring (the thing) what he promised to bring. 

3 rl m cr f (agrees with person understood) 4 ir it 2 nc 1 m or f af prep 2 no 

Whoever is a friend to the 

1 o op 4 ir it 2 nc 1 m or f af prep 1 pn m o op. 3 m 3 rl m 4 

world, isf an enemy of G-od. . He who preserves 

3 m or f lp o otv prep 3 rl m o op 3m or f lp 4 lp 3 m or f lp 'gn 1 o otv 

me, to whom I owe my being, 

3 rl m 'gn 3 m or f lp 4 ir it lp conj sns 3 rl m o otv (serve) 

whose (creature) I am, and whom 

3morflp 41p 4 ir it (he) 2 nc. 3morflppl 4 lp pi 

I serve, is eternal. We love 

3 m and f ( or either) lp pi o otv prep 2 nc 3 m and f lp pi 'gn 1 o pi o p. 3 m 

ourselves with all our faults. He 

3 rl m ad (qv) 4 2 nc 1 o otv 4 (su He) conj rfc 3 m o otv. 

that improperly reveals a secret, injures both himself 

conj (words) 3 m and f pi o otv prep 3rlmorfploop 3m 4 3o otv 

and them to whom he reveals it. 

3 idf m 4 3 m 'gn 1 o otv adv qadv adv qv, 3 m or f lp 4 ir it lp 

None performs his duty too well. I am 

advqadj 2 3morf2p 4 po ps 2p 3 m or f 2p 'gn 

very unhappy. Thou shouldst love thy 

1 m or f o otv conj adv sns 3 m or f 2p 4 2p 3 m or f 2 p o otv. 3 m 

neighbor as thou ' lovest thyself. He 

4 ir pv ps adv qv prep 3 m 'gn 1 o op prep 2 1 m and f (or either) o pi op 

was led astray in his youth by vicious companions ; 

3 m 'gn 1 4 pv ptp conj sns 3 m adv qv 

his health has been destroyed, and he will shortly be 

4 pv fu adv qadv adv qv 4 ir it ip 2p pi su prep 3 m or f lp o op 

remembered no more. Speak (you) to me 

* The letters ga stand for governed by the adjective, 
f It agrees with person understood. 



ETYMOLOGY. 137 

adv qv codj sns 3 m or f 2 p pi 4 sb 2p pi 3 m or f lp o otv. 3 in 4 it fng rp 

kindly, if you love me. He stooping 

adv qiug conj (words) 4 it frig rp advqing 4irps 2nc 2nc 1 o pi otv 4iritingrn 

down, and looking in, saw the linen clothes lying ; 

conj sns 4 ir it ps 3 m adv qv adv qv. 3 rl m or f (agrees with person understood) 

yet went he not in. Whoever 

4 it prep 2 nc 1 m or f o op prep 1 o pi op adv qv 

looks for a friend without imperfections, will never 

4 ir fu 3 rl o otv (seelcs) 3 m 4 ir. 

find (the thing') what he seeks. 

LESSON IX. 

Exercises on the Verb. 

The student will mention the Form, Class, Voice, Principal 
Parts, Mode, Tense, Person, and Number of each of the following 
Verbs. 

Model for the Participle. 
Form. Class. Voice. Principal Parts. Participle. Syntax. Rule. 

rg. tv. av. ing. rn. XL 

Model for the Infinitive Mode. 

Form. Class. Voice. Principal Parts. Mode. Tense. Syntax. Rule. 
rg. tv. av. - — if. pt. gv. X. 

Thou art. We are. He is. They have been. Thou wast. Ye 
had been. You will be. Thou wilt have been. I must write. The 
letter may be written. Thou mightst write. We could write. Let- 
ters should be written. Thou couldst have written. The exercises 
should have been written. Speak ye, who best can tell. Ask (ye), 
and ye shall receive. They will go, unless it rain. He will be par- 
doned if he repent. We ought to love our benefactors. You ought 
to have written. Being conquered, they were compelled to sur- 
render. I heard the chief encouraging his men. The servant being 
sick, the master himself performed the work. Having finished his 
letter, he mailed it. He was reciting his lesson. They have been 
reading Homer's works. The rain had been falling a long time. 

12* 



138 ETYMOLOGY. 

1 54. EXERCISES IN WRITING. 

Exercise I. 

Nouns. See 1 13. 

1. Copy the following exercises, and insert a Common Noun in 
each blank space. 

Model. 

A good . The industrious — — . An obedient . 

A good man. The industrious bees. An obedient son. 

A strong . Shady . The whistling . Harmless . 

A ripe . Sour . The cool . Useless . A fra- 
grant . Yerdant . The diligent . Peaceful . 

2. Insert a Proper Noun in each of the following blanks. 

His name is . The city of . He read the of . 

They travelled over . The river. They called her . 

discovered . The is between and . 

3. Insert a Collective Noun in each of the following blanks. 
The rejoice. The was great. The has adjourned. 

The eagerly pursue pleasure. The were divided. 

4. Insert an Abstract Noun in each of the following blanks. 
and like remove mountains. promotes . 

will make us happy. The of snow. The of kings. 

5. Insert a Verbal Noun in each of the following blanks. 

The of the wicked soon ceases. Clerks should learn the 

art of well. By good books we gain knowledge. The 

full moon is beautiful at the time of her . Those who are in 

the habit of late, seldom behold the of the sun, or hear 

the of the lark. By temperately, and moderately, 

we promote health much better than by medicines. 

Note. — The student should write the exercise in a plain, neat 
hand, and take care to punctuate correctly, and to make capital 
litters when necessary. 

Exercise II. 

1. Insert a Subject or Nominative before each of the following 
verbs. 



ETYMOLOGY. 139 



Model. 



had risen. was shining. 

The moon had risen. The sun was shining. 

will arrive. may happen. should learn. must 

have departed. would have flown. 

2. Insert a Predicate or Nominative after each of the following 
verbs. 

The man is a . His father was a . He is called . 

The boy became a . The girl is named . The rum- 
drinker will die a . 

3. Insert a Nominative Absolute before each of the following 
participles. 

The having been decided, they became friends. The 

having died, his son became king. The rising, darkness dis- 
appears. His being impaired, he removed to a warmer 

climate. The being favorable, we proceeded. 

4. In each of the following blanks insert a Nominative Absolute 
by direct address. 

Come, gentle . , depart. , forgive them. ! 

where is thy sting ? ! where is thy victory ? , study 

your lessons. , put on your bonnets. , bring me some 

water. Go hence, . Why art thou distressed, . 

5. In each of the following blanks insert a Nominative Absolute 
by pleonasm. 

My they are furnished with bees. , where was he? 

that hath ears, let him hear. The — — , do they live forever ? 

Your , where are they ? Our , is he still living? 

6. Insert a Nominative Absolute, by exclamation, in each of the 
following blanks. 

! the of sinners. ! the to which vice reduces us. 

! of hope. What ! ! , , my * 



my ! 



Exercise III. 



1. Insert a noun in the possessive case, in each of the following 
blanks. 



140 ETYMOLOGY. 

Model. 

book. horse. A son. shoes. 

John's book. Alexander's horse. A preacher's son. Children's 
shoes. 

The hat. Those bonnets. A ■ care. A 

advice. These husbands. Those — — wives. dens. 

laws. coats. That daughter. 

2. Insert a subject or nominative case before, and an object, or 
objective case after each of the following transitive verbs. (Use 
either a noun or pronoun for a subject.) 

fed . loves . shouldst avoid . 

hast made — — . hadst heard . will per- 
form . make . can weave . should 

help . killed . should have cultivated . 

3. Insert an object, or noun in the objective case, after each of 
the following prepositions. (Use a noun or pronoun.) 

Note. — A, an, the, this, or that, &c, may be used before the 
objects. 

We should be silent in during of . The 

person with I travelled, has sold the horse on he rode 

during . The stream runs down under 

through by. into . 

Exercise IV. 

See a 20. 5 and 6. 



1. Use a qualifying or limiting adjective in each of the following 
blanks. (Do not use the same adjective twice.) 

Model. 
ocean. mountain. river. 



The wide ocean. A lofty mountain. That deep river. 

island. lake. city. gulf- 

■ country. kingdom. crowd. 

■ justice. ambition. strength. color. 

horse. bird. rose. pink. 

elephant. squirrel. forest. 



ETYMOLOGY. 141 

2. In each of the following "blanks use an adjective in the com- 
parative degree, (er or more.) 

A education. A error. A act. coffee. 

strawberries. A — — door. bread. thunder. 

A flower. 

3. Insert an adjective in the superlative degree, in each of the 
following blanks {est or most). 

The room. The floor. The windows. The 

wall. The bell. The pavement. The sinner. 

The Christian. 

Exercise V. 
Pronouns. See § 23. 

1. Insert a Personal Pronoun in each of the following blanks. 
(Name which are subjects, and which objects.) 

lovest . has performed duty. wilt 

overcome . will advise . must obey . 

love parents, and will assist . destroyed 

the old birds, and stole the young . should not make a 

jest of infirmities. Love neighbor as . know 

name, but do not know business. love 

and love . all love . 

2. (§ 24.) Insert a relative pronoun in each of the following blanks. 
(Point out the subjects and the objects.) 

We believed he said. He sins, deserves to be punished. 

The bird sung so sweetly, has flown. This is the man 

we love. That is the book I lost. purifies, also fortifies 

the heart. 

3. (§ 25.) Insert an interrogative or an indefinite pronoun, where 
it is required. 

art thou? shall we elect? should we fear? 

is here so base ? I know not did it. We know not from 

we should flee, nor to we should look for protection. 

Exercise VI. 

» 

Verbs. 
1. Insert a transitive verb in each of the following blanks: 



142 ETYMOLOGY. 

The earth fruit. The sun r the earth. The gardener 

■ flowers. Thou grammar. He arithmetic. The 

fox geese. The farmer the land. The lambs by 

the wolves. The field to-day by the boy. The wheat 

to-morrow. The cotton by the 15th of April. The patient 

by a skilful physician, if he in time. 

2. Insert an intransitive verb in each of the following blanks : 

An apple from the tree. Pinks in the garden. The 

water rapidly. All men . The horse over the fence. 

The orator to the audience. The boat on next Thursday. 

The news to-day. The moon to-night. 

3. Write through all the modes, tenses, numbers, and persons, 
of the active voice, the verb move. 

4. Write the passive voice of move. 

5. Write the progressive form of the verb move. 

Exercise VII. See § 29. 

1. Write a unipersonal verb in each of the following blanks: 
It . It . It . It . It . It . 

2. Fill up each of the following blanks with a compound verb : 
We all the words. the blanks. The bill 

by him. He his sins. His sins by 

him. He — his account daily.. 

Exercise VIII. See \ 41. 
Place an adverb in each of the following blanks : 

They are doing the work. The mail will arrive . He 

was engaged. I would not live . They will go to 

the city. He rides, and walks. the carcass is, 

will the eagles be gathered . You write . I 

am fatigued. The bird is dead. The preacher 

spoke . We know he lives. 

Exercise IX. 
Prepositions. See § 45. 2. 
Supply an adjunct in each of the following blanks : 

A man . A tree . Agreeable . He acted . 

They live . He travelled . Men work . The ship 



SYNTAX. 143 

sailed . We should prepare , and hope . A house 

. We should love our friends . 

. Exercise X. 
Conjunctions. See $ 46. 
Insert a conjunction in each of the following blanks : 

John William are partners. I will go you will 

accompany me. He studies — '■ — he may become learned. AVe 

should not despair we have failed once ; we should try 

again. He will go himself, send a servant. She 

reads writes. he is poor, he is respected. Make 

good use of time ; life is short. The boy studies Latin 

Greek. Arithmetic is of more use Algebra. 

Exercise XI. 
Interjections. See $ 52. 
Insert an interjection in each of the following blanks : 

! why all abandoned to darkness and wo? — — ! liberty, 

! sound, once delightful to every Roman ear. ! be still. 

! Columbia, happy land. ! to our shores, thou advocate 

of liberty. ! they whisper. ! shall we be slaves ? 



PART III; 

SYNTAX. 

§ 55. Syntax treats of the relation, agreement, govern- 
ment, and arrangement of words in sentences. (G-oold 
Brown s English Gframmar.) From syn, together, and 
taxis, arranging. 

1. A Sentence is a collection of words making complete 
sense. (Sententia, an opinion, a thought, written or 
spoken.) 



144 SYNTAX. 

2. A Phrase is a short expression which is not a com- 
plete sentence. 

3. The principal parts of a sentence are the Subject 
or Nominative, the Verb, and the Object (when the verb 
is transitive). 

Examples. 

1. " Fire burns." A sentence, because the words make complete 
sense. 

"All must die. The corn grows." 

2. " To be candid." K phrase, because it is a short expression, 
which is not a complete sentence. 

" Speaking in general. Accustomed to labor. In a proper 
manner." 

3. "Pupils learn lessons." A sentence, because the words make 
complete sense. Pupils is the subject, or thing chiefly spoken of; 
learn is the verb, which expresses the act of its subject pupils; 
lessons is the object of the transitive verb learn. 

§ 56. SENTENCES. 

The Subject of a Sentence is that of which something 
is affirmed. 

The Predicate is that which affirms something of the 
Subject. 

Sentences are either Simple or Compound. 

1. A Simple sentence has but one subject, and but one 
verb which agrees with it. 

2. A Compound sentence consists of two or more sim- 
ple sentences, which may be connected by 

1. Conjunctions. 

2. Conjunctive Adverbs. 

3. Relative Pronouns. 

Examples of Simple Sentences. Analyze. 
"Water flows." A Simple sentence, because it has but one 
subject (water), and one verb which agrees with it (flows). 



SYNTAX. 145 

" Masters command. Servants obey. Teachers instruct. Stu- 
dents learn. The moon will rise. The sun has set." 

Examples of Compound Sentences connected — 
1. By Conjunctions. 
"Masters command, and servants obey." A Compound sen- 
tence, because it consists of two Simple sentences, " masters com- 
mand," and "servants obey," connected by the conjunction and. 

" Teachers instruct, and students learn. Vice degrades, but 
virtue exalts. I will go, if you will stay. I know that he studies. 
The man was respected, though he was poor." 

2. By Conjunctive Adverbs. 
"We will hear the news, when the messenger shall have arrived. 
Go (you) where you wish. I will see Joseph before I die. He slept 
until the clock struck nine." 

3. By Kelative Pronouns. 

" He steals trash, who steals my purse." A Compound sentence, 
because it consists of two Simple sentences, " he steals trash," and 
" who steals my purse," connected by the relative pronoun who. 

" Modesty is a quality that highly adorns a woman. This is the 
tree which produces no fruit. We should believe (the thing) what 
is written in the Bible." 

I 57. ELLIPSIS. 

Ellipsis is the omission of one word or more in a 
sentence. 

In analyzing and parsing, it is often necessary to supply the omitted 
word or words. 

1. Ellipsis of the Noun. 

" Christ, the power and the wisdom of God." Supply of God 
after power, and Christ after and. 

"A great, wise, and good man." Supply man after great, and 
after wise. 

" The pupil both respects and fears his teacher." Supply his 
teacher after respects, and the pupil after and. 
13 



146 SYNTAX. 

"We punish the poor man's faults, but we pardon the rich 
man's." Supply faults. 

2. Ellipsis of the Adjective. 
"A man, woman, and child." Supply a before woman, and 
before child. " The day and hour." Supply the before hour. 
"The sun and moon." Supply the before moon. "A house and 
orchard." Supply an before orchard. "A delightful garden and 
orchard." Supply a delightful before orchard. "A little man and 
woman." Supply a little before woman. 

3. Ellipsis of the Pronoun. 

" I love and fear him." Supply him after love, and I before 
fear. " My house and lands." Supply my before lands. " His 
friends and foes." Supply his before foes. " This is the man they 
love." Supply whom after man. " These are the goods they 
bought." Supply which after goods. " The horse I rode." Supply 
on ivhich after horse. " "We speak that we do know*, and testify 
that we have seen." Supply ivhich after that in both instances, 
and we before testify. 

4. Ellipsis of the Verb, &c. 

" The man was old and crafty." Supply the man icas after and. 
" She was young, beautiful, and good." Supply and she was after 
young, and she was before good. " Thou art poor, and wretched, 
and miserable, and blind, and naked." Supply thou art after and 
in each instance. " I went to see and hear him." Supply I went 
after and. " He regards his word, but thou dost not." Supply 
regard thy word after not. " We succeeded, but they did not." 
Supply succeed after not. " I have learned my task, but thou hast 
not." Supply learned thy task after not. " They must, and they 
shall be punished." Supply be punished after must. "Thou art 
wiser than I." Supply am after I. " They loved him more than 
me." Supply they loved after than. 

5. Ellipsis of the Adverb. 

"He spoke and acted wisely." Supply ivisely after spoke. 
" Thrice I went and offered my services." Supply thrice I after 
and. " We commend and censure imprudently." Supply impru- 
dently after commend, and ice before censure. 



SYNTAX. 147 

6. Ellipsis of the Preposition, &c. 

"He went into the abbeys, halls, and public buildings." Supply 
and he went into the after abbeys, and he ivent into the before public. 
" He spoke to every man and woman there." Supply there after 
man, and he spoke to every before woman. "This day, next month, 
last year." Supply on before this, in the before next, and in the 
before last. " He will do that which seemeth him good." Supply 
to before him. " The girl is like her sister." Supply to after like. 
"It was near the river." Supply to after near. "The merchant 
gave me a hat." Supply to before me. " He has gone home." 
Supply to his before home. " lie was banished Rome." Supply 
from after banished. 

7. Ellipsis of the Conjunction, &c. 

" They confess the power, wisdom, goodness, and love of their 
Creator." Supply and they confess the, before loisdom and before 
goodness, and insert they confess the before love. " Though I love 
him, I do not natter him." Supply yet after love him. "We heard 
he was dead." Supply that after heard, 

8. Ellipsis of the Interjection. 

"Oh! pity and shame." Supply oh! before shame. 

9. Instances of Ellipsis. 

"Wo is me." Supply to before me. "To let blood." Supply 
out after let. " To let down." Supply it fall after let. " To walk 
a mile." Supply through the space of after walk. " To sleep all 
night." Supply through after sleep, and the after all. " To go 
a-fishing." Supply on after go, and voyage after fishing. " To go 
a-hunting." Supply on after go, and party after hunting. "I dine 
at two o'clock." Supply of the. " By sea, by land, on shore." 
Supply the before each noun. 

§ 58. SUBJECT OR NOMINATIVE. 

The Subject or Nominative may be used alone, that is, 
not modified by any word. 



148 SYNTAX. 

Exercises. 
Model. (The Subjects are printed in small capitals.) 
" Snow falls." Snow is the unmodified Subject ; falls the un- 
modified Predicate. 

"Vice brings misery. Cleanliness promotes health. Man is 
mortal. We will repose here. Thunders roll. Clouds move. 
Armies march. Birds fly." 

The Subject or Nominative may be modified, that is, 
limited or explained, by 

1. A noun or pronoun in the same case, used to explain 
it, or for emphasis. 

2. A noun or pronoun in the possessive cage. 

3. An adjunct. 

4. An adjective. 

5. An adverb, used as an adjective. 

6. A verb in the infinitive mode. 

7. A participle. 

8. A clause of a sentence. 

Note 1. The Subject may be a noun, or a word or words used as 
such. 
Note 2. The Object may be modified, as the subject is. 

Exercises. Model. 

" The patriotic Cicero, the great orator, was beheaded." 

A simple sentence, because it has but one subject, Cicero, and 
one verb, was beheaded. 

Cicero is the subject, modified by the adjectives the and patriotic, 
and also by the noun orator, in the same case, used to explain it. 

Note. The examples are marked to correspond with the pre- 
ceding numbers. 

1. " Webster, the statesman, was a great orator. The man him- 
self transacted the business." 

2. " The boy's hat is new, but his coat is old." A compound 
sentence, consisting of two clauses connected by the conjunction 
but. Analyze each. 



SYNTAX. 149 

3. " The youth of vicious habits, is a dangerous companion." 

4. "A beautiful, modest, and intelligent lady, will have many 
admirers." 

5. " The Lord only knows the secrets of the human heart." 

6. " A desire to excel in good works, is laudable." 

7. "A- man engaged in promoting the happiness of mankind, is 
a philanthropist." 

.8. "We, ioIio enjoy the blessings of liberty, should ever cherish 
the memory of our forefathers." 

I 59. THE VERB. 

The Verb, as the subject, is sometimes used without 
modifiers. The subject is printed in small capitals. 

Model. 

" Water freezes." Water is the subject. Freezes is the unmo- 
dified verb. * 

" The horse neighs. Foxes bark. Boys play. Girls learn." 

A Verb may be modified by 

1. A noun, pronoun, or sentence, as its object, if the 
verb is transitive. 

2. A noun or pronoun in the same case as the subject. 

3. An adjective after it, relating to the subject. 

4. An adjunct. 

5. A verb in the infinitive mode. 

6. An adverb. 

Exercises. Model. 

" /love' my teacher,™ and I will obey v him otY ." 

A compound sentence, containing two clauses, "I love my 
teacher," and "/will obey him," connected by the conjunction 
and. 

First clause analyzed. 

I is the subject, unmodified. 
Love is the verb, modified by the object teacher. 
13* 



150 SYNTAX. 

Teacher is the object, modified by the pronoun my in the posses- 
sive case. 

Second clause analyzed. 

I is the subject, unmodified. 

Will obey is the verb, modified by the object him. 

Him the object of will obey, is not modified. 

The following examples are marked to correspond with the pre- 
ceding numbers. 

1. " 7 love v the Lord, * and /will praise v him. * The poor man 
said,' ' I am blind.'" 011 ' The sentence lam blind, is the object of 
the verb said. «- 

2. "God is v love. Cesar was v emperor. Vice is v a monster. 
Gold is v a metal." 

3. "The good man will be" happy. The student will become" 
wise. The apple is v green." 

4. "He acts" with caution. They travelled" through Europe. 
The school will be dismissed" at jive (hours) of the clock, in the 
evening." At Jive hours, and in the evening, are both adjuncts of 
the verb will be dismissed; of the clock is the adjunct of hours. 

5. " We love " to read. * Kings ought" to be good. We should 
strive v to improve." 

6. " The lady sings" sweetly, composes" well, dresses" neatly, 
conducts" herself °* properly, and lives y piously." 

Note. — The participle is included under the verb. 

| 60. THE ADJECTIVE. 

An Adjective may be modified by 

1. An adverb. 

2. A verb in the infinitive mode. 

3. An adjunct. 

4. Another adjective. 

Exercises. 

Tell how the adjectives are modified. 

1. "A very small adj boy. A truly pious adj mother. A much 
better ndj way. He sold" the most valuable adj part otv of his very 
large ^ tract op of land op ." 



SYNTAX. 151 

2. "He is v anxious adj to become a scholar, and he is' willing adj 
to undergo the mental labor otv required." 

3. "That man is v desirous adj of glory. He is v diligent adj in 
study. He is v . skilful **' in his business." 

4. "Pale red adJ ink. Dark green adj color. Deep blue adj cloth." 

§ 61. THE ADVEBB. 
An Adverb may be modified by 

1. Another Adverb. 

2. An Adjunct. 

Exercises. 
Tell how the adverbs are modified. 

1. " Very soon. adv Quite fast. adv Very much amiss. adv " Very 
modifies much, and much modifies amiss. 

2. " Suitably adv to their station. Agreeably adv to my promise." 

I 62. SIMPLE AND COMPOUND SUBJECTS. 
The Subject may be either Simple or Compound. 

1. A simple subject consists of one noun, pronoun, 
verb, phrase, or sentence, used as the nominative case. 

2. A compound subject consists of two or more simple 
subjects. (A compound predicate consists of two or more 
simple ones.) 

Exercises. 

1. Simple Subjects. Why simple? 
Noun. The tree grows. 7 The fox runs.' 
Pronoun. He is v a student. They march.' 
Verb. To lie is v base. To study is' pleasant. 

Phrase. Telling lies is ' wicked. Seeing boys play is v amus- 
ing. 
Sentence. That the wicked fear death is' not surprising. 

2. Compound Subjects. Why compound? 
Nouns. The tree and the vine grow.' 



152 SYNTAX. 

Pronouns. He and she are v students. 
Verbs. To lie and to steal are v base. 

Phrases. Telling lies and using profane language will dis- 
grace v aboy. otv 
Sentences. That the wicked should flee when no man pursu- 

ETH, and THAT THE RIGHTEOUS ARE AS BOLD A3 A 

lion, are v not unaccountable. 

The following sentences having compound subjects, may be sepa- 
rated into clauses, each having a simple subject. 
The moon and the stars shone. 
The rivers and the creeks were full. 

Separated. « 

The moon shone/ The stars shone/ 

The rivers were v full. The creeks were v full. ^ 

But the following sentences having compound subjects, cannot 
be separated into clauses. 

John and William live v together. 

The father, mother, one son, and two daughters, compose v the 
family . otv 

I 63, METHOD OF ANALYZING A SIMPLE SENTENCE. 

1. Point out the subject, and the words modifying it. 

2. Point out the verb or predicate, and the words modi- 
fying it. 

3. Point out the object of the verb (if transitive), and 
the words which modify the object. 

4. Point out such other words as are modified, and the 
modifying words. 

If the sentence is compound, ■ 

1. Separate it into the simple clauses of which it is 
composed. 

2. Name the word or words which connect them. 

3. Analyze each simple sentence, as before directed. 



SYNTAX. 



153 



\ 64. TABLE FOR PARSING. 

1. Model for Parsing a Noun. 

Class. Gender. Person. Case. Number. Syntax. Rule. 

en neu 3p no s sv II. 

Explained. 
A Common Noun, Neuter Gender, Third Person, Nominative 
Case, Singular Number, Subject of the Verb , Rule II. 

Abbreviations. 



1.... 


Noun. 


op... 


Object of the Preposition 


en.. . 


Common Noun. 




, Rule XIII. 


pn... 


, Proper Noun. 


gn... 


Governed by the Noun 


neu . 


. Neuter Gender. 




, Rule IV. 


m . . 


, Masculine Gender. 


ap... 


In apposition with, Rule I. 


f... 


, Feminine Gender. 


abp.. 


. Absolute with the Parti- 


no.., 


, Nominative Case. 




ciple , Rule III. 


7 


. Possessive Case. 




(1.) 


.. 


. Objective Case. 


af... 


After the Verb , Rule 


lp.., 


, First Person. 




VIII. 


2p.. 


. Second Person. 


osv... 


. Objective Case, and Sub- 


3p... 


. Third Person. 




ject of the Verb , 


ovn. 


. Object of the Verbal 




Rule II., 1. 




Noun , Rule IX., 1. 


abd.. 


. Absolute by direct ad- 


i. . . 


. Singular Number. 




dress, Rule III. (2.) 


<>1.. 


. Plural Number. 


abpl , 


Absolute by pleonasm, 


tV .. 


, Subject of the Verb , 




Rule III. (3.) 




Rule II. 


abe. 


. Absolute by exclamation, 


*tv . 


. Object of the Transitive 
Verb, Rule IX. 




Rule III. (4.) 



2. Model for Parsing an Adjective. 
Part of Speech. Degree.' Compared. Syntax. Rule. 

adj pe rn V. 

Explained. 

An Adjective, of the Positive Degree, Compared , relates 

to the Noun -, Rule V. 

Abbreviations. 
2. . . . An Adjective. ce .. . Comparative Degree. 

pe . . . Positive Degree. se . . . Superlative Degree. 



154 SYNTAX. 

ne... Not compared. rs . . . Relates to the Sentence 

rn. . . Relates to the Noun , , Rule V. 1. 

Rule V. uab .. Used abstractly, Rule 

rp... Relates to the Pronoun V. 2. 

, Rule V. 1. radj.. Relates to the Adjective 

rv . . . Relates to the Verb , , Rule V. 1. 

Rule V. 1. rnv . . Relates to the Noun , 

rpb... Relates to the Phrase and Verb , Rule 

, Rule V. 1. V. 1. 

3. Model for Parsing a Personal or a Relative Pronoun. 
Class. (Gender, Person, and Number.) Syntax. Rule. Case. 

Per. (neu 3p s) To agree VI. no 

with its 
Noun . 

Syntax. Rule. 
ev . II. 

Explained. 

A Personal Pronoun (Neuter Gender, Third Person, 'and Singu 

lar Number), to agree with its noun , Rule VI., Nominative 

Case, Subject of the Verb , Rule II. 

(a.) In like manner parse the Demonstrative and the Distribu- 
tive Pronouns. 

3. Model for Parsing a*n Indefinite or an Interrogative 

Pronoun. 
Class. Gender. Person. Case. Number. Syntax. Rule. 

idf neu 3p no s sv LT. 

Abbreviations. 

3 Pronoun. . in.... Interrogative Pronoun. 

rl.... Relative Pronoun. dem.. Demonstrative Pronoun, 

per. . . Personal Pronoun. di. . . . Distributive Pronoun, 

idf Indefinite Pronoun. 

4. Model for Parsing a Verb, 
(Form. Class. Voice.) Principal Parts. Mode. Tense. 

rg tv av — — — id pt 

(Person. Number.) Syntax. Rule. 
3p s su — vn. 

Explained. 

A Regular Transitive Verb of the Active Voice, Present , 



SYNTAX. 



155 



Past , Past Participle , Indicative Mode, Present Tense, 

Third Person, and Singular Number, to agree with its subject , 

Kule VII. 

Model for the Infinitive Mode. 

Tense. 



(Form. 

rg. 

Syntax, 
gv — . 

(Form. 

rg. 

Rule. 

XI. 



Class. Voice.) Principal Parts. 



tT. 

Rule, 
x. 

Class. 

tv.. 



Mode. 
if. 



pt. 



Model for the Participle. 

Voice.) Principal Parts. Participle. Syntax. 



Abbreviations. 



av. 
pv 
id. 
if. 
ip. 
po, 



4.... Verb. 

rg — Regular Verb. 

ir Irregular Verb. 

tv Transitive Verb. cw , 

itv . . Intransitive Verb. 
aux... Auxiliary Verb. 

Active Voice. 

Passive Voice. jno, 

Indicative Mode. 

Infinitive Mode. 

Imperative Mode. sno 

Potential Mode, 
sb . . . Subjunctive Mode, 
pt. . . Present Tense, 
ptp . . Present Perfect Tense, 
ps.. . Past Tense, 
psp. . Past Perfect Tense. 
fu . . . Future Tense, 
fup ... Future Perfect Tense, 
ing.... Present Participle. rp... 

pspar Past Participle. 
ppar . Perfect Participle. gadj .. 

su ... To agree with its subject 

, Rule VII. gp . . . 

ci .... To agree with the collec- 



gv 



gn. 



tive noun , expres- 
sing individuals, Rule 
VII. 

To agree with the collec- 
tive noun , expres- 
sing many as one whole, 
Rule VII. 

To agree with its joint 

nominatives , Rule 

VII. 

To agree with its separate 

nominatives , Rule 

VII. 

Governed by the Verb 
, Rule X. 

Relates to the Noun , 

* Rule XI. 

Governed by the Noun 
, Rule X. 

Relates to the Pronoun 
, Rule XI. 

Governed by the Adjec- 
tive , Rule X. 

Governed by the Pronoun 
, Rule X. 



156 SYNTAX. 

gprep Governed by the Preposi- gconj Governed by the conjunc- 
tion, Rule X. tion , Rule X. 

gadv. Governed by the Adverb ab... Used absolutely, Rule 
, Rule X. X., 1. 

5. Model for Parsing an Adverb or Adverbial Phrase. 
Part of Speech. Degree. Compared. Syntax. Rule. 

adv pe qv XII. 

Explained. 
An Adverb of the Positive Degree, Compared , it quali- 
fies the verb , Rule XII. 

Abbreviations. 

5 . . . . Adverb, or Adverbial qprep Qualifies the Preposition 

Phrase. , Rule XII. 

qv... Qualifies the Verb , qp... Qualifies the Pronoun 

Rule XII. , Rule XII. 

qadj . Qualifies the Adjective uind . Used independently, Rule 

, Rule Xlf. XII. 9. 

qn . . . Qualifies the Noun , qph . . Qualifies the phrase , 

Rule XII. Rule XII. 

qadv. Qualifies the Adverb , 

Rule XII. 

6. Model for Parsing a Preposition. 
Part of Speech. Shows the relation between. 

prep. sr v and n 

Explained. 

A Preposition, showing the relation between the Verb , and 

the Noun . 

m Abbreviations. 

6 Preposition. 

sr .... Shows the relation between. 

7. Model for Parsing a Conjunction, or Conjunctive Adverb. 

Part of Speech. It connects. Rule. 

conj The words XIV. 



SYNTAX. 157 



Abbreviations, 



7 Conjunction. ajus... Connects tho adjuncts 

sns. . .'. Connects the sentences , Rule XIV. 

, Rule XIV. rfc . . . . Refers to the conjunc- 

phs. . . . Connects the phrases tion , Rule XIV. 5. 

, Rule XIV. intro . . Introduces the sentence 

conjadv Conjunctive adverb. , Rule XIV. 2. 

8. Interjection. 
8 Interjection denoting 

I 65. RULES AND OBSERVATIONS. 

Apposition, or same Cases without a connecting Word. 

RULE I. 

A Noun or Pronoun used to explain another noun or 

pronoun, is put, by apposition, in the same case with the 

noun or pronoun explained. (Ap for ad, to, and positio, 

a placing.) 

Observations. 

1. A noun or pronoun is sometimes added to another noun or 
pronoun, for emphasis. 

2. A noun is sometimes in apposition with a sentence. 

3. A phrase or sentence is sometimes in apposition with a noun 
or pronoun. 

4. The explaining noun or pronoun is generally placed after the 
word explained, hut sometimes before it. 

5. A distributive term in the singular, is sometimes in apposition 
with a plural noun or pronoun. 

6. The several proper names of a person, should be parsed as 
one noun. 

7. In some instances, words in apposition are connected by the 
conjunction as. 

8. When nouns in the possessive case are in apposition, the sign 
of the case is sometimes omitted in the explaining noun, and some- 
times in the noun explained. 

14 



158 SYNTAX. 

Examples fo illustrate the Rule. 

Note. It is recommended that the pupil analyze every complete 
sentence, and parse those words only which are intended for expla- 
nations of the Rules and Observations, and are printed in Italic 
letters. 

no. . . . Points out the subject. 

v Verb. 

otv . . . Object of the transitive verb. 

op. . . . Object of the preposition. 

"Napoleon Bonaparte, 110 emperor of the French people, op a nation 
of Europe, 00 was born v at Ajaccio, op a town on the island op of Cor- 
sica, 00 educated v at the military school 00 of Brienne, 00 and entered v 
the artillery service 0tv as a second lieutenant. 

Analyzed. 
A compound sentence, consisting of three clauses : 

1. " Napoleon Bonaparte, emperor of the French people, a nation 
of Europe, was born at Ajaccio, a town on the island of Corsica." 

2. [And) "Napoleon Bonaparte was educated at the military 
school of Brienne," connected by and to the first clause. 

3. ( And) " Napoleon Bonaparte entered the artillery service as a 
second lieutenant." Connected by and to the second clause. 

First clause. — Napoleon Bonaparte is the subject, modified by 
the noun emperor, which is used to explain it. 

Was horn is the transitive verb in the passive voice, having the 
subject, Napoleon Bonaparte, for the object. It is modified by the 
adjunct at Ajaccio. Emperor is modified by the adjunct of the 
French people. People is modified by the adjectives the and French, 
and is the object of the preposition of. It is modified also by the 
noun nation, which serves to explain it. Nation is modified by the 
adjective a, and the adjunct of Europe. 

Europe is the object of the preposition of, unmodified. 

Ajaccio is modified by the word town, which serves to explain it. 
It is the object of the preposition at. Town is modified by the 
adjective a, and the adjunct on the island. 

Island is modified by the adjective the, and the adjunct of 
Corsica, and is the object of the preposition on. 

Corsica is the object of the preposition of, unmodified. 



SYNTAX. 159 

Second clause.— Napoleon Bonaparte, 1 ' unmodified. 

Was educated lvpv having the subject for the object, modified by 
the adjunct at the military school. 

School is modified by the adjectives the and military, and by tho 
adjunct qf.Brienne. It is the object of the preposition at. 

Brienne is the object of the preposition of, unmodified. 

Third clause. — Napoleon Bonaparte,™ modified by lieutenant, 
(See Obs. 7.) Entered 1 " is modified by service. 017 Service is modi- 
fied by the adjectives the and artillery. Lieutenant is modified by 
the adjectives a. and second. 

Parsed. See \ 64, Model 1. 

1 m ap (with Napoleon Bonaparte). 1 o ap (with people). 

Emperor. nation. 

1 o ap (with Ajaccio). 1 m ap (with Napoleon Bonaparte). 

town. lieutenant. 

He, noandotv a terror* to all Europe, ", was vanquished tvpv at 
Waterloo, " a village oap of Belgium. " 

Examples to illustrate the Observations under the Rule. 

1. He, himself. They, themselves. The lady, herself I, myself 
You, yourself. Thou, thyself 

Explain thus. 
Himself is the word added to the pronoun he for the sake of 

emphasis. 

3 m ap (with he). See § 64. 3. 

Parsed. Himself. 

2. Peace 110 and otv was made, tvpv a result** which 110 produced tv joy. otY 
Compound sentence ; clauses connected by which. 

Result is the word which is in apposition with the sentence, 
" Peace was made." 

3. The command, 110 and otv "Thou™ shalt not take tv the name otv of 
the Lord, 00 thy God * in vain," is often disregarded tvpv by the 
wicked. " The sentence in Italics is in apposition with the noun 
command. 

The adverbial phrase in vain, modifies shalt take; the adverb 
often modifies is disregarded. The task, 110 " To rear the tender 
thought," is ilv delightful. The phrase in Italics is in apposition 
with task. Delightful modifies is, and relates to the subject task. 



160 SYNTAX. 

4. "Unhappy mortals, ap we no are 1 

5 . " We no love tT each other otv ;" that is, we love, eacA loves the oilier. 
" They 110 love tv one another otv ;" that is, they love, one loves another. 

Each is in apposition with we, and one with they. 

6. " Publius Cornelius Scipio. Daniel Webster." How parsed? 

7. "He 110 engaged itv as usher.** We 110 like tv him 017 as a teacher.™* 
As a general,** he 110 has tv no superior otv ." 

8. "As a scholar** his reputation 00 is itv great." Here the ex- 
plaining word scholar is in the possessive case, without the sign, and 
in apposition with the pronoun his. "I no dined. itT at our friend 
Miller , s ,y (house). Here the explaining word "Miller's," has the 
possessive sign ; but friend, the word explained, is in the possessive 
case without the sign. 

Errors to be corrected. 
Analyze every complete sentence, correct each error, and parse 
the word as corrected. 

" We no love tv Washington, 017 he who 110 fought"' for liberty ° p ." 

Corrected thus. 
Washington, the noun explained, is in the objective case ; there- 
fore, by Kule I., he, the explaining word, should be him, in the same 

case as the noun Washington. 

3 m o ap 

Parsed — him. 

" We no met 17 Robert Fulton, 017 he who 110 applied 1 ' the power 017 of 
steam 0p to water-wheels op ." 

" Sir Isaac Newton, no aad otv him who 110 enriched tT science 017 with his 
discoveries, op was born tvpv on Christmas-day °V ; 

"Give tv (thou 110 ) the reward otv to me, op I who 110 ' deserve* it. ou 
The Lord 110 commanded tv it, otv him who 110 rules' 7 the universe 0tv .' ; 

Exercise for Writing. (Rule I.) 
Fill each of the following blanks with a word in the case required 
by the Rule. 

" I visited the lady, , who lives at Hopewell. They relieved 

the wants of that poor man, ., whom you saw yesterday. 

John, the , sells bread. James, the , shoes horses." 

Observations. . 
Read the observation under the Rule, and fill each blank with 
such word or words as will exemplify the observation. 



SYNTAX. 161 

1. " The boy . The girl . I . We . You 

2. (Supply a sentence.) " , a favor unexpected." 

3. (Supply a phrase.) "One thing, his : , will favor 

him." (Supply a sentence.) "The truth, that , is 

admitted." 

4. " A pretended , he seeks your destruction." 

5. Praise ye , his maker." 

6. " was the son of ." 

7. "He was employed as . They were applauded as ." 

8. "His fame as , is unequaled. We live at our — ■ — 

(house)." 

RULE II. 

Subject of the Verb. 
The Subject of a verb not in the infinitive mode, must 
be in the nominative case. 

Observations. 

1. The subject of a verb in the infinitive mode, must be in the 
objective case. 

2. The subject should always have a verb, either expressed or 
understood. 

Examples under the Rule. 

Analyze and Parse. See \ 64. 

"I no am. itT Thou no readest. itv The Earth" revolves. itv " 
I is the subject, unmodified. Am is the verb, or predicate. 
Thou is the subject. Readest is the verb, or predicate. 
Earth is the subject, modified by the adjective the. Revolves is 
the unmodified verb, or predicate. 

3 m or f lp (am). 3 m or f 2p (readest). 1 pn (revolves). 
I. Thou. Earth. 

" Shall ayx we 110 be itv slaves?^ Who af art itv thou? no Ilear itT thou.™ 
How blunt are nv thy arrows! 00 May aux better times 00 come. itT 
There is ilv joy 00 in religion. 00 ' Retrace tv ye no your steps, otv said tv 
7ie." n0 Said is a transitive verb, having for its object the sentence, 
" Retrace ye your steps." " Then comes itv sorrow." 00 
14* 



162 SYNTAX. 

Observations. 

1. " The tyrant 00 ordered tv them osv to be executed." tvp * 

Tyrant is the subject, modified by the adjective the. Ordered is 
the verb, modified by them to be executed, which phrase is the object 
of ordered. 

3 m or f pi osv (to be executed). See § 6-4, Abbreviations. 

Them. 

" We 110 believe * him oay to be itT competent." Him to be competent 
is the object of believe. 

■ " I no know tv him osv to be itv honest." Him to be honest is the 
object of know. 

2. "Who 110 built tv the house? otv The carpenter 110 (built* the 
house 0tT ). He no is itv older than I n0 (am itv ), but not so old as you no 
(are itT )." 

" To whom ' thus Adam 110 (spoke itv )." 

Errors to be corrected by the Bute. 
Correct. Analyze. Parse. 
"Him and me went to town." 

Corrected thus. » 

The subject of a verb by Eule II., must be in the nominative 
case ; therefore, him should be he, and me should be I. 

He and lis the compound subject. Went is the intransitive verb, 
modified by the adjunct to town. Town is the object of the prepo- 
sition to. 

3m. 3morflp. 

He. I. 

" Come you and me will piay. You and us have learned our 
task ; but him and her have not learned their task. The teacher ia 
wiser than me (am). She is more diligent than him (is)." 

Observation 2. 
2. " The men 110 they are itv there." 

Corrected thus. 

The subject must always have a verb, according to Observation 
2 ; therefore, they should be omitted. 

"The king" he is itv just. The water 110 it is itv cold. The lady no 
she is itv fair. The gentlemen" they are itv polite. 



SYNTAX. 163 

RULE III. 

Nom. Absolute. 
A noun or pronoun, whose case depends on no other 
word, is put in the Nominative Absolute, 
(1.) With a Participle. 
(2.) By direct address. 
(3.) By pleonasm. 
(4.) By exclamation. — Goold Brown. 

Examples. Analyze and Parse. 

1. " The weather being cold, we no suffered itT ." 

The phrase " the weather being cold," is used absolutely ; that 
is, it is not connected in construction with other words. It is 
abridged for "since the weather was cold." We is the subject; 
suffered, the verb. 

1 abp (being). See § 64. 1. Abbreviations. 

Weather. 

2. " Romans, countrymen, and friends ; hear tv (you 110 ) me " for 
my cause op ." 

Romans, countrymen, and friends, are used absolutely. You 
understood, is the subject unmodified. 

Hear is the transitive verb, modified by the adjunct for my cause. 
Me is the object of the transitive verb hear. My limits cause. 
Cause is the object of the preposition for. 

1 m or f 2p pi abd 1 m 2p pi abd 1 m or f 2p pi abd. 

Romans, countrymen, friends. 

3. "My friends, do aux they n0 send tv a wish otv after me op ?" 

4. "0, sad thought! 0, the times! 0, the manners!" 

Fill up each of the following blanks with n pronoun in the case 
required by the Rule. 

" being fatigued,' he advised me to rest. 

having discharged our guns, the Indians fled. helping, 

I fear no danger. — Lord, directing my steps, I will go in 

the right way." 

(Why should each pronoun inserted be in the nominative case?) 

Note. Being, and having been, are often omitted after a word in 
the nominative case absolute. 



164 SYNTAX. 

RULE IV. 

Possessive Case. 
A noun in the Possessive Case is governed by the name 
of the thing possessed. 

Observations. 

1. The governing noun is often omitted. 

2. Compound names in the possessive have the possessive sign, 
as other names. The several words of a compound name should 
be parsed as one word. 

3. The possessive case is sometimes equivalent to the objective* 
after the preposition of. We should use that form of expression 
which is the smoother, and which expresses the meaning more 
clearly. 

4. When nouns denote joint possession, the sign of the Posses- 
sive is annexed to the last noun only. 

5. When nouns denote separate possession, each must have the 
sign of the Possessive. 

6. A clause should not come between the possessive case and the 
governing noun. 

7. The possessive plural may be governed by a noun in the 
singular. 

Examples under the Rule. See \ 64. 1. 

"Milton's poems. Columbus's discoveries. The man's house. 
The woman's piano." 

Parse the words in Italics by the Model referred to, naming the 
properties in which they differ from it. Thus the noun Milton's 
differs from the form laid down in $ 64, Model 1, in Class, Gender, 
Case, and Syntax. 

1 pn m 3p ' s gn (poems) . 
Milton's. 

Observations. 

Analyze and Parse. 

1. " This house 110 is itv my father' s (house) ; that house" is ltv my 
brother's (house). These books 110 are itv mine (books) ; those books' 10 
are itv yours (books). A subject of the emperor's (subjects)." 

2. " The may or-of Boston's salary. The king-of- England' s 
palace." 



SYNTAX. 165 

Change the following possessives into objectives, governed by 
the preposition of. 

3. " Nature's law/' Changed thus : " The law of nature" 
" The monarch's throne. The sun's light. The mountain's brow. 
The ocean's surface." 

Correct the following errors. 
" His son's wife's mother." It should be, " The mother of his 
son's wife." "His daughter's husband's father. His uncle's son's 
wife. The mother of the wife of his son." It should be, " The 
mother of his son's wife." " The father of the husband of his 
daughter. The wife of the son of his uncle." 

4. " William's and John's ball. (William.) Father's and 
mother's boy. Harper's and Brothers' bookstore." It would, 
however, be better to say, " The ball belongs to William and 
John," &c. 

5. "William and John's ball. (William's.) Father and mother's 
acquaintances. Harper and Miller's store." 

6. " She began to extol the farmer's, as she called him, excellent 
understanding." (The words in Italics should follow the word 
understanding.) Better, " She began to extol the excellent under- 
standing of the farmer," &c. 

Analyze and Parse. 

7. "Our father abd who 110 art itv in heaven. op Their house no is ltv 
large. Our cotton n0 is growing." 7 " 

Fill each of the following blanks with a proper word in the 
possessive case. 

Under the Rule. (Use the sign properly.) 

" A tenderness, and a care, are gifts for 

advantage. Thy virtue is not . He was averse to the 

involving itself in war. This is a servant of ." 

Observations. (Supply the governing noun.) 

1. " They passed by Watson's . He lives at Taylor's . 

He has read Shakspeare's best . Ye are Christ's , and 

Christ is God's ." 

2. Supply a compound name in the possessive case. 
" poems. — notes on Virginia." 



166 SYNTAX. 

4. " and property. and books." 

5. " and property. and books." 

RULE V. 

Adjectives. 

An Adjecctive qualifies a noun, or whatever is used as 
a noun. 

1. A pronoun, a verb in the infinitive mode, a phrase, a sentence, 
an adjective, or a noun and a verb, may be qualified by an adjec- 
tive. 

2. An adjective is sometimes used abstractly ; that is, without 
reference to any particular word. 

3. The word which an adjective qualifies is often omitted. 

4. The adjective a, is used before a consonant sound; an, before 
a vowel sound. 

5. When qualities of different things are expressed, though each 
thing has the same name, a, an, or the, should be repeated. The 
noun should be singular, except a plural one is required by the 
sense. 

6. But when qualities of the same thing are mentioned, a, an, or 
the should hot be repeated. 

7. An adjective signifying more than one, should have a noun 
plural either inform or sense. 

8. An adjective in the singular sometimes qualifies an adjective 
denoting number. 

9. Many,- followed by a or an, is sometimes placed before a noun 
in the singular, to denote plurality. 

10. When objects are contrasted, this and these refer to the near- 
est, or last mentioned; that and those, to the most distant, or first 
mentioned. 

11. In comparing two objects, we generally use the comparative 
degree ; but sometimes the superlative. 

12. In comparing more than two objects, we should use the 
superlative degree. 

13. When the comparative degree is used in comparing more 
than two objects, the latter term of comparison should not include 
the former. 



SYNTAX. 167 

14. "When the superlative degree is used in comparing more than 
two objects, the latter term of comparison should include the 
former. 

15. Double comparatives and superlatives should be avoided. 

16. We should not annex r or er, st or est, nor prefix such words 
as more, most, less, least, as, so, very, &c, to words which do not 
admit of comparison. 

17. The pronoun them should not be used to qualify a noun, 
instead of the adjective these or those. 

18. An adjective is generally used to qualify a noun or pronoun, 
and, therefore, an adverb should not be used instead of it. 

19. A word which expresses degree or manner, and which quali- 
fies a verb, adjective, or an adverb, is an adverb; and an adjective 
should not be used instead of it. 

20. Either and neither refer to two things only; when more- are 
named, any or none should be used. 

21. The adjective the sometimes relates to an adverb. 

Examples under the Ride. 
Analyze and Parse. See g 64. 

2 nc 2 2 2 2 2 5 se qad 

The gay, young, noble, ingenious, accomplished, and most 

2 1 pn m 4 itv ps 7 conj adv sns 2 nc 1 pn 4 ir itv ps. 

wretched Altamont expired ere the sun arose. 

Analyzed. 

Compound sentence — two clauses — connected by ere. 
Altamont is the subject of the first clause, modified by seven 
adjectives. 

Expired is the verb, unmodified. 

Sun is the subject of the second clause, modified by the. 

Arose is the verb, unmodified. 

3 m 4 itv ps 2 3 in 'gn 1 4 ir itv ps 2 nc 

He died miserable. His mind was conscious 

6 sr adj and n 1 o op. 2 nc 2 1 m or f 4 ir 1 o otv 

of guilt. A pleasant companion makes life 

2. 

happy. 



168 SYNTAX. 

Observations. See \ 64, Model 2. 

3 m and f (or either) pi 4 ir itv pi 2 rp {they). 1 4 ir itv 

1. They are kind. To slander is 

2 rv (to slander taken as a noun). ' 1 (phrase as a noun) 4 ir itv 

base. Teaching Grammar is 

2 rph (as a noun). 7 intro 3 m or f lp pi 4 itv fu lp pi 5 4 ir it 

troublesome. That we will die shortly, is 

2 rs. 

certain. 

That we will die shortly is a sentence, used as a noun, the subject 
of the verb is. The adjective certain qualifies this sentence, taken 
as a noun. 

2 r adj 2 2 no 1 4 pv 2 rnv. 

Pale red ink. The house is painted white. 

2 uab 4 ir itv 2 uab. 

2. To be good, is to be happy. 

The phrase to be good, is the subject of the verb is. The phrase 
to be happy, is the nominative case after is. 

Note. — The nominative ease after an intransitive verb is called 
the Predicate Nominative. 

3. "Some study; some play." Some relates to a noun under- 
stood, such as persons, boys, girls, or any word which will make 
sense. 

" The good shall be rewarded ; the wicked shall be punished." 
(Supply people.) "Each (man) has his faults. We cannot remem- 
ber all (things) that we hear." 

Correct, and parse the words as corrected. 

4. "An horse. An hundred." The words horse and hundred 
begin with a consonant sound ; therefore, an should be a. 

"An hero. An house. An union. Many an one. An unit. 
Such an one." 

"A apple. A inkstand." The words apple and inkstand, begin 
each with a vowel sound ; therefore a should be an. 

"A ox. A hour. A army. A umbrella. A honest man. A 
herb. A egg." 

Correct. Parse the Adjectives. 

5. "A white and red flag." The qualities white and red, are 



SYNTAX. 169 

intended to refer to different flags; therefore, by Observation 5th, a 
should be repeated, thus: "A white and a red flag;" that is, "A 
white flag and a red flag." 

" A black and white cat." Meaning two cats. " An old and 
ugly woman." Two women. " The Old and New Testament. The 
Old and New Testaments." By Obs. 5, Testaments should not be in 
the plural, the sense not requiring it. 

Correct. Parse the Adjectives. 

6. "A white and a red flag." The qualities of but one flag are 
spoken of; therefore, a should not be repeated. It should be, "A 
white and red flag." 

" A black and a white cat. An old and an ugly woman. A 
large and a mellow apple. The sharp-sighted and the kingly 
eagle." 

Put the Nouns in the Plural Form. Parse the Adjectives. 

7. " Ten pound. Six foot." An adjective denoting more than 
one, should have a noun in the plural; therefore, pound should be 
pounds, and foot should he feet. 

" These book. Those table. Fifty foot. Sixty pound. Forty 
mile. Five cord of wood. Twenty bushel." 

Proper Expressions. 
Analyze. Parse all the words. 

3 m ' gn I 4 itv ps 6 2 nc 1 m o pi op 7 2 nc 

His army consisted of fifty Aorse, and five hundred 

1 m o pi op. 2 nc 1 pi 4 ir it ps pi 6 2 nc 1 o Op. 2 nc 1 6 sr n and n 

foot. Two cannon were in the fort. A fleet of 

2 nc 1 o pi op 4 itv ps 6 2 nc 1 o op. 

ten sail passed up the river. 

The nouns horse, foot, cannon, and sail, though singular inform, 
are plural in sense. 

Parse the Adjectives. 

8. "A few persons." A is the singular adjective; it qualifies 
few, an adjective of number. "A great m any faults." A is the 
singular adjective ; many is an adjective of+number. 

"A thousand men. A dozen hats. A hundred pounds. Every 
ten years. This twenty days." 

15 



170 SYNTAX. 

Note. In such instances, the adjectives of number seem origi- 
nally to have been collective nouns in the singular number, and 
the preposition q/'was used after them ; thus, "A few of persons," 
"A thousand of men," &c. ; but by the omission of the preposition 
of, the words have become adjectives, still retaining the singular 
adjective before them. 

Parse the Adjectives. 

9. "Many a time." Many relates to the singular noun time. 
The expression means many times. 

"Many a man. Many a gem. Many a flower." 

10. "This book is the new edition; that, the old: this edition 
contains many errors ; in that, they have been corrected. The 
Bible is the best of books ; Tom Paine's Age of Reason, the worst: 
this was written by an infidel ; that, by the men of God." 

11. " The xoiser of the two. The stronger of the two. The wisest 
of the two. The strongest of the two." 

Correct the Errors. Parse the Adjectives. 

12. " The class consists of three boys ; John is the more studious. 
Of the three, William has the more retentive memory, and Charles 
the better judgment." 

13. " Jane was more intelligent than all the girls." In this sen- 
tence, the latter term of comparison, all the girls, includes the 
former term Jane, because Jane is one of the girls. The sentence 
may be corrected by inserting the word other before girls. 

" Israel loved Joseph more than all his children. The elephant 
is larger than all animals. Newton was wiser than all the 
philosophers." 

14. "Jane was the most intelligent of all the other girls." In 
this sentence, the latter term of comparison, of all the other girls, 
does not include the former term Jane. The sentence may be 
corrected by omitting the word other. 

" Israel loved Joseph most of all his other children. The ele- 
phant is the largest of all other animals. Newton was the wisest 
of all the other philosophers." 

15. "A more milder temper. The most mildest temper." (Omit 
more and most.) " ThS lesser number." (Less.) 

" The lesser weight it carries, the more faster it runs. The most 
wisest of men. The least happiest of beings." 



SYNTAX. 171 

16. "His chiefest desire." The word chief does not admit of 
being compared; therefore, the termination est should not be 
annexed to it.- It should be, "His chief desire." " A supremer 
dignity. A more perfect form." The word perfect does not pro- 
perly admit of comparison ; therefore the word more should not be 
prefixed. The sentence may be corrected thus: "A form more 
nearly perfect." 

" This ball is not so round as that. His words are very true. 
She is so sincere." (So nearly ; omit very ; omit so.) 

17. " Bring them apples. Read them books. Buy them oranges. 
Did you see them men ?" 

18. " The tutor addressed him in terms suitably to his offence. 
He lived in a manner agreeably to the dictates of reason. The 
study of Syntax should he previously to that of punctuation." 

19. " I never saw such large trees." (So.) "Such a bad temper 
is seldom found." (So bad a temper.) "Agreeable to my promise, 
I now write." (Agreeably.) " They are miserable poor." (Mise- 
rably.) "I can never think so mean of him." (Meanly.) "He 
acted bolder than was expected. He behaved the noblest." (More 
boldly, and most nobly.) 

20. "Either of the three." (Any.) "Neither of the five." 
(None.) 

Analyze. Parse. 

21. " The more I examine it, the better I like it." (The better I 
like it, as the more I examine it.) 

The following directions may be of service to the student, in 
determining whether an adverb, or an adjective, should be used in 
some instances. 

In general, if some tense of the verb to be, or to become, can be 
substituted for the one employed, without changing the sense or 
construction, the word following will express the quality, state, or 
condition of the subject, and should therefore be an adjective. Thus, 
in the sentence " He feels warm," we may substitute the verb is, 
without varying the sense or the construction — "He is warm." 
Warm expresses the state of the subject he, and is therefore pro- 
perly used, instead of the adverb warmly. Bu4 if the verb to be, or 
to become, cannot be substituted for the one employed, and likewise 
if the word used after the verb can be properly defined with a cor- 



172 SYNTAX. 

responding adjunct, then the word employed will express the 
mariner of the act, and should, for that reason, be an adverb. Thus, 
in the sentence "He feels warmly the insult," we cannot substitute 
either is or becomes, for the verb feels, without destroying the 
sense ; and the word warmly may likewise be defined by its corres- 
ponding adjunct, in a warm manner. The adverb warmly is, there- 
fore, properly used instead of the adjective warm. 

Tell why the following words, in Italics, should be Adjectives : 
The rose smells (is) sweet. 
She looks (is) cold. 
How pleasant the fields look (are) ! 
The boy grows (becomes) tall. 
The girl appears (is) neat. 
The apples taste (are) sour. 

Tell why the following words, in Italics, should be Adverbs : 
The bird sings sweetly (in a sweet manner). 
She looks coldly (in a cold manner) on him. 
She looks pleasantly (in a pleasant manner) at me. 
The boy grows rapidly (in a rapid manner). 
The lady dresses neatly (in a neat manner). 
He looks sourly (in a sour manner) at me. 

[See Bullion's Grammar.) 

RULE VI. 

Pronoun. 

A Pronoun agrees with its antecedent in gender, num- 
ber, and person. 

Note. The antecedent is sometimes omitted. 
Singular Antecedents. 

(a.) A single word, phrase, or sentence, denoting but one thing. 

(6.) Two or more words in the singular, or two or more phrases, 
or sentences connected by or or nor. 

(c.) Singular nouns which are connected by and, referring to the 
same person or thing. 

(d.) Singular nouns which are preceded by each, every, or no. 
though connected by and. 



SYNTAX. 173 

Plural Antecedents. 

(e.) A single word, plural either in sense or form, 
(f.) Two or- more words, phi'ases, or sentences which are con- 
nected by and, referring to different things. 

(g). Words connected by or or nor, if one of the words, or all 
of them are plural. The' plural word should be placed nearest the 
verb which agrees with it. 

Observations. 

1. An indefinite or an interrogative pronoun (and sometimes the 
pronoun it), is used without a definite reference to any antecedent. 

2. The pronoun it may refer to a noun of any gender, person, or 
number. It is sometimes redundant, or used when unnecessary. 

3. The pronoun ice is used by speakers and writers for /. 

4. You is singular or plural in sense, but must have a plural 
verb. 

5. Compound relative pronouns refer to antecedents omitted. 

6. An antecedent equivalent to we, requires a pronoun in the 
Jirst person, plural. 

7. An antecedent equivalent to you, requires a pronoun in the 
second person, plural. 

8. When it is necessary to repeat a pronoun of the second person, 
its number should not be changed. 

9. .A change of relatives referring to the same antecedent is in- 
elegant. 

10. A relative clause should be placed after the subject which it 
modifies. 

11. The connecting relative, with the preposition which governs 
it, is sometimes improperly omitted. 

12. An adverb is sometimes improperly used for a relative and 
a preposition. 

13. Who is applied to persons, and animals personified. 

14. Who should not be used, unless the antecedent refers directly 
to persons. 

15. The relative which is applied to things, lower animals, and, 
sometimes, to the words child and children. The adjective which 
is applied to persons or things. 

16. That is applied to either persons or things. 

15* 



174 SYNTAX. 

17. That, instead of who or which, should be used — 
(h.) After an adjective in the superlative degree. 

(i.) After same, very, all, and sometimes after no, some, any. 
(j.) After an antecedent which includes both persons and things. 
(Jc.) After the antecedent who. 

(I.) Generally when there is doubt whether who or which should 
be used. 

18. That is never governed by a preposition before it, but may 
be governed by one after it. 

19. What should not be used where the conjunction that is 
required. 

20. The relative is sometimes omitted. 

21. A pronoun should not be used to represent an adjective. 

22. In using a pronoun, take care that its antecedent be distinctly 
known. 

23. The antecedent does not, as the name imports, always pre 
cede the pronoun which relates to it. 

24. A personal pronoun should not be employed in the same 
part of the sentence as the noun which it represents. 

Examples under the Bute. — Analyze. Parse. 

7 sns 3 m or f lp pi 'gn 1 m 4 ir it 6 1 o op 3 m or f lp pi 

If our friend is in trouble, we, 

3 rl m or f lp pi o otv 3 m 4 ir 7 4 aux 4 po lp pi 3 m o otv. 

whom he knows and loves, may console him. 

Analyzed. 

First Clause. " We may console him." 

Second Clause. " Whom he knows and loves ;" connected to the 
first clause by the relative whom. 

Third Clause. " Our friend is in trouble ;" connected to the first 
clause by the conjunction if. 

1st. We is the subject ; may console, the verb ; him, the object. 

2d. He is the subject; knows and loves, the compound predicate; 
whom, the object. 

3rd. Friend is the subject, modified by the pronoun our; is is 
the intransitive verb, modified by the adjunct, in trouble. Trouble 
is the object of the preposition in. 



SYNTAX. 175 

« 
Singular Antecedents. — Analyze. Parse. 

The antecedents are printed in Italics ; the pronouns referring 
to them, in small capitals. 

2 nc 1 m 4 ir it 2 nc lmaf (is) 3 rl m 4 ps 

(a.) Single word. This man is the person who committed 

2 nc 1 o otv. 

the offence. 

3 m 4 4 ir itv if 5 3 rl 4 ir itv 2 rp (which) 6 sr adj n 

Phrase. He loves to rise early, "which is conducive to 

1 oop. 
health. 

Analyze. Parse the Pronouns referring to the Antecedents. 

Sentence. "He is elected, but he knows it not." 

(b.) Two words. "John or William, who lives with me, will offer 
his services." 

Two phra.ses. " That man loves to hunt the fox, or to shoot birds, 
which is his daily employment." 

Too sentences. "He is either a dunce, or he is a great idler, which 
all his acquaintances believe (which, otv, believe)." 

(c.) " This philosopher and poet was banished from his country." 

(d.) " Every slate, and every book, and ex evy chair, and every 
desk, was in its proper place." 

Plural Antecedents. 

(e.) "We should love those persons who are kind to us." 

(/.) Two ivords. "John and William, who live with me, will offer 
their services." 

Two phrases. " He was aecused of telling lies, and of stealing 
money, which are extremely sinful." 

Two sentences. " The servant swept the floor, and he brought the 
water, which he had been told to do." 

(g.) "Neither he nor they have finished their work." 

Observations. — Analyze. Parse the words italicized. 

3 in m or f 4 f u 3 m or f lp pi o oty. 3 idf m or f 

1. Who shall enslave us ? "We know not who 

will attempt it. 



176 SYNTAX. 

"It snows. It rains. Come and trip it as. you go." 
2. "It is the man we saw ;' ; meaning some male person. "It is 
the women we saw;" meaning the female persons referred to. The 
antecedent of it is often indefinite ; in parsing, the student may- 
say that it has no definite antecedent. " It is 1, Whois#. ? It is 
glorious to die for one's country." In this sentence, the word it is 
redundant; that is, it is a word more than necessary, the true sub- 
ject of the verb is, being the phrase, "to die for one's country." 
It seems to be a necessary expletive — a word that adds nothing to 
the sense ; but such a construction as the above is an authorized 
idiom of the language. We may parse the sentence by placing 
the phrase, "to die for one's country," in apposition with it, thus: 
"It, to die for one's country, is glorious." 

4. Correct the errors. Parse you and the verb. 

" Thomas, was you present? You was writing." 

5. Parse the compound relatives. " Whoever sins, deserves 
punishment." Whoever is equivalent to any person who. Person 
is the antecedent of whoever, and the subject of the verb deserves. 

Whoever is the subject of sins. 

" Whatever obscures the meaning of a sentence, weakens its 
force. Choose whomever you prefer." 

6 and 7. Correct the errors, and parse the words in Italics, as 
corrected. 

"John and I {we) will attend to my business;" that is, John's 
business, and my business. "John and thou (you) will attend to 
thy business ;" meaning the business of both. " You, and John, 
and I (we), will attend to your business;" meaning the business 
of the three. 

8. Correct the words in Italics. Parse the pronouns. 

" Love thy neighbor as thyself, and you will obey one of the 
commandments given to you." ( Wilt.) 

9. "He that shuns vice, and who pursues virtue, will become 
happy." 

10. Place the relative clause next to the subject. Parse the 
relative. 

" He will please God, who obeys the divine law." He is the sub- 
ject, modified by the relative clause, who obeys the divine law. 

11. Supply the relative and the preposition. 



SYNTAX. 177 

" They are in the same situation you saw them (in ivhich). This 
is the horse I rode (on which)." 

12. Correct. "They live in the house where public meetings are 
held. I entered a house where toys were sold." 

13. Correct and parse the relatives. " The man which drinks 
rum, will want bread. The ox who labors for us, should be well 
fed." 

14. " Nero, who was but another name for cruelty, committed 
suicide (ivhich word)." 

Analyze. Parse the Relatives. 

15. " The house in ivhich he lived was destroyed. The bird 
which sung so sweetly is flown. (I 37. 3. Has flown.) The child 
which was lost, is found. Which orator is the greater, Cicero or 
Demosthenes V* 

16. " The men and things that were seen, will be described." 
Tlxat has men and things for it3 antecedent. * 

17. (h.) " The army of Xerxes was the largest that we read of" 
That is used instead of which, because the superlative degree pre- 
cedes it. That is the object of the preposition of. 

Give a reason, in each instance, why that is used instead of who 

or ivhich. 

(i.) " He is the same man that we met yesterday." 

(j.) " We saw some of the men and animals that live upon the 

island." That relates to men and animals for its antecedent. 
(Jc.) "Who, that reflects, can be' an infidel ?" 
(I.) " We visited a family that appeared to be happy." 

18. " They built the house that they lived in." 

19. Correct. "I cannot believe but what he is to blame." 

20. " This is the man we love (whom). I am monarch of all I 
survey ;" that is omitted after all. 

21. Correct. " Be merciful ; without which, mercy will not be 
shown to you ;" without exercising mercy. 

22. " The man told the boy that this was the person whom he 
struck with his cane." Here we cannot tell whether he- and his 
refer to man, or boy; and, therefore, the meaning of the sentence 
is not known. If it is meant that the man struck the person, it 
would be better to say, "The man told the boy, 'This is the person 
whom I struck with my cane/ " If it is meant that the boy struck 



178 SYNTAX. 

the person, it should be, " The man told the boy, ' This is the 
person whom you struck with your cane.' " 

23. "Hark! they whisper, angels say." They relates to angels. 

24. Correct. " The king he is just." Omit the pronoun. " I 
saw her the queen. The ladies they were there. The gentlemen 
they bowed to them. 

RULE VII. 

Verb. 
A Verb must agree with its subject in number and 
person. 

Note. The verb is often omitted. 

Singular Subjects, or Nominatives. 

(a.) A single word, a verb in the infinitive mode, phrase, or 
sentence, denoting but one thing. 

(&.) Separate nominatives. Two or more words in the singular, 
or two or more phrases or sentences connected by or or nor. 

(c.) Singular nouns which are connected by and, referring to the 
same person or thing. 

(d.) Singular nouns which are preceded by each, every, or no, 
and connected by and. 

Plural Subjects, or Nominatives. 

(e.) A single word, plural either in sense or form. 

(f.) Joint nominatives. Two or more words, phrases, or sentences, 
■which are connected by and, and which refer to different things. 

(g.) Words connected by or or nor, if any or all of them are 
plural. But the plural word should be placed nearest the verb 
which agrees with it. 

Observations. 

1. The subject of a verb in the imperative mode is often omitted. 
(Thou, ye, or you.) 

2. The verbs need, want, and let are often used without a subject. 

3. When nominatives of different persons are connected, the 
verb should agree in person with that which is placed next 
to it. 

4. A singular nominative with one adjunct or more, should not 
have a plural verb. 



SYNTAX. 179 

Examples under the Rule. 
Note. "To whom thus Adam (spoke)." 

Singular Subjects. — Analyze. Parse, 
(a.) Single word. — " The horse runs. The ox ploughs." 
Phrase. — u Reading novels is injurious." 
Sentence. — " That we all must die, is certain." 
(b.) Two words. — " The horse or the ox will draw the plough." 
Two phrases. — " Sitting up late, or sleeping too much, is in- 
jurious." 
Two sentences. — " That ice should love virtue, or that ice should 
hate vice, seems reasonable." 
(c.) " That eminent scholar and statesman is dead." 
(d.) " Every man and every woman was numbered." 

Plural Subjects — Analyze. Parse, 
(e.) " The committee were divided. The mountains are lofty." 
(f.) Two words. — " Patience and diligence remove mountains." 
Two phrases. — " Sitting up late, and sleeping too much, are 

injurious." 
Two sentences. — " That we should love virtue, and that we 
should hate vice, seems reasonable." 
(g.) " The master or his servants do the work." 

Correct. Analyze. Parse. 

" I loves him. He love me." Corrected thus : 

The verb loves in the third person, cannot, by Rule VII., agree 
with its subject I, which is in the first person. Therefore, it should 
be love. In the next example, the verb love should be loves, in the 
third person singular, because its subject he is in the third person 
singular. 

" Disappointments sinks the heart. The rivers has overflowed 
their banks. Has the goods been sold ? Did thou sell them ? You 
does your duty. I has lost a day." 

Observations. — Analyze. Parse. 

1. "Go, learn to behave thyself properly." (thou, and learn.) 

2. " There needs no argument to prove it." (in order to prove.) 
" There wanted not men, who boldly asserted it. Let there be light. 
Let us make man." 



180 SYNTAX. 

Correct. Analyze. Parse. 

3. " Either you or I are in fault." 

4. " Pharaoh, with all his host, were drowned. The ship, with 
all her crew, were lost." 

It would be better to use and instead of with, without changing 
the verb. 

RULE VIII. 

Same Case. 

An Intransitive or a Passive Verb has the same case 
after it as before it, when both words refer to the same 
thing* 

Observations. 

1. The verb to be is often omitted. 

2. Both cases sometimes precede or follow the verb. 

3. In some sentences, the predicate nominative precedes the verb, 
and the subject follows it. 

Examples under tlie Rule. — Correct. Analyze. Parse. 

" We know tliat it is him." Corrected thus : is is an intransitive 
verb, having the nominative case {it,) before it; therefore, him, 
which refers to the same person, should be he, in the nominative 
case after it. 

" They thought it was thee. It could not have been them. It is 
him, indeed. They are them which testify of me. Be composed : 
it is me." 

Analyze. Parse all the ivords. 

" The youth will become a poet. Stephen died a martyr to his 
faith. Washington is called the father of his country. I believe 
him to be a good man. To see is to enjoy." 

Observations. — Analyze. Parse. 

1. " I think him an honest man." (to be.) "He seems a man of 
truth." 

2. " Are they friends ? Friends they cannot be." 

3. " Who af art thou ? no Feet was I to the lame." 



SYNTAX. 181 

4. Sometimes there is a predicate nominative, without any sub- 
ject nominative ; as, " To be a scholar requires study. His becom- 
ing a scholar depends upon application." 

RULE IX. 

Object of the Verb. 

A Transitive Verb in the active voice overns the objec- 
tive case. 

Observations. 

1. A verbal noun derived from a transitive verb, may govern the 
objective case. 

2. An infinitive, phrase, or sentence, may be used as the object. 

3. Certain verbs, such as name, choose, &c, may govern two 
objectives. 

4. After some transitive verbs, two objectives are used, one of 
which is governed by a preposition understood. 

5. A transitive verb in the passive voice does not govern the 
objective case. Exception: "Taught his praise. 0?v " 

6. An intransitive verb cannot govern the objective case. 

7. After a transitive verb in the active voice, a preposition should 
not be used to govern the objective case. 

Examples under the Rule. — Correct. Analyze. Parse. 

" Who 01 '' did they no entertain ? tv " Corrected thus : 
A transitive verb {did entertain), governs the objective case ; 
therefore who should be whom. 

" Who did they send ? Who should I love more ? Do you know 
who they elected ? That is the friend who I love. He who com- 
mitted the offence, you should correct, not I, who am innocent.- 
They invited she and I." 

Observations. — Analyze. Parse. 

1. " We meet with many difficulties in studying grammar." 
(Governed by studying.) 

2. Infinitive. — " We love to hear the ocean's roar." 
Phrase. — "Avoid talking too much." 
Sentence. — " We all know that there is a God." 

19 



182 SYNTAX. 

3. " They called him master. The voters elected Taylor Presi- 
dent: 3 

4. "The master taught me grammar." (To me.) "The lawyer 
asked the witness a question." (Of the witness.) "My brother 
gave me a book." [To me.) 

Correct. Analyze. Parse. 

5. "I was taught grammar." (Grammar was taught to me.) 
" He was offered a present. I was promised a booh." 

6. "He will repent him of his indulgences." (Omit him.) "Go, 
flee thee away. Hasten thee home." 

7. "I shall premise with a few general observations. The teacher 
will not allow of it." 

RULE X. 

Infinitive Mode. 
The Infinitive Mode may be governed by a verb, noun, 
pronoun, adjective., participle, adverb, preposition, or 
conjunction. 

Observations. — 

1. The Infinitive is sometimes used absolutely; that is, without 
a governing word. 

2. The Infinitive may be used as a noun. (See Examples.) 

3. After bid, dare, see, make, let, need, hear, say, in the Active 
Voice, to, the sign of the Infinitive, is commonly omitted. 

4. The verb to be is sometimes omitted in the Infinitive Passive. 

Examples under the Rule. Analyze. Parse. See \ 63 and $ 64. 
Governed by a verb. " The pupil wishes to learn" 

4 it if. 

Parsed. Learn. 

Note. In parsing, let the pupil give that part of the rule which 

applies: thus, learn is governed by the verb wishes; Rule — the 

Infinitive may be governed by a verb. 

By a noun. " The pupil has a desire to learn." 

By a pronoun. " The teacher wishes him to learn." 
By an adjective. " The pupil is anxious to learn" 
By a participle. " The pupil, wishing to learn, studies. 



SYNTAX. 183 

By an adverb. " The pupil knows how to study." 

By a preposition. "The pupil studies in order to learn." In 

order is a preposition equivalent to for. 
By a conjunction. " He knows better than to trust him." 

Observations. — Analyze. Parse. 

1. " To confess the truth, I was in fault. It was, so to speak, a 
branch of the executive power." 

2. As a subject or predicate. " To enjoy is to obey." 
As the object of a verb. " Girls love to dance." 

As tJie object of a proposition. " He is about to leave town." 
In apposition with a noun. " They asked the liberty to 

play." 

3. " Bid him come. We heard him say it. Let me proceed. 
Make them labor." 

4. "We knew him injured." (Supply to be.) " They supposed 
him slain." 

RULE XL 

Participles. 
Participles relate to nouns or pronouns. 

Observations. 

1. Participles sometimes perform the office both of a noun and a 
verb at the same time. 

2. The word to which a participle relates, is often indefinite or 
understood. 

3. A participle is sometimes used abstractly; that is, without 
reference to any particular word. 

4. A participle may relate to a phrase or sentence. 

5. When an adjective is placed before a transitive participle, the 
preposition of should come after it. The adjective and preposition 
should both be used, or both omitted. 

6. The active participle is sometimes used in a passive sense. 

7. We should not use the past tense for the past participle, not 
the past participle for the past tense. 

8. The past participle, or the past tense of a regular verb, should 
not end in t. To this there are some exceptions. 



184 SYNTAX. 

Examples under the Rule. — Analyze. Parse. See \ 64, Models. 

4 ing rp (they) 3 m or f pi o otv 2 3 m or f pi 4 ir it ps pi 1 m or f pi af. 

Esteeming themselves wise, they became fools. 

Analyzed. See I 63. 

1. They is the subject, modified by the present participle 
esteeming. 

2. Became is the verb, modified by the noun fools, which is in 
the same case as the subject. 

3. Esteeming is modified by the pronoun themselves, which is its 
object. 

4. Themselves is modified by the adjective icise. 

"Orlando left the herd grazing. Man beholds the twinkling 
stars adorning night's blue arch. Having lost his wealth, he was 
deserted. Being deprived of his liberty, the man died in misery, 
beloved by all." 

Observations. — Analyze. Parse. 

1. " He is engaged in teaching arithmetic." Teaching is a par- 
ticipial noun, the object of the preposition in. As a verb, it 
governs arithmetic, its object. 

" They were astonished at John's teaching his brothers so well." 

2. " Granting this to be true, the rest will follow. Considering 
their opportunity, they have done well." 

3. "To seem compelled, is disagreeable." 

4. " He left the city, owing to the violence of the mob." 

Correct. Analyze. Parse. 

5. " By the observing truth, you will gain esteem." Omit the, or 
insert of after observing. " He prepared them for this event, by 
sending of proper information." Omit of, or insert the before 
sending. 

Correct Expressions. 

6. "The ship was building;" not being built. " The tragedy is 
acting ;" not being acted. "Wheat is selling low ;" not being sold. 
"An attempt is malting;" not being made. "At that time, a 
conspiracy was forming ;" not being formed. 

Correct. Analyze. Parse. 

7. " The work was began last year. The murderer was took by 



SYNTAX. 185 

the officers. They seen him yesterday. They written their letters 
on Monday. He done the work. I have saw him." 

8. " The doctor mixt the medicine. The girl learnt her lesson in 
geography, and she spelt* all the words required. The' bird hopt 
from spray "to spray." 

RULE XII. 

Adverbs. 
An Adverb may modify the meaning of a verb, an 
adjective, a participle, a participial noun, another adverb, 
a preposition, a noun, or .a pronoun. 

Observations. 

1. An adverb should be so placed, with regard to the word which 
it modifies, as will render the meaning of the sentence the clearest, 
and promote harmony. 

2. An adjective should not be used where an adverb is required. 

3. No is sometimes improperly used for not. 

4. Two negatives should not be used in the same clause for 
denial, because they destroy each other, and are equivalent to an 
affirmative. 

5. xldverbs are often improperly used as adjectives. 

6. Adverbs are sometimes improperly used as nouns. 

7. The word which an adverb qualifies, is often omitted. 

8. Conjunctive adverbs generally modify two words. 

9. The adverbs no, nay, yes, amen, yea, ay, are used indepen- 
dently. They stand each for a whole sentence. 

10. There, why, well, now, are sometimes expletives. They 
qualify nothing. 

Examples under tlie Rule. Analyze. Parse. See g 63 and \ 64. 

3mlp 5 4 ps lp 3 o otv. 

Modifies a verb. " I hastily seized it." 

Note. In parsing, let the student give that part of the Rule 
which applies. Hastily qualifies the verb seized. Rule — an 
adverb may qualify a verb. 

* The pupil may use spelled or spelt. The latter expression is more 
frequently employed. 

16* 



a preposition. 



186 SYNTAX. 

Modifies an adjective. "The man is very young, but the lady 

is much younger." 

a participle. "We heard the man humbly begging for 

mercy." 

a participial noun. "By doing our duty faithfully, we will 

receive a suitable reward." 

an adverb. "The speaker was too much agitated." 

"We will write soon after mid-day." 
"We will go immediately after the mail 

arrives." 
" I met your brother far from home." 
" The river rises just below the moun- 
tain." 

a noun. " God only can give the increase." 

a pronoun. " Even they are not free from faults." 

Observations. — Correct. Analyze. Parse. 

Note. — The adverb in each sentence should be placed where a 
star appears. 

"He was* pleasing not often. William nobly acted.* We may 
happily live.* His apology* being not admitted, he became sub- 
missive. These things should* be never separated. Never sove- 
reign was* so much beloved; or, 'Never was sovereign so much 
beloved/ He determined to invite back the king,* and to call 
together his friends.* We always should * prefer our duty to our 
pleasure. Not only he found her* employed, but* pleased and 
tranquil also. It is impossible to be* at work continually. The 
heavenly bodies are* in motion perpetually." 

2. "She writes elegant." It should be elegantly, an adverb, to 
qualify the verb writes. " He speaks fluent, reads excellent, but he 
does not think very coherent." 

3. " He did not say whether he would accept or no." 

4. " I will not give you no water." (Either omit not, or change 
no to any.) " Nothing never affected her so much {ever). There can- 
not be nothing more insignificant than vanity." (There cannot be 
any thing.) 

5. " They supported the then ministry." (Better, the ministry 
at that time; or, the then existing ministry.) "Read the above 
discourse {'preceding). Take wine for thine often infirmities 
{frequent)." 



SYNTAX. 187 

G. "The time came; we had been reading till then {that time.) 
We could have read until now {the present time)." 

Analyze. Parse. 

7. " I'll hence to London (go). Away old man ; away {go). Up, 
up, Glentarkin ! {rise)." 

8. " We will wait till he comes. We will go when he arrives." 

9. " The Lord be with you. Amen. Will you go with me ? Yes" 

10. "There is a person at the door. Well, what shall we do 
next?" 

RULE XIII. 

Object of a Preposition. 
A Preposition governs the objective case. 
Observations. 

1. Nouns denoting time, quantity, measure, distance, value, direc- 
tion, and sometimes the word home, are put in the objective case 
without a preposition. 

2. Nouns or pronouns after like, unlike, near, or nigh, are gene- 
rally governed by a preposition understood. 

3. The object of a preposition may be a noun or pronoun, infini- 
tive mode or phrase. 

4. The object of a preposition is sometimes omitted. 

5. Than is a preposition when it is followed by whom. 

6. One of the terms of relation is sometimes understood. 

Examples under the Ride. — Correct. Analyze. Parse. 

6 sr v and p 3 rl m or f o op aux 3 m or f 2p pi 4 ir fu 2p pi So otv. 

To who will you give it. 

Corrected thus: a preposition (to) governs the objective case; 
therefore who, which is in the nominative case, should be whom, in 
the objective case. 

" Between you and I there is no ill-will. To poor we there is 
nothing remaining. Who does he speak to? With who is he 
angry ? Share it between thou and I." 

Note. The preposition is sometimes placed after the word which 
it governs. 



188 SYNTAX. 

Observations. — Analyze. Parse. 

1. " He has been absent a long time. He has travelled a thou- 
sand miles. I am glad he has come home." 

2. " The boy is like his father (to or unto). His father lives near 
the city (to)." 

3. " Boys areVfond of apples. Send me some of them. What 
went ye out for to see?" 

4. "That is the person I am acquainted with, (with whom I am 
acquainted.) He gave the money to whoever needed it." (Supply 
the person after to.) 

5. " Charles XII., of Sweden, than whom a more courageous 
person never lived, was born in 1682." 

6. " All shall know me, from the least to the greatest." 
(Supply reckoning before from.) "Opinions they would die for." 
(Supply which after for.) 

RULE XIV. 

Conjunctions. 

A Conjunction may connect words, phrases, adjuncts, 
or sentences. 

1. The conjunction is sometimes omitted. 

2. The conjunction often introduces a sentence. 

3. As may be used to connect an adjective or participle with the 
noun or pronoun, to which it belongs. 

4. Such expressions as, as if as though, what if what though, as 
well as, but that, may be taken together in parsing, and called a 
conjunct ice phrase, or compound conjunction. 

5. Some conjunctions, adjectives, and adverbs, must be followed 
by certain conjunctions which answer, to them; the former con- 
junction is parsed as referring to the latter. 



Adjectives. 


Conjunctions. 


Adverbs. 


Conjunctions. 


Such. 


As. 


Not only. 


But also, but. 


Other. 


Than. 


So. 


That. 


Such. 


That. 


Else. 


Than. 





SYNTAX. 


i«y 


Adverbs. 


Conjunctions. 


Conjunctions. 


Conjunctions. 


So. 


As. 


Either. 


Or. 


As. 


So. 


Neither. 


Nor. 


As. 


As. 


Whether. 


Or. 


Sooner 


Than. 


Though, al- 


Yet, neverthe- 






though. 


less, still. 






Both. 


And. 



6. Than is required after comparatives. 

7. Lest, but that, are often improperly used instead of that. 

8. Words are often understood after than and as. 

9. Both is used in reference to two objects only. 

Examples under the Rule. — Analyze. Parse. § 64. 

17 1 4iritpljno 2 sradjandn 1 m o pi op 

Words. Milk and bread are good for boys. 

Analyzed. $ 63. 
Milk and bread is the compound subject, connected by the con- 
junction and. 

Are is the verb, modified by the adjective good, which relates to 
the subject milk and bread. Good is modified by the adjunct for 
boys. 

Phrases. " Chewing tobacco, or smoking cigars, is injurious." 

Adjuncts. " He sleeps in the night and in the day." 

Sentences. " These omissions are more frequent than he imagined." 

Observations. — Analyze. Parse. 

1. " The boy hoped he had made some impression." Supply 
that after hoped. 

2. " That mind is not matter is very evident." (That does hot 
connect, but merely introduces the sentence.) 

3. " The old man is represented as venerable." 

4. " Mary writes as well as reads." 

Correct. Analyze. Parse. 

5. " We read no other book but the Bible. They heard nothing 
else but discordant notes. The sun shines so bright, as it dazzles 
my eyes. He will neither eat the hay, or let the ox eat it. No 
condition is so secure as it cannot admit of change. The elm tree 
is not as large as the poplar tree." 



190 SYNTAX. 

6. "He has little more of the scholar besides the name. It was 
no sooner said but done. There was no further busine.v; but to 
appoint a committee." 

7. " We do not doubt but that the man is slandered." (Omit but.) 
" The captain fears lest the ship will be wrecked." [That.) 

8. Supply the words wanting. — " Thou art wiser than I (am). 
He is taller than she (is). I would be treated as a king (should be 
treated)." 

9. "Both Jackson, Bonaparte, and Washington were able gene- 
rals." (Omit both.) 



Additional Examples on 


Observation 


. 5. — Analyze. 


Parse. 


3 m or 
I 


fi P 


aux 7 rfc (or) 

will either 


4 ir it fu lp 

go 


3 m or f lp ap (7) 

myself, 


7 send and go 

or (wilt) 


4 ir fu lp 


2 EC 


1 m or f o otv. 








send 


a 


servant. 









Either does not connect the words, but should be parsed as refer- 
ring to or, to which it is added, to mark the connection more 
strongly. 

" He neither reads nor writes. I know not whether he will go or 
not (will not go). Though he is poor, yet he is respected. The 
pupil both respects and loves his teacher." 

£66. MODES AND TENSES.— Subjunctive Mode. 

1. The Subjunctive Mode does not differ inform from the Indicative 
or Potential Mode, except in the past tense of the verb. to be, the past 
tense of the progressive form, and the past tense of the passive voice. 

Past Tense. If I were; if I were loving; if I were loved. 

2. It is improper to use that form of the Subjunctive Mode in which 
shall, will, or should is omitted, unless both doubt and futurity are im- 
plied in the Subjunctive clause ; as, "If he study, he does not improve." 
If he study, is that form of the Subjunctive Mode in which shall is 
omitted ; and the expression implies both doubt and future time. But 
as doubt only is implied in the preceding sentence, the expression " If 
he study," is improper, and it should be, "If he studies.'" 

Correct the following Errors. 

"If the boat be new, I will go in it (is). If it be true, we will be 



SYNTAX. 191 

gratified (is). He is respected, though he deserve it not (deserves). He 
does not thrive, though he work (ivories)." 

Correct, the following Errors. Doubt and futurity. 

" They -will go unless it rains (rain). He will not be pardoned unless 
he repents (repent). You may know on to-morrow, if the messenger 
comes (come). If he acquires riches, they will corrupt him (acquire)." 

Note. The word subjunctive means subjoined to. The Subjunctive 
Mode is always foun^l in a subjoined clause, introduced by a conjunction. 
The subjoined clause is often placed before the clause on which it 
depends. Take some of the sentences above. 

Principal clauses. Subjoined clauses. 

I will go in i*:. If the boat is new. 

We will be gratified. If it is true. 

He is respected. Though he deserves it not. 

They will go. Unless it rain. 
The clauses are connected by the conjunctions if, though, unless. 

3. The conjunction is sometimes omitted before the Subjunctive 
Mode ; as 

Were I, for If I were. 

Had he, for If he had. 

Could I, for f I could. 

g 67. IMPERATIVE MODE. 

1. This mood is sometimes used in the first person plural, and in the 
third person singular and plural ; as, 

Turn we to survey lp pi. 

Fall he that must 3p s. 

And live the rest 3p pi. 

g 68. TENSES. 

1. Be careful to use the proper form in each tense. 

Correct the following Errors inform. 

Let the teacher read the sentence, and the class answer in concert. 

"The glass was broke. The boy come yesterday. The house was 

shook. The wind Mowed hard. He has arose. He become angry. A 

misfortune had befell him. A leader was chose. The man has began to 

work. The messenger come last night. I seen him yesterday. A shower 



192 SYNTAX. 

of rain had fell. A letter had been wrote. A hat was gave to the 
beggar. He knoiced nothing. The ball was throwed. The huntsman 
bio iced his horn. He was slinged by a bee. The girl drawed the water* 
A thief has stole my hat. I beseeched. Thou brungest. It bursted. We 
creeped. You fleed: They hewn. I beaten. Thou begun. He bidden. 
We eftme. You draicn. They driven. The bird has ./few away. The 
man has forsook me. The river was /roze. He has went home. The 
sun has rose. A speech was spoke. The witness has swore to a lie. 
The servant taken it home yesterday. The book was tore. He has wore 
my coat. The composition was well wrote. # We have saw many curi- 
osities. The greyhound outrun the deer." 

Lie, lay, sit, set. 
Lie means to recline. Lie (a regular verb), to tell an untruth. Lay 
means to place. Sit means to rest on a seat. Set means to place. 

Correct the folloiving Errors. 
"Lie the paper on the desk. The paper lags on the desk. Sit the 
water-bucket on the stand. The water-bucket sets on the stand." 

2. The present indicative is used in speaking of what is generally 
true. 

Correct the Errors. 

" The doctor said that fever always produced thirst (produces). The 
preacher said that vice always occasioned misery (occasions). It is a 
common saying, 'that a calm always followed a storm' (follows)." 

3. The present indicative is sometimes used to express past events. 

Analyze. Parse. 

"The general enters the territory, defeats the enemy, ravages the 
country, and returns home to triumph." (To triumph is governed by 
the preposition in order, understood.) 

4. After when, as soon as, till, after, before, and after relative pronouns, 
it is used to express future events ; as, " We will hear the news when 
he comes." 

5. The present of the potential expresses present possibility, or 
liberty, power, or necessity of performing a future act ; as, 

I may write present possibility ] 

He may go present liberty { of performing 

You can write present power | afutureact 

We must write present necessity J 



SYNTAX. 193 

6. The past tense of the potential mode may refer to the present, 
past, or future time. 

Analyze. Parse. 

Present. " I would aid you now, if I could." 

Past. M I could not aid you then ; I was unable." 

Future. " If he would stay a day, I would go with him." 

7. The past tense of the subjunctive mode is used to express either 
present, past, or future time. 

Analyze. Parse. 

"If it xoere not so, I would have told you." (Present.) " If he wrote 
that letter, he deserves credit." (Past.) "I would walk now, or this 
evening, if it did not rain." (Present or Future.) 

8. The present of the infinitive is used when the time expressed by 
it is the same as that of the governing verb, or future, in respect to it. 

9. The perfect of the infinitive mode should be used when the time 
expressed by it takes place before the time of the governing verb. 

Exercises on Observations 8 and 9. 

Correct the Errors. 

" I found him better than I expected to have found him." The per- 
fect of the infinitive to have found, relates to time which took place 
before the time of the governing verb expected. But the finding must 
be future with respect to the expectation ; therefore, the present tense, 
to find, should have been used; thus, "I found him better than I ex- 
pected to find him." 

8. I wished to have written a letter. I intended to have written last 
week. I hoped to have met with you. They desired Jo have seen you. 
He was commanded to have done it." 

9. "It would have pleased me to hear the news sooner. It would 
have cost him his life to venture farther. It would have benefited me 
to take a bath every morning. It was wrong to be treated with so much 
indifference." 

10. In order to use properly words and phrases which, in point of 
time, relate to each other, we must observe what the sense requires. 

Correct. Analyze. Parse. 

" I have visited Washington last summer." The visiting was finished 
in past time, not in present ; therefore the past tense visited should have 
been used, and not the present perfect tense, have visited. 

17 



194 SYNTAX. 

" I have seen the work more than a month ago {saw). This mode of 
expression has been formerly much admired (was). If I had have seen 
him (omit have). Philosophers have made great discoveries in the last 
century (omit have). He has been much afflicted last year (was). He 
was much afflicted this 3 r ear (has been). The Druid priests have claimed 
great powers (omit have). My brother has recently been to Philadel- 
phia (was recently at). Charles is grown considerably since I have seen 
him (has grown). £ 37. 3. (Saw.) Payment was at length made, but 
no reason was assigned for its being so long postponed (having been). 
They were arrived an hour before we reached the city (had). The 
workmen will complete the building by midsummer (will have completed). 
This curious piece of workmanship was preserved, and shown to stran- 
gers for more than fifty years past (has been). I had rather write than 
beg (would). Lord, that I might receive my sight (may). If I might 
attain unto the resurrection of the dead (may). I feared that I should 
have lost the parcel before I arrived (should lose). It would have afforded 
me no satisfaction, if I could perform it (could have performed). This 
dedication may serve for almost any book that has, is, or shall be pub- 
lished (has been, or will be published)." 

\ 

I 69. SUCH. SO. 

1. Such expresses quality or kind ; so expresses a degree of quality. 
The former is an adjective ; the latter, an adverb. 

Correct. Analyze. Parse. 
"I never saw such a bad boy (so bad a boy). Did you ever see such 
large trees (trees so large). He is such an extravagant young man, that 
I cannot associate with him (so extravagant a young man, or he is a 
young man so extravagant)." 

§ 70. PREPOSITIONS. 

Correct in Concert. Analyze. Parse. 

" She finds a difficulty of fixing her mind (in). Her sobriety is no 
derogation to her understanding (from). There was no water, and he 
died for thirst (of). He is resolved of going to the Persian court (on). 
He was actually dependent of the Papal crown (on). He was eager of 
recommending it (in). It was worthy observation (insert of after 
worthy). The rain has been falling of a long time (omit of). He found 
the greatest difficulty of writing (in). (A taste o/a thing implies actual 



SYNTAX. 195 

enjoyment. A taste for a thing implies a capacity for enjoyment.) He 
had a taste o/such studies, and pursued them {for). This had a much 
greater share of inciting him {in). You have bestowed favors to them 
(on). He accused the minister for betraying the Dutch {of having 
betrayed). He has an abhorrence to that figure {of). There is a great 
change to the better {for). It was your prejudice to my cause (against). 
The English were different then to what they are at present (from). 
He acts in compliance to his declaration (with). It is more than they 
thought for (of). He was reconciled with the king (to). They have a 
resemblance with each other (to). It is conformable with custom (to). 
The history of Peter is agreeable with the sacred texts (to). I should 
not have thought on it (of). You may take from the heap, without 
making any alteration upon it (in). We could not confide on them (in). 
He was made much on at Argos (of). If policy can prevail upon force 
(over). I do likewise dissent with the examiner (from). They should 
be informed in some parts of his character (about or concerning). Upon 
such occasions as fell into their cognizance (under). That variety of 
factions into which we were still engaged (in). He restored me into 
favor {to). He could have profited from his experience (by). He could 
not forbear from appointing the pope (omit from). He favored a strict 
observance after times and fashions (of). Neither of them shall make 
me swerve out of the path (from). Ye blind guides, which strain at a 
gnat, and swallow a camel (out). The boy was known under the name 
of the idler (by). I have no occasion of his services (for). His excuse 
was admitted of by his master (omit of)." 

1. Words expressing motion or tendency towards a place, are fol- 
lowed by into instead of in. 

" He fell in the river {into). The ball was thrown in the house (into). 
The boy was cast in a pit (into)." 

Most of the preceding examples are taken from Murray. 

I 71. A LIST OF COMMON ERRORS, 

Taken from various sources, principally from Kirkham, Butler, and 
Bullions. 

Let the members of the class answer in concert. 

Correct the Errors. 
The teacher will read out the examples. 
" The alone God (one). ? Taint no better than hizzen (it is — his). Aint 



196 SYNTAX. 

you gwine home (are — not going)? Do that by any manner of means 
(omit manner of). Izzent that line writ well (is not — well written) ? 
School takes up at nine o'clock (begins). School lets out at five o'clock 
(is dismissed). Where is John at (omit at) ? His argument was based 
on this fact (was founded). What is the heft of your load (weight) 1 
Have you saw him (seen) ? I have saw him wunst (seen — once). I cal- 
culate to leave town soon (intend). He has a chunk of bread (piece). 
I done my task (have done). Have you efrc? yours (done) ? Did you see 
that great big rat (very large) ? I have done torn my book (omit done). 
Intemperance will use up a man (destroy). The landlord keeps a clever 
house (good). He conducts well (conducts himself). I never took notice 
to it (/ did not notice it). I wish I hadw'i! did it (not done). Howsumever, 
I dore'2 &eer (omit swm — not care). They can'£ skeer me (raotf scare). ~Dorft 
scrouge me (noi crowd). I didn'i #o to do it (wotf intend). Aint that a 
good hand-write (is not — hand-writing) ? I knowed what he meant, but I 
weuer let on (knew — said nothing). It is a long mile (somewhat more than). 
I thought it was wwZe a short mile (supposed — Zess than a). Carry the horse 
to water (lead). Tote the wood to the house (carry). 

"I have made two hundred bushels of corn (raised). He has run 
against a snag (got into a difficulty). Is that your plunder, stranger 
(baggage, sir) ? Did you get shet of your tobacco (dispose) ? Who hoped 
you to sell it (helped) ? The water has raised three feet (risen) ? The 
sick man is some better (somewhat). The man didn't say nothing much 
(the man did not say much). The runaway was nowheres- to be found 
(nowhere). He cannot see any with one eye (at all). I think a heap of 
him (much). Solomon was mighty wise (very). He was mad with me 
(angry). I disremember the names (forget). The thing was unbeknown 
to me (unknown). This Aere book is mine (omit Aere)^ That there comb 
is Aem (omit there — hers). Do like me (as I do, or like as I do). He 
chaws tobacco (chews). Which did you say (what) ? They walked a 
little ways (way). It cost better than ten dollars (more). He is cracked 
up as a great orator (represented). We Aaye #o2 to study (must). My 
shoe is fixed (mended). He is in a bad^z (condition). He is considerable 
of a scholar (a pretty good). 

" His farm was convenient to mine (close). He is a tfecen* writer (pretty 
good). Her situation was distressing to a degree (extremely distressing). 
A total destitution of capacity (want). The United States, or either of 
them (any). Mr. John Long, Esq. (omit i!/r.) This answers equally as 
well as that (just). I ezpectf he is dead (think). Will you fix these 
things for me (arrange) ? What do folks think of it (people) ? Talents 



SYNTAX. . 197 

of the highest grade [order). I guess I will go to-morrow (think). It 
would illy accord (ill). He preached a lengthy sermon. [This word, 
originally an Americanism, is found in the London Quarterly Review, 
in Byron's works, and in the dictionaries of Knowles, Smart, and Reid. 
The preceding expression is therefore correct.] I had rather go than 
stay (would). I cannot but believe it (omit not). The members are 
notified (notice is given to the members). The preceptor learned me gram- 
mar (taught). His funeral was preached (supply sermon). Whether I 
read or whether /play (omit whether 1). He is done gone (omit done). 
The merchant has paid all of his debts (omit of). They will travel no 
further (farther). The speaker added nothing farther (further). How 
do you do (omit do) ? Says I (said). In our midst (in the midst of us). 
" I wanted to see her very badly (much). The Greeks altackled the 
Trojans (attacked). How is the sick man ? He is very bad off (ill 
indeed). Does his mother take on much (grieve) ? That hungry man 
feels like eating (inclined to eat). They made out they had nothing (pre- 
tended). Use a preventative (preventive). John beats James in learning 
(excels). John is a right good boy (very). A thick pair of boots (a 
pair of thick boots). A new barrel of flour (a barrel of new flour). Rain 
descends down. The smoke rises up (omit down — up). He was writing, 
when I arrived, on his slate (he was writing on his slate ivhen I arrived)." 

I 72. LESSONS IN ANALYZING AND PARSING. 

Note. The student will observe that the same word may belong 
to several of the parts of speech, according to the manner in which 
it is used. The truth of this remark is evident in the following 
sentence from Kirkham : " The painter dips his paint brush in 
paint, to paint the carriage." In the first instance, paint is used 
to qualify or describe the noun brush, and is, therefore, an adjec- 
tive; in the nextf place, it is used to name a mixture, and is, there- 
fore, a noun; and lastly, it expresses the action performed, and is, 
therefore, a verb. 

LESSON I.— Analyze. Parse. § 63 and 64. 
" That." 
1. That is a relative pronoun, when who or which may be used 
for it without destroying the sense ; as, 

2nclm3rlm4it 5 4 lo otv. 

" The man that acts wisely deserves praise." ( Who may be 
used in place of that.) 

17* 



198 SYNTAX. 

2. That is an adjective when it qualifies a noun ; as, " That tree 
is tall." 

3. In other instances that is a conjunction, and connects 
sentences ; as, "We eat that we may live." 

"But." 

4. But is an adverb, when it means only ; as, "I had but one 
opportunity." 

5. But, in the sense of accept, is a preposition; as, "Whence all 
but him had fled." 

6. But is a conjunction, when it connects sentences; as, "I will 
go, but you may stay." 

" As." 

7. As may be parsed as a relative pronoun, when it follows many, 
such, or same ; as, " Give a reward to such persons as deserve it." 

8. As is an adverb, when joined to an adjective, or an adverb, in 
the sense of so; as, " This tree is as tall as that tree is." 

9. As in other cases is a conjunction, or conjunctive adverb ; as, 
" He acted as he was directed." 

" Either." 

10. Either is a conjunction, when it refers to or; as, "You may 
either go or stay." 

11. Either is an adjective when it means one of the two ; as, 
" You may go either way." 

" Both." 

12. Both is a conjunction when it refers to and; as, "He both 
studies and plays." 

13. Both is an adjective when it qualifies a noun ; as, " I saw 
both the ladies." 

"Yet." 

14. Yet is a conjunction, when it follows though; as, "Though 
he slay me, yet will I trust in him." 

15. Yet in other cases is an adverb ; as, " She is yet single." 

LESSON II. 
" Since." 

16. Since is & preposition, when it means after that time; as, 
" I have written a page since he came." (That is, since the time 
at which.) 



SYNTAX. 199 

17. Since is a conjunction when it means because; as, "Two 
yards will cost six dollars, since one yard costs three dollars." 

"For." 

18. For is a conjunction when it means because: as, "He knows 
it, for he was an eye witness of the act." 

19. For in other instances is a preposition ; as, " The man works 
for money." 

"What." 

20. What is a relative pronoun when that which may be substi- 
tuted for it, without destroying the sense ; as, " We should not 
always believe what we hear." [That which may be substituted.) 

21. What is an adjective when it qualifies a noun, either 
expressed or understood ; as, " What book is that (book) ? What 
can we do?" [Thing understood.) 

22. What ! is an interjection when it expresses some emotion ; as, 
" What! shall we be slaves?" 

"Much. More. Most." 

23. More, denoting a greater quantity, is a noun; as, "The 
desire of getting more, is never satisfied." 

24. More and most are adjectives when they relate to a noun; as, 
" There are more people in China than in America. Most persons 
meet with disappointments." 

25. More and most are adverbs when used in comparisons ; as, 
" Peace is more desirable than war. The most temperate persons 
are the most healthy." 

26. Much, denoting a quantity, is a noun ; as, " Where much is 
given, much will be required." 

27. Much is an adjective when it qualifies a noun; as, "He has 
much money." 

28. In other situations much is an adverb; as, "Arithmetic is 
much more useful than Algebra." 

" Then." 
• 29. Then, denoting at that time, is an adverb ; as, "He should 
have paid the money then/' 

30. Then, in the sense of therefore, is a conjunction ; as, " The 
Lord is good ; then let us praise him." 



200 SYNTAX. 



LESSON III. 



2 1 pi 4 pi 1 o otv 5 qadv (more) 5 ce 7 sns 2 

Soft bodies damp the sound much more than hard 

3idfpl. 1 5 lir 1 o otv 

ones. (Damp the sound.) Guilt often casts a damp 

6 (casts and hours) 3 m or f lp pi 'gn (hours) 2 se 1 o- pi op. 2 

over our sprightliest hours. Damp 

1 4 ir it 2. 7 rfc (still) 4 ir it 6 1 o op 

air is unwholesome. Though he is out of danger,. 

7 sns 4 ir it 2. 4 it ps 4 if gprep (in order) 

still he is afraid. He labored - to still the 

1 o otv. 2 1 pi 4 ir it pi 5 2 se. 2 ce 

tumult. /Sfci'W waters are commonly deepest. Better 

4 ir it 1 6 sr n and n 1 o op 7 sns 2 1 6 sr n and n 

is a little with content, than a great deal (is) with 

1 o op. 2 7 2 4 ir it pi 5 6 

anxiety. The gay and dissolute (persons') think little of 

1 o pi op 3 rl pi aux 4 ir it pi 5 6 sr v and pro 3 m or f pi o op. 

the miseries which are stealing softly after them. 

2 1 4fu 2nc loplotv. 3morfpl 4iritpl 

A little attention will rectify some errors. They are 

5 nc 2 rp 7 sns 4 po pi 3 m or f pi 'gn 1 o otv 

yet young, and must suspend their judgment 

5 nc qph (for a while) 1 o op (for) 7 rfc (yet) 3 f 

yet a while. (For a while yet.) Though she 

4 ir it 2 rp 7 2 rp 7 sns 3 f 4 ir it 5 nc 2 rp. 2 

is rich and fair, yet she is not amiable. Many 

1 m or f pi 4 ir it pi 2 ce 7 sns 3 m or f lp pi 4 lp pi 3 m or f pi osv 4 ir it if gp 

persons are better than we suppose them to be. 

lmorfpl 7 1 m or f pi 

(Them to be, otv suppose.) The few and the many 

4 ir pi jno 3 m or f pi 'gn 1 o pi otv. 2 1 pi 4 it pi 

have their prepossessions. Few days pass 

6 2nc loplop. 2 1 4 ir it 2. 

without some clouds. Much money is corrupting. 

4 ir it ip 2p s or pi (R. VII. 1.) 5 7 sns 4 ir it ip 2p s or pi (thou or you) 5. 

Think much and speak little. 



SYNTAX. 201 

4 ir ptp 1 o otv 6 sr n and n loop 7sns aux 5 4 pv ptp. 

He has seen much of the world, and been much caressed. 

{He has been much caressed.) 

LESSON rv. 

3 m 'gn 1 pi 4 ir it pi 2 ce (years) 7 sns 3 f 'gn (years) 

His years are more than hers Qier years are)) 

7 sns 3f 4 ir 2 ce 1 o otv. R. V. 21. 5 ce 3morflppl 

but she has more knowledge. (As) The more we 

4 pv lp pi R. Y. 21. 5 ce qadj 2 3 m or f lp pi 4 ir it po ps lp pi. 

are blessed, the more grateful we should be. 

1 6 sr n and n 1 o otv 1 o ovn aux 5 4 pv. 

The desire of getting more is rarely satisfied. He 

4 ir 2 nc 1 o otv 7 sns 2 no 1 o otv. 3 f 

has equal knowledge, but (he has) inferior judgment. She 

4 ir it 3 m 'gn 1 af (is) 6 sr n and n 1 o op 7 sns 3 m 'gn 1 af (is understood) 

is his inferior in sense, but his equal 

6 sr n and n 1 o op. 2 nc 1 4 3 'gn 1 o otv. 3 m or f lp pi 

in prudence. Every being loves its like. We 

4 ir po lp pi 2 no 2 nc 1 o otv 6 (make and lines) 2 nc 1 o pi op. 

must make a like space between the lines. 

3 m or f lp pi 4 ir it lp pi 5 nc qadj 2 rp (we) 4 if gadj (apt) 2 

We are too apt to like pernicious 

1 o otv. aux 4 ir it po 7 4 it po 7 conj adv sns 4 it. 

company. He may go or stay as he likes. 

3 m or f pi 4 ir it pi 4 it if gprep (in order). 4 ir it adverbial phrase qv (goes). 

They strive to learn. He goes to and fro. 

6 3m 'gn 1 o op 3 m or f lp pi 4 lp pi 3 m or f lp pi 'gn 1 o otv. 

To his wisdom we owe our privilege (owe 

1 4 ir it 2 nc 

to wisdom). The proportion is ten (pounds, feet, &c.) 

6 sr n and n 2 nc. 4 ptp 3 m or f pi o otv 

to one {pound, foot, &c). He has served them 

6 (served and ability) 3 m 'gn 2 se 1 o op. 7 conj adv sns 3 m or f lp pi 

with his utmost ability. When we 

4 ir lp pi 3 m or f lp pi 'gn 1 o otv 2 nc 1 4 pv. 

do our utmost, no more is required. 



202 



SYNTAX. 



As a conjunction, when connects no more is required, and we do 
our utmost. As an adverb, it qualifies the two verbs is required 
and do. Read the sentence with its clauses transposed. 

3 m or f lp 4 it fu lp 7 sns 3ni or f lp . 4 ir lp 1 4 ir 

I will submit ; for I know submission brings 

1 o otv. 

peace. {Know has for its object submission brings peace). 

3 4 ir it 2 rph 6 3 m or f lp pi 'gn 1 o op 

It is good for our health 

a phrase in apposition with the pronoun it. $ 65, R. I. 3. 

to be temperate. {Temperate is used 

8 6 2 ce 1 o pi op. 

abstractly. K,. V. 2.) ! for better times. (I wish for 

4 p v 7 rfc (and) 6 3 m 'gn 2 nc 



better times.) 

1 o op 7 sns 6 

account, and on 



He is esteemed, both on his own 

3 dem o op 6 sr p and n (that and parents) 3 m 'gn 

that of his 



1 m and f o pi op. 3 idf m or f pi 6 sr p and p 

parents. Both of 

1 o otv. • 1 4 ir it ps 2 1 af. 

praise. Yesterday was a fine day. 

5 nc 5 nc. 3 m or f lp ' 4 ir it fu lp 5 nc. 

out yesterday. I shall write to-morrow. 

4 ir it po 2 ce 7 sns 1 

may be brighter than to-day (is). 



3 m or f pi o op 4 pi 

them deserve 



3 m or f lp 4 ir it ps lp 

I rode 



To-morrow 









LESSON V.. 










Contractions. 


* 


1, 


They've, 


for 


They have. 


9. Ev'ning, for Evening. 


2. 


I'd, 


a 


I had or 


10. Flow'rs, 


1 - Flowers. 








would. 


11. 'Gainst, ' 


' Against. 


3. 


I'll, 


(< 


I will. 


12. Th', 


' The. 


4. 


He's, 


M 


He is. 


13. Tho', 


' Though. 


5. 


'Tis, 


CI 


It is. 


14. Med'cine, 


" Medicine 


G. 


I'm, 


« 


I am. 


15. Wash'd, 


" Washed. 


7. 


Can't, 


«< 


Cannot. 


16. O'er, 


" Over. 


8. 


Won't, 


" 


Will not. 







Note. Avoid such contractions in writing prose. 



SYNTAX. 203 

The Eose. 
1. 

The rose had been wash'd, just wash'd in a show'r, 

Which Mary to Anna convey'd ; 
The plentiful moisture encumber' d the flower, 

And weigh'd down its beautiful head. 

2. 
The cup was all fill'd, and the leaves were all wet ; 

And it seem'd, to a fanciful view, 
To weep for the buds it had left with regret, 

On the flourishing bush where it grew. 

3. 

I hastily seiz'd it, unfit as it was 

For a nosegay, so dripping and drown'd; 

And swinging it rudely, too rudely, alas ! 
I snapp'd it — it fell to the ground. 

4. 
And such, I exclaimed, is the pitiless part, 

Some act by the delicate mind ; 
Regardless of wringing and breaking a heart, 

Already to sorrow resign'd. 

5. 

This elegant rose, had I shaken it less, 

Might have bloom' d with its owner awhile ; 

And the tear that is wip'd with a little address, 

May be followed, perhaps, by a smile. Cowper. 

Analyzed. 
1. 
The first four lines contain four clauses, which form a compound 
sentence. 

1. " The rose had been washed, just washed in a shower." Which 
connects 1 and 2. 

2. " Mary conveyed which to Anna." And, understood, connects 2 
and 3. 



204 SYNTAX. 

3. " The plentiful moisture encumbered the flower." And connects 
3 and 4. 

4. " The plentiful moisture weighed down its beautiful head." 

First Clause. 

Rose is the thing chiefly spoken of, that is, the subject; and since 
the verb is passive, rose is also the object. It is modified or limited by 
the adjective the, which shows that it is some particular rose. Had been 
xoashed is the verb, which expresses the state of its subject, rose. The 
word washed, in the second place, is a mere repetition, having the same 
subject as had been washed. It is modified by the adverb just, showing 
when it had been washed. It is also modified by the adjunct in a shower, 
which shows how it had been washed. 

What is the principal thing spoken of? The rose. By what is it 
limited? By the. What words affirm something of it? Had been 
washed. When had it been washed ? Just washed. How had it been 
washed ? It had been washed in a shower. 

Second Clause. 

Who is spoken of as acting? Mart, the subject. What word ex- 
presses the action? Conveyed, the verb. What word is the object of 
conveyed? Which is the object, relating to rose for its antecedent, and 
connecting the clauses 1 and 2. What is the adjunct of conveyed? To 
Anna. What does to show the relation between ? Conveyed and Anna. 
What word is the object of the preposition to ? Anna. 

Third Clause. 

What word is the subject or nominative? Moisture. By what is it 
modified? By the adjectives the and plentiful. Name the verb. En- 
cumbered. Name the object. Flower, modified by the. What connects 
the 2d and 3d clauses. And understood. 

Fourth Clause. 

What word connects the fourth clause to the third ? The conjunc- 
tion and. What word is the subject in the fourth clause? The noun 
moisture, understood. Name the verb, and tell what modifies it. 
Weighed is the verb, modified by the adverb down, and the object head. 
Name the object, and tell by what it is modified. Head is the object, 
modified by the pronoun its in the possessive case, and also by the 
adjective beautiful. 



SYNTAX. 205 

2. 

1. The cup was all filled, (and) 

2. The leaves were all wet, (and) 

3. It seemed to a fanciful view, to iveep for the buds (whic'i) 

4. It had left with regret, on the flourishing bush (where) 

5. It grew. 

3. 

1. I hastily seized it, so dripping and drowned, for a nosegay (though, 
understood), 

2. It was so unfit (for a nosegay as) 

3. It was ; (and) 

4. I swinging it rudely, too rudely, alas ! snapped it — 
(Connection broken by the dash.) 

5. It fell to the ground. 

4. 

1. I exclaimed, And the pitiless part is such, (that, a relative under- 
stood). 

2. Some (persons), regardless of wringing and breaking a heart 
already resigned to sorrow act by the delicate mind. 

5. 

1. This elegant rose might have bloomed with its owner (for) awhile, 
(if, understood). 

2. I had shaken it less ; (And connects 1st and 2d clauses to 3d.) 

3. The tear may be followed by a smile, (that, relative) 

4. That is wiped with a little address. 

Note. A conjunction or conjunctive adverb, stands between two 
clauses as a mere connective, but forms no part of the following 
clause. 

A relative pronoun serves to connect clauses, and is always in- 
cluded as a part of the clause which follows it. 

Parsed. 
1. 

1 4 pv psp 5 nc 4 py psp 6 1 o op 

The rose had been washed, just washed in a shower, 

3 rl o otv 1 pn f 6 1 pn f op 4 ps 

Which Mary to Anna conveyed; 
18 



206 SYNTAX. 

2 1 4 ps 1 otv 

The plentiful moisture encumbered the flower, 

7 sns 4 ps 5 nc 3 'gn 2 . 1 o otv. 

And weighed down its beautiful head. 



1 aux 5 nc 4 pv ps 7 sns 1 pi 4 ir it ps pi 5 nc qadj 2 

The cup was all filled, and the leaves were all wet, 

7 sns 3 4 it ps 6 2 loop 

And it seemed to a fanciful view, 

4 ir it if (seemed) 6 1 o pi op 3 4 ir psp 6 loop 

To weep for the buds (ivhich) it had left with regret, 

6 2 1 o op 7 conj adv sns 3 4 ir itv ps. 

On the flourishing bush where it grew. 



3 m lp 5 4 ps lp 3 o otv 2 rp (it) 7 sns 3 4 ir it ps ■ 

1 hastily seized it, unfit as it was 

6 1 o op 5 nc qadj 2 nc rp (it) 7 2 Slc rp (it) 

For a nosegay, so dripping and drowned, 

7 ens 3 ir ing rp (I) 3 o otv 5 5 nc qadv 5 8 

And swinging it rudely, too rudely, alas ! 

3 m lp 4 ps lp 3 o otv 3 4 ir it ps 6 1 o op. 

I snapped it — it fell to the ground. 

4. 

7 sns 2 nc (part) 3 m lp 4 ps lp 4 ir it 2 nc 1 

And such, I exclaimed, is the pitiless part (that) 

2 nc 4 pi 6 2 1 o op 

Some (persons) act by the delicate mind, 

2 nc (persons) 6 sr adj and vn 1 o op 7 1 o op 1 o ovn 

Regardless of wringing and breaking a heart, 

5 nc (resigned) 6 sr par and n 1 o op 4 ps par. 

Already to sorrow resigned. 



/ 



SYNTAX. 207 

5. 
2 nc 2 1 aux Smlp 4 ir sb psp lp 3 o otv 5 ce 

This elegant rose, had I shaken it less, 

4 it po psp 6 3'gn 1 foop 1 o op 

Might have bloomed with its owner (for) a while ; 

7 sns 1 3 rl 4 pv 6 2 1 o op 

And the tear that is wiped with a little address, 

aux aux 4 pv po 5 nc 6 1 o op. 

May be followed, perhaps, by a smile. 

Composition. 

As an exercise in composition, the student may write, in his own 
words, an account of what is said in the foregoing piece of poetry, 
adding such thoughts as may occur to him. 

Model. 
The Rose. 

While I was conversing with Miss Anna this morning, in the parlor, 
the servant-girl, Mary, presented her with a beautiful rose, just taken 
from the bush. It had just been washed in a shower, and the rain, drops 
which filled its cup, and were still upon its leaves, caused the fair 
flower to bend its head. Its bended head pictured, to my imagination, 
a person of down-cast look, in sorrow at being forced away from coun- 
try, friends, and kindred, and doomed to pass a life of servitude 
amongst strangers. The rain-drops seemed to be tears, which were 
shed on account of its being rudely torn from the society of kindred 
buds, on the flourishing bush where it grew. Notwithstanding the 
unfitness, yet, captivated by its beauty, I eagerly seized it for a nose- 
gay ; but swinging it too rudely, alas ! I snapped it — it fell to the 
ground. Just as I acted by the rose, some persons act by the delicate 
mind. Without sympathy, they wound the feelings of others who are 
already in distress, provided their own selfish purposes may be effected. 

If this rose had been tenderly handled, it might, for some time, have 
bloomed with its owner ; and a sweet sympathy for the mind in sorrow, 
■nay restore cheei'fulness. 



208 PUNCTUATION. 



PUNCTUATION. 

I 73. 1. Punctuation treats of the points and marks used in 
written composition. 

2. These points and marks show where pauses are proper, and 
they likewise aid in showing more clearly the relation of words, 
and the sense of a sentence. 

3. The principal points or marks are I 

1. The comma , shortest pause. 

2. The semicolon ; the next longer. 

3. The colon : longer than the semicolon. 

4. The period . end of a sentence. 

5. The note of interrogation ? a question mark. 

6. The note of exclamation ! emotion. 

7. The dash — - 

8. The parenthesis ( ) 

§ 74. THE COMMA ( , ). 
The comma is the shortest pause. 

RULE I. 

The comma is used between the clauses of a compound sentence 
when not very closely connected. 

Examples. — Write the Exercises. 

Separate the clauses by placing a comma in the line, beneath the 
star. (The star is used to show where other points are required.) 

" Calm was the day* and the scene delightful." (Reasons.) "God 
said *. ' Let there be light' * and there was light. He spoke* and it 
was done. He commanded* and it stood fast. His glory covers the 
heavens* and the earth is full of his praise. This man might have 
been set at liberty* if he had not appealed unto Csesar. He who pre- 
serves me* to whom I owe my being* whose I am* and whom I 
serve* is eternal." 

RULE II. 

When the subject has several words connected with it, a comma 
should precede the verb ; as, 



PUNCTUATION. 209 

" The sublime language of the sacred Scriptures* should be read 
"With care. The structure of the goldfinch's nest* is curious." 

RULE III. 

Words and phrases which break the connection of a simple sen- 
tence, should, in general, be separated by a comma both before and 
after them ; as, 

" His work is* in many respects* very imperfect. It is* therefore* 
not much approved. It is* however* much used." 

RULE IV. 

Words in apposition which are modified, and words put absolute 
with their adjuncts, should be separated by commas ; as, 

" La Fayette* a native of France* was a friend of liberty. To 
confess the truth* I was in fault. The son* his father being dead* 
succeeded. Boys* prepare your lessons. The prophets* where are 
they ?" 

RULE V. 

When there are more words than two in the same construction, 
they should be separated by commas ; as, 

"Ah! what avails all that art* fortune* enterprise* can bring* 
if envy* scorn* remorse* or pride* wring the bosom." 

RULE VI. 

Pairs of words are separated from each other by a comma ; as, 
" Seed-time and harvest* cold and heat* summer and winter* day 
and night* shall not cease." 

RULE VII. 

An explanatory relative clause, when it does not restrict the 
antecedent, and a participial clause which does not qualify the 
object of the verb, should be set off by the comma; as, 

" The name of Washington* who was the father of his country* 
will be long remembered. The captain* fearing a storm* made prepa- 
rations accordingly." 

RULE VIII. 

The comma should be used where words are omitted, which are 
necessary to complete the grammatical construction ; as, 

18* 



210 PUNCTUATION. 

" From law arises security ; from security* curiosity ; from curi- 
osity* knowledge." 

RULE IX. 

Words placed in opposition to each other, or with some 
marked variety, are separated by the comma ; as, 

" Though deep* yet clear; though gentle* yet not dull; 
Strong* without rage; without o'erflowing* full." 

RULE X. 
A word repeated for the sake of emphasis should be set off by a 
comma ; as, 

" Happy* happy* happy pair ! Ah ! no* no* no* never." 

RULE XL 
An adjective after a noun, with the words depending upon the 
adjective, should be separated from the rest of the sentence by 
commas ; as, 

"A person* fond of study* loves retirement.'- 

I 75. SEMICOLON ( ; ). 

When a pause is required longer than that represented by the 
comma, the semicolon should be used ; as, 

" Straws swim on the surface* but pearls lie at the bottom." 

I 76. COLON ( : ). 

When the sense of the sentence is complete, and the writer 
wishes to make some additional remark, the colon should be 
employed ; as, 

" The Mississippi is a large river* it is very deep." 

I 77. PERIOD ( . ). 

The period is used at the close of a sentence, and after abbrevi- 
ations ; as, 

' ' Temperance promotes health* A* M*, Master of Arts. U* S* N*, 
United States' Navy. 

§78. NOTE OF INTERROGATION (?). 

The note of interrogation is used after a direct question, but not 
after an indirect question ; as, 



PUNCTUATION. 211 

Direct question. u Who comes there * " 

Indirect question. " The teacher asked me "why I failed*" 

I 79. NOTE OF EXCLAMATION ( ! ). 

The note of exclamation is used after some emotion ; as, 
"Vile worm* Oh madness* pride* impiety*" 
Sometimes this mark is repeated, as a sign of great wonder or 
surprise; as, 

" That lying editor has told the truth * * * " 

3 80. DASH( ). 

The dash is generally used when there is a sudden or unexpected 
change of subject ; as, 

"We have the strength to be free — and the will." 

I 81. PARENTHESIS ( () ). 

The parenthesis is used to include explanatory words, which may 
be omitted without injury to the sense of a sentence ; as, 
"Know, then, this truth, *enough for man to know,* 
Virtue alone is happiness below." 

I 82. OTHER MARKS. 

The Apostrophe (' ) is used to denote either the possessive case, 
or the omission of some letter or letters; as, 

" My father*s house." *Tis, for it is. 

The Hyphen (-) is used between the parts of compound words; 
or, at the end of a line, when part of a word is written in the next 
line; as, 

" Cotton*mill. He that justifieth the wicked, and he that con* 
demneth the just, even they both are an abomination." 

Note. In dividing a word at the end of a line, let the hyphen be 
placed between syllables, and not between letters of the same 
syllable. 

The Cedilla is a mark placed under q, to show that it sounds 
like s ; as, 

Facade, pronounced fasade. 



212 * PUNCTUATION. 

The Diaeresis ( • • ) is placed over the latter of two vowels, to 
show that they do not form a diphthong; as, "Laocoon." 

The Accent (') is used to denote stress of voice on a syllable; 
as, "Demand." 

A short syllable is marked with a Breve (°) ; as, " Popular." 
A long syllable is marked with a Macron ( " ) ; as, " Puny." 

The Ellipsis , or * * * * denotes that some letters or words 

are omitted ; as, 

C s, for Charles; k g, for king. 

The Brace ■] is used to connect words which have a common 
relation ; as, 

f.He. 
Third person, -j It 

L They. 

The Caret A is used in writing to show that something is omitted, 
and inserted above ; as, 

"The earth prod A uces fruit." 

The Section § is used to mark the divisions of a book or chapter. 

The Paragraph f was formerly used to denote the beginning of 
a new subject ; but paragraphs are now distinguished by com- 
mencing a new line. 

Quotation marks " " distinguish the words taken from another; as, 

Pope says, * The proper study of mankind is man.* 

A quotation within a quotation, is marked by single commas * \ 

The Index, or Hand JgSH? 13 , refers to some remarkable passage. 

Crotchets, or Brackets [], enclose words for explanation or cor- 
rection ; as, 

" Brown *the grammarian* says so." 

The Asterisk, or little star * the Obelisk f , the Double-Dagger J, 
Parallels ||, letters and figures, refer to notes in the margin, or at 
the bottom of the page. 



PROSODY. 213 

PART IV. 

PROSODY. 

\ 83. Prosody treats of accent, quantity, and the rules of versi- 
fication. 

Accent, -which is stress laid upon a syllable in a word, must be 
distinguished from emphasis, which is stress laid upon a word. 

Quantity is the time occupied in pronouncing a syllable. A long 
syllable is equal to two short ones. The Greeks and Romans paid 
great attention to long and short syllables in poetry ; but in Eng- 
lish, the syllables of a line of poetry are either accented or unac- 
cented. 

Versification. 

Versification is the arrangement of a certain number of accented 
and unaccented syllables in lines, according to certain rules. The 
word verse is derived from the Latin word verto, which means to 
turn. Properly, it means a line of poetry; because when the mea- 
sure of a line is complete, the reader or writer turns back to com- 
mence another. But the word verse is also used to signify a short 
division of any piece of composition ; and it may likewise mean 
poetry. 

Rhyme is the correspondence of sounds in the last words or 
syllables of verses. 

Blank Verse is verse without rhyme. 

A Stanza is a division of a poem consisting of several lines or 
verses. 

A Couplet, or Distich, consists of two verses making complete 
sense. 

x\ Triplet consists of three verses which rhyme together. 

A Foot is a division of a verse consisting of two or three syllables. 

The principal feet are — 

1. An Iambus ° . 

2. A Trochee °. 

3. An Anapest ° " 



214 PROSODY. 

An Iambus has the first syllable unaccented, and the last 
accented ; as, Demand. 

A Trochee has the first syllable accented, and the last unaccented ; 
as, Tuneful. 

An Anapest has the first and the second syllable unaccented, and 
the third accented ; as, Serenade. 



SCANNING. 

Scanning is separating verses into the feet which compose 
them. 

Iambic Verse ° '. 

Iambic Verse may consist of one foot, or of two, three, four, five, 
six, or seven feet. 

1. One foot: 

How bright 
The light. 
Sometimes a short syllable is added ; as, 
Disdaining, 
Complaining, 
Consenting, 
Repenting. 

2. Two feet : 

What place | is here ! 
What scenes | appear ! 

Additional syllable : 

Upon | a moun | tain, 
Beside | a fount j ain. 

3. Three Iambuses: 

In pla | ces far | or near. 
Or fa [ mous, or | obscure. 
Syllable added : 

Our hearts | no Ion | ger Ian | guish. 

4. Four Iambuses : 

The joys | above | are un | derstood 
And rel | ished on | ly by | the good. 



PROSODY. 215 

Syllable added : 

Or if | it be | thy will | and pleas | ure, 
Direct | my plough | to find | a treas | ure. 

Sometimes a syllable is omitted in the first foot : 
Praise | to God, | immor | tal praise. 

5. Five Iambuses — heroic measure. 

The lamb | thy ri | ot dooms | to bleed | to-day. 
Syllable added : 

A guar j dian an | gel o'er | his life | presid | ing. 
Trochee in first foot : 

Doubling | his pleas | ures, and | his Gares | divid | ing. 

6. Six Iambuses — called Alexandrine : 

That like | a wound | ed snake | drags its | slow length | along. 

7. Seven Iambuses : 

When all | thy mer | cies, | my God ! | my ri | sing soul | surveys. 

Now written in two lines, the first of four, and the second of 
three feet : 

When all | thy mer | cies, | my God ! 
My ri | sing soul | surveys. 

Trochaic Verse w . 

1. One foot: 

Ranging, 

Changing. 
Long syllable added : 

Tumult | cease ; 
Sink to j peace. 

2. Two Trochees : 

Wishes | rising, 
Thoughts sur | prising. 
Long syllable added : 

In the | days of | old, 
Fables | plainly | told. 

3. Three Trochees, and a long syllable : 



216 PROSODY. 

Fervid | on the | glitt'ring | flood, 
Now the | noontide | radiance | glows. 

Without the long syllable. 

When our | hearts are | mourning. 

4. Four Trochees : 

Round us | roars the | tempest ] louder. 
Long syllable added : 

Idle, | after | dinner, | in his | chair, 
Sat a J farmer, | ruddy, J fat, and | fair. 

5. Five Trochees : 

Virtue's | bright'ning | ray shall | beam for | ever. 

6. Six Trochees : 

On a | mountain, | stretched be | neath a | hoary | willow, 
Lay a | shepherd | swain, and | viewed the | rolling | billow. 

Anapestic Verse ° ° . 

1. One foot : 

On the land 
Let me stand. 

2. Two Anapests : 

For the an' | gel of death 
Spreads his wings' | on the blast. 

Short syllable added : 

He is gone | to the fount | ain 
Which we saw J near the mount | ain. 

3. Three Anapests : 

From the cen | tre all round | to the sea, 
I am lord | of the fowl j and the brute. 

4. Four Anapests : 

At the close | of the day, | when the ham | let is still. 

Short syllable added : 

On the cold | cheek of death, | smiles and ro | ses are blend [ ing. 

Note. The first foot of an Anapestic line may be an Iambus. 



PARSING LESSONS. 217 

Other Feet. 
A Spondee consists of two accented syllables; as, 

Great 7 man'. . 

A Pyrrhic consists of two unaccented syllables; as, 

Ed-it- (6-ri-al). u -. 
A Dactyl has one accented, and two unaccented syllables ; as, 

Cheer'fiilly. u «. 

An Amphibrach consists of three syllables, with the accent on 
the second ; as, 

Elated. «. 

A Tribrach has three unaccented syllables ; as, 

Mem'(o-ra-ble). u w v. 
The different lines in poetry may be composed of different measures, 
and the same line may have different kinds of feet. 



PART V. 

LESSONS IN ANALYZING, PARSING, FALSE SYNTAX, AND 

SCANNING. 



LESSON I. 
Our Native Land. — M. M. B. 

Iambic Verse of four Feet. 

l. I 2. I a. I 4. ' c 
o u « . bean in concert. 

Read the piece in concert. 

1. 
We come, | a youth | ful, hap | py band, 
Rejoic | ing in | our na \ tive land; 
A rich | inher | itance | we claim, 
Our fath | ers' deeds, j our fath | era' fame. 
19 



218 PARSING LESSONS. 



In other lands, we read in story (Syllable added.) 
Are kings and thrones ; but 'tis our glory (Syll. added.) 
That we are free ; — no tyrant's frown 
We fear — no man who wears a croWn. 

3. 
In freedom's cause we'll bravely dare 
To climb the steeps of fame, and share 
A nation's love — a priceless gem ! — 
Who wins it, wants no diadem ! 

Analyzed. See § 63 and § 64. 
1. 
First clause. We, a youthful, happy band, rejoicing in our native 
land, come. 

Second clause. We claim a rich inheritance, our fathers' deeds, 
our fathers' fame. 

2. 

We read in story [that understood), 

Kings and thrones are in other lands ; {but) 

It, that we are free (a phrase ap. with it), is our glory; (the dash 
— breaks the connection.) 

We fear no tyrant's frown (dash — ) 

( We fear, understood) no man {who connects, and serves as 
subject.) 

Who wears a crown ! 

3. 

We'll bravely dare to climb the steeps of fame in freedom's 
cause {and), 

{ We will, understood) share a nation's love, a priceless gem ! 
(dash — ) 

{He understood) wants no diadem {who, connective and subject), 

Who wins it. 

Explanations and References. 

1. Band, 1 ap we, Rule I. Rejoicing, R. XI. Inheritance, 1 o otv 
claim. Deeds, fame, R. I. 



PARSING LESSONS. 219 

2. Kings, thrones, 1. 'Tis, for it is— it, R. VI. Obs. 2. Ex. 
That, R. XIV. Obs. 2. Frown, 1 o otv, fear. Man, 1 o otv, fear 
understood. 

3. We will must be supplied before share. Gem, R. I. Who 
agrees with he, omitted, R. VI., note. Wants su he, understood. 

Definitions. 
Native, born in a country. 

Inheritance, an estate which descends to an heir. 
Tyrant, a ruler who is cruel and unjust. 
Gem, a jewel; something precious. 
Diadem, a crown. 

FALSE SYNTAX. 

Answer in Concert. 
Give a reason for each correction, one student at a time. 
" We comes. "We claims. We reads. We is free. We fears 
no man who wear a crown. He who win it, want no diadem." 

COMPOSITION. 

Our Native Land. 

Name it. Bound it. What sort of a government ? What kind 
of rulers ? How did we obtain it ? Our glory. The best crown 
we can have, &c, or whatever may be suggested to the student's 
mind ; or the student may write in his own words an account of 
what is contained in the piece. 

LESSON II. 
The Bucket. 
no, subject ; tv or itv, verb ; otv, object of the verb. 

Anapestic verse of four feet, with an additional syllable in every 
other line. 
Every sentence must be analyzed, and every word parsed and 
defined.- 



220 PARSING LESSONS. 

1. 

1. How dear ( to this heart | are itv the scenes 00 | of my child | hood, 

2. When fond [ recollec | tion no presents" | them " to view! 

3. The orchard, the meadow, the deep-tangled wildwood, 

4. And every loved spot which " my infancy 110 knew ;" 

5. The wide-spreading pond, and the mill which 00 stood itv by it, 

6. The bridge, and the rock where the cataract 110 fell ; itT 

7. The cot of my father, the dairy-house nigh it, 

8. And e'en the rude bucket which 00 hung itv in the well! 

9. The old oaken bucket, the iron-bound bucket, 

10. The moss-covered bucket which 00 hung 1 " in the well. 

2. 

11. That moss-covered vessel otv I n0 hail" as a treasure, 

12. For often, at noon, when returned from the field, 

13. I n0 found" it the source of an exquisite pleasure, 

14. The purest and sweetest that 0tv nature 00 can yield." 

15. How ardent I°° seized" it, " with hands that were glowing! 

16. And quick to the white-pebbled bottom it 00 fell ; itv 

17. Then soon, with the emblem of truth overflowing, 

18. And dripping with coolness, it n0 rose itv from the well; 

19. The old oaken bucket, 00 the iron-bound bucket, 00 

20. The moss-covered bucket 00 arose 1 " from the well. 

3. 

21. How sweet from the green, mossy brim to receive it, 

22. As poised on the curb it°° inclined 1 " to my lips ! 

23. Not a full blushing goblet 00 could tempt" me " to leave it, otv 

24. Though filled with the nectar that " Jupiter 00 sips." 

25. And now, far removed from the loved situation, 

26. The tear 00 of regret will intrusively swell, 1 " 

27. As fancy 00 reverts 1 " to my father's plantation, 

28. And sighs 1 " for the bucket which 00 hangs 1 " in the well; 

29. The old oaken bucket, the iron-bound bucket, 

30. The moss-covered bucket, which 00 hangs 1 " in the well. 

Wood worth. 



PARSING LESSONS. 221 



Explanations. — See § 64. 

1. How 5 nc qadj dear. Dear 2 scenes. To this heart adjunct of 
dear. 

2. When 7 conj adv sns and modifies are and presents. See R. XII. 8. 

3. Orchard, meadow, wildwood all 1 ap scenes. 

4. And 7 wildwood and spot. Which 3 rl o otv knew. 

5. Pond, mill, both 1 ap scenes. 

6. Bridge, rock, ap scenes. 

7. Cot, house, 1 ap scenes. 

8. 9, 10. Bucket, bucket, bucket. 1 ap scenes. 



11. That 2 nc vessel. As 7 See Rule I. 7. Treasure 1 o ap Vessel. 

12. For 7 sns. Often 5 found. At noon adjunct of found. 
When 5 nc returned. Returned 4 it ps par rp /. See § 37. 3. 

Note. Though such intransitive verbs have a passive form, they do 
not have a passive meaning ; for they do not, like a passive verb, have 
any object which can be used as a subject at the same time. 

13. It 3 o osv to be understood. Source lo af. R. VIII. obs. 1. 

14. Purest and sweetest 2 se pleasure. 

15. How 5 nc qadv ardent (for ardently). Ardent 5 seized. 

16. Quick 5 fell. To 6 fell and bottom. 

17. Then 5 nc rose. Soon 5 rose. With 6 sr par and n overflowing, 
emblem. Overflowing 4 it ing rp it. 

18. 19, 20. Bucket repeated, subject of arose. 



21. To receive it from the green, mossy brim, a phrase, parsed as a noun, 
subject of was understood. How 5 nc qadj sweet. Sweet 2 rph. 

22. As 7 conj adv sns. Poised 4 ps par rp it. 

23. Not 5 nc could tempt. To leave 4 ir if gp me. 

24. Though 7 sns. Filled (that is, Though it no were filled tvpv ). 

25. And 7 sns. Now 5 nc qpar (being) removed. Rule III. Note. 
{Being) removed 4 pv ing rp /understood. Far 5 qpar removed. 

27. As 7 conj adv sns. 

28. Sighs 4 it fancy. 

29. 30. Bucket, bucket, bucket, 1 o op for understood. 

19* 



222 PARSING LESSONS. 

Definitions. 

Scenes, actions or events that occurred ; the places at which things 
happened. 

Recollection, recalling to mind. 

Presents, exhibits ; brings up. 

Cataract, a large waterfall. 

Treasure, something much valued. 

Exquisite, choice ; very excellent. 

Ardent, for ardently, passionately ; eagerly ; with warmth. 

Glowing, being bright or red with heat or animation. 

Emblem, a picture representing one thing to the eye, and another to 
the understanding. 

Poised, balanced. 

Blushing, showing a red appearance, as colored liquor in a goblet. 

Goblet, a kind of cup or drinking vessel without a handle. 

Nectar, the fabled drink of the heathen gods. 

Jupiter, the king of the gods of the ancient Greeks and Romans. 

Situation, place. 

Regret, sorrow ; grief. 

Intrusively, without right or invitation ; involuntarily. 

Fancy, imagination ; thought. 

Reverts, turns to. 

Plantation, a place planted with trees, vegetables, &c. ; land ; farm. 

False Syntax. — Answer in concert. 

" How dear is the scenes. When recollection present them. My 
infancy knowed. The bucket which hanged in the well. The man 
which was hung on the gallows. I hails it as a treasure. Hands that 
was glowing. It riz from the well." 

Composition. 

Make capital letters when necessary ; spell the words correctly ; 
punctuate properly; let your handwriting be plain, and keep your 
composition-book neat, and free from blots. Use such of the following 
hints as will suit you. 

1. Describe the place at which you formerly lived, or imagine some 
place, and give a description of it. Hints, 1. Situation — high, low, 
bounded by river, mountain, lake, landscape, county of, near a village. 
2. House — small, large, stories, wood, brick, style of building, painted, 
blinds, windows, doors, other buildings. 3. Yard — large, small, grass, 
flowers, shrubbery, jessamine, honeysuckle, roses, walks, trees 



PARSING LESSONS. 223 

% 

4. Fields — undulating, cotton, corn, waving wheat, solitary shade-tree. 

5. Well, cistern, spring, streamlet, hill, valley. 

2. Describe your early associates and rambles, males and females, 
amiable, cheerful, obliging, intelligent; cool shade, gay flowers, pur- 
ling stream, caroling of the birds ; different objects met with. 

3. The ehange in the appearance of the place ; the ruins of time ; 
feelings produced by calling to mind the scenes of your childhood ; the 
useful lesson to be learned from the ruins of time. 

LESSON III. 
Scan and read in concert. 
Verses supposed to be written by Alexander Selkirk, during his solitary 

abode in the island of Juan Fernandez. 
[Alexander Selkirk was a native of Largo, in Scotland. Having a 
good knowledge of navigation, he obtained the command of a ship, and 
made several voyages to the South Seas. During one of these voyages, 
in the year 1705, while he was in the ship of Captain Pradling, he had 
a quarrel with him, and the captain cruelly set Selkirk on shore, on the 
desert island of Juan Fernandez, giving him a fowling-piece, some 
powder and shot, and very few necessaries. In this desolate situation, 
he subsisted upon goats, with which the island abounded, and various 
sorts of fish which he caught around the shore. He was removed from 
his solitary abode in 1709, by Captain Wood Rogers, who accidentally 
sailed to the island. The story of Robinson Crusoe, a romance, written 
by the celebrated Daniel de Foe, is founded upon this singular adven- 
ture. — Blake's Biographical Dictionary.] 

Anapestic Verse of three Feet. u ° | "° J u u 

Analyze. Parse. Define the words. 

1. 



1. I no ani itv mon | arch of all | I n0 survey, itv 

2. My right otv there is itv none" to dispute ; 

3. From the centre all round to the sea, 

4. I no am itv lord of the fowl and the brute. 

5. Oh Solitude! where are itv the charms, no 

6. That otv sages no have seen tv in thy face ? 

7. Better dwell in the midst of alarms, 00 

8. Than reign in this horrible place.™ 



224 PARSING LESSONS. 

2. 

9. I no am itv out of humanity's reach, 

10. I no must finish tv my journey * alone, 

11. Never hear tv the sweet music otT of speech; 

12. I no start itv at the sound of my own. 

13. The beasts" that n0 roam itv over the plain, 

14. My form otv with indifference see : tv 

15. They 110 are itv so unacquainted with man, 

16. Their tameness 110 is itv shocking to me. 

3. 

17. Society, friendship, and love, 

18. Divinely bestowed upon mao, 

19. ! had tv I no the wings * of a dove, 

20. How soon would I no taste tv you otv again ! 

21. My sorrows otv I" then might assuage tv 

22. In the ways of religion and truth ; 

23. Might learn itv from the wisdom of age, 

24. And be cheered tvpv by the sallies of youth. 

4. 

25. Religion! what treasure" untold, 

26. Resides 11 * in that heavenly word ! 

27. More precious than silver" or gold," 

28. Or all" that otv this earth" can afford.* 

29. But the sound 0tv of the church-going bell, 

30. These valleys" and rocks" never heard ;* 

31. Never sighed itv at the sound of a knell, 

32. Or smiled itv when a sabbath" appeared. 1 * 

5. 

33. Ye winds, that" have made ,v me 0tv your sport, 

34. Convey* to this desolate shore, 

35. Some cordial, endearing report otv 

36. Of a land I" shall visit tv no more. 

37. My friends, do they" now and then send" 

38. A wislT tv or a thought * after me ? 

39. tell tv me I"° yet have tT a friend, 0,v 

40. Though a friend otv I" am itv never to see. 



PARSING LESSONS. 225 

6. 

41. How fleet is itv a glance" of the mind ! 

42. Compared with the speed of its flight, 

43. The tempest 00 itself lags itT behind, 

44. And the swift-winged arrows 00 of light. 

45. When I no think itv of my own native land, 

46. In a moment I n0 seem itv to be there ; 

47. But alas ! recollection 110 at hand 

48. Soon hurries tv me* back to despair. 

7. 

49. But the sea-fowl n0 has gone itv to her nest, 

50. The beast 00 has lain itv down in his lair; 

51. Even here is itv a season 110 of rest, 

52. And I no to my cabin repair."' 

53. There's itv mercy 110 in every place, 

54. And mercy, 00 encouraging thought ! 

55. Gives tv even affliction a grace, 0tv 

56. And reconciles tv man " to his lot. Cowper. 

Explanations. — See % 64. 

1. All 1 o op. After all supply that 3 rl o otv survey. 

2. There R. XII. 10. To dispute 4 if gprep for understood. 

3. From the centre and to the sea, adjuncts of the words am lord.* 
All 5 nc qadv round. Round 5 nc qualifies am lord, or proceeding 
omitted. 

4. And 7 ajus of the fowl and of the brute. 

5. Solitude 1 pn 2p abd. See g 16. Obs. 1, 2. 

7. To dwell in the midst of alarms 110 (is itv ) better 2 ce rph. R. VII (a). 

8. Than 7 sns. To reign in this horrible place 110 (is iu ). R. XIV. Obs. 8. 

10. Alone 2 nc I. 

11. I D0 shall never hear 4 ir fu lp. 12. Own 2 nc speech, 
15. So 5 nc qadj unacquainted. 16. Shocking 2 tameness. 

17. Society, friendship, and love, 1 2p abd. 

18. Bestowed 4 pv ps par society, friendship, and love. 

19. If /had the wings, &c. § 66, 3. 20. How 5 nc qadv soon. 

* Or proceeding from the centre all round to the sea, &c. From the cen- 
tre and to the sea will then be adjuncts of proceeding. R. XIII. Obs. 6. 



226 



PARSING LESSONS. 



treasure. Silver 00 (is), 



23. / might learn. 24. / might be cheered. 
25. Religion 1 abe. Untold 2 nc treasure. 

27. More 5 ce qadj precious. Precious 2 
gold" (is). R. XIV. Obs. 8, or R. VII. Note. 

28. All no (is). 31, 32. Sighed, smiled, 4 it ps pi valleys and rocks. 

33. Ye 3 2p pi abd. Winds 1 2p pi ap ye. Me and sport object of 
made. See Rule IX. 3. 

34. Convey, see Rule VII. 1. (ye.) 

36. After land supply which 3 rl o otv shall visit. No more, adverbial 
phrase, qualifies shall visit. 

37. Friends 1 m pi abpl. Now and then 5 nc do send. And 7. 

39. Tell R. VII. 1. Me, to me. R. IX. Obs. 4. I yet have a friend, 
object of tell. Yet 5 nc have. 

40. To see 4 ir if am. 

41. Fleet 2 glance. How 5 nc qadj fleet. 42. Compared 4 pv ps par 
tempest, 43. Itself. R. I. 1. 44. Arrows lag. R. VII. Note. 

47. At hand adverbial phrase, qualifies being understood. 

51. Even 5 nc qadv here. 54. Thought 1 abe. 

55. Even 5 nc qn affliction. Affliction 1 o op (to). R. IX. Obs. 4. 



Definitions. 



Alarm, dread ; terror ; fear. 
Affliction, pain ; distress ; grief. 
Assuage, allay ; ease ; lessen. 
Bestowed, given ; granted. 
Cheer, gladden; cause to rejoice. 
Convey, carry; bear. 
Cordial, cheering. 
Desolate, desert ; uninhabited. 
Despair, a hopeless state. 
Divinely, by the act of God ; 

heavenly. 
Endearing, making dear or beloved. 
Glance, sudden view ; rapid cast. 
Grace, that which makes agreeable. 
Humanity, mankind ; human race. 



Indifference, without concern. 

Knell, toll of a bell. 

Lair, bed of a wild beast. 

Lot,, condition ; fortune. 

Monarch, lord ; ruler. 

Reconciles, makes contented with. 

Reign, rule; govern. 

Repair, go to. 

Roam, wander; rove. 

Sages, wise men. 

Sallies, springs of fancy, or wit. 

Society, union of people. 

Solitude, loneliness. 

Survey, look upon ; behold. 



PARSING LESSONS. 227 



False Syntax. Rule I. — Give reasons. 

"We have read of Selkirk, he who lived in solitude. It was Alex- 
ander Selkirk, him who lived in solitude. God will comfort me, Him 
who causes the desert to rejoice. I will ask comfort from God, He who 
is omnipotent." 

Composition. 

1. Look for the island of Juan Fernandez on your map, or in your 
Geography, or Gazetteer. Tell the situation, latitude, longitude, zone, 
direction from Scotland, and whatever you can learn about the islands. 

2. Relate in your own words what you can recollect of the foregoing 
piece. 

3. Write the thoughts suggested by the piece. Make the contrast 
between solitude and society. Where do we find mercy?" 

Note 1. Solitude is represented by the poets as a romantic maid, who 
passes her time at the tomb, on the banks of some remote river, in the 
lonely desert, or the wild mountains, or in some solitary place, free 
from all the evils attendant upon society. Hence sages have seen many 
charms in her face : but Selkirk could see none. 

When we speak of a thing without life, or of a lower animal, as if it 
were a person, we use a figure of speech, called personification. Soli- 
tude is personified, " The Spider said to the Fly." Spider and Fly are 
here represented as persons, talking one to the other. Society, friend- 
ship, and love are spoken of as persons ; for in the next line they are 
represented by the personal pronoun you. Winds, in the 83d line, is 
personified. Valleys and rocks, in the 30th line, must be personified, 
because they cannot hear, neither can they sigh nor smile. 

Note 2. When we speak of the rays of light, we use plain language ; 
but the expression arrows of light is figurative. Bays of light are 
called arrows of light on account of the resemblance of the two objects. 
A ray is a small straight line .of light, which issues or shoots from its 
source very rapidly, as if with wings. 

An arrow is a small, slender, straight weapon, with a feather or wing 
at one end. When shot from a bow, it flies through the air with great 
rapidity. Such a comparison is called a Metaphor. But if the com- 
parison is introduced by as or like, it is termed a Simile. 



228 PARSING LESSONS. 

LESSON IV. 
The Pursuit of Happiness often ill-directed. 
Scan and read in concert. 

Iambic Verse in alternate Lines of four and three Feet. 

Analyze. Parse. Define. 

1. 

The mid | night moon no J serene | ly smiles, itv 

O'er Na | ttire's soft | repose ; 
No low'ring cloud no obscures tv the sky, ctv 

Nor ruffling tempest 110 blows. itv 

2. 

Now ev'ry passion 110 sinks itv to rest, op 
The throbbing heart 110 lies itv still ; 

And varying schemes 110 of life no more 
Distract tv the lab'ring will. otv 



In silence, hushed to reason's voice, 
Attends itT each mental power ; n0 

Come, itv dear Emilia, and enjoy ty 
Reflection's fav'rite hour. otv 

4. 

Come itv while the peaceful scene" invites, 1 
Let's tvotv search this ample round ; oU 

Where shall the lovely, fleeting form 00 
Of happiness be found ? tvpv 

5. 

Does it n0 amidst the frolic mirth 

Of gay assemblies dwell ; itv 
Or hide itv beneath the solemn gloom 

That 110 shades tv the hermit's cell? otv 



PARSING LESSONS. 229 



How oft the laughing brow 110 of joy, 

A sick'ning heart olv conceals ; ,v 
And through the cloister's deep recess 

"Invading sorrow" steals. itv 

7. 
In vain through "beauty, fortune, wit, 

The fugitive otv we no trace ; tv 
It no dwells 1 " not in the faithless smile 

That no brightens" Clodia's face. 017 

8. 
Perhaps the joy " to these denied, 

The heart nu in friendship finds ;" 
Ah ! dear delusion, gay conceit 

Of visionary minds, 

9. 
Howe'er our varying notions 110 rove, 1 " 

Yet all agree '" in one; 
To place its being otv in some state 

At distance from our own. 

10. 
! blind to each indulgent aim 

Of power supremely wise ; 
Who 00 fancy itv happiness 00 in aught 

The hand no of heaven denies. tv 

11. 

Vain is alike the joy 110 we n0 seek, tv 

And vain what " we 110 possess;" 
Unless harmonious reason 110 tunes" 

The passions " into peace. 

12. 

To tempered wishes, just desires, 

Is happiness 110 confined ;" pv 
And deaf to folly's call, attends" 

The music " of the mind. Carter. 

20 



230 PAUSING LESSONS. 

Explanations. 
1. 
Midnight 2 nc moon. No 2 nc cloud. 

2. 
;SWW 5. And 7 sns. iVb 5 qadv more. More 5 ce distract. 

3. 
irc s?7ercce adjunct of attends. Hushed 4 ps par power. Come, R. VII. 1. 
(thou.) Emilia 1 pn f 2p abd. 27/yo?/ R. VII. 1. (thou.) 

4. 

While 7 conj adv sns. Let R. VII. 1. thou, 's for us. To search 
4 if gp us. R. X. 3. Shall be found taken together. 

5. 
Does dwell taken together. Does hide 4 ir itv it understood. 

6. 
How 5 nc oft. Oft 5 nc conceals. And 7 sns. Through 6 steals and 
recess. 

7. 
In vain 5 nc trace. 

8. 

Perhaps 5 nc finds. Denied 4 ps par joy. Delusion 1 abe. Con- 
ceit 1 abe. R. III. 4. 

9. 
How'er 5 nc rove. Yet 7 sns. .4ZZ 2 nc (persons). One 2 nc (notion). 
To place its being in some state at distance from our own (state) R. I. 3. 
notion understood. 

10. 
Blind 2 persons understood. Who 3 rl m or f pi (persons). That 
happiness (is) R. VII. Note. Which understood after aught, is the .object 
of denies. 

11. 
Vain 2 joy. Alike 5 nc is. Which understood after joy, is the 
object of seek. What 3 rl o otv possess. R. VI. Note. (Thing.) 

12. 

To tempered wishes, and to just desires, adjuncts of is confined. 
Deaf 2 nc happiness. Attends 4 happiness. 



PARSING LESSONS. 



231 



Definitions. 



Ample, large ; spacious. 

Assemblies, bodies of persons. 

Aught, any thing. 

Cell, a hut- 
Cloister, a house inhabited by 
monks and nuns. 

Conceit, self-flattering opinion. 

Delusion, deception ; error. 

Distract, draw apart ; confuse. 

Faithless, deceptive. 

Fleeting, passing rapidly. 

Frolic, gay ; merry. 

Fugitive, one who flees, or has fled. 

Gloom, darkness; melancholy. 

Harmonious, producing agreement. 

Hermit, one who lives alone. 

Invading, assaulting; attacking. 

Lowering, appearing dark, threat- 
ening a storm. 

Mirth, social merriment. 



Obscures, darkens; renders in- 
visible. 

Passion, feeling of the mind ; ex- 
citement. 

Recess, place of retirement; pri- 
vate abode. 

Reflection, thought ; meditation. 

Ruffling, disturbing; agitating. 

Scene, the place where any thing 
is exhibited. 

Schemes, plans ; projects ; designs. 

Serenely, calmly; quietly. 

Smiles, looks bright, or shines. 

Solemn, adapted to produce seri- 
ousness. 

Supremely, in the highest degree. 

Tempest, a storm of wind, com- 
monly with rain, hail, or snow. 

Varying, altering; changing. 

Visionary, imaginary. 



False Syntax. — Rule II. 

" Him and her are unfriendly. Me and him own the property. Us 
and them will perform the work. Emilia and me will enjoy reflection's 
favorite hour." 

Observation 2. 

"The midnight moon, it smiles. The throbbing heart, it lies still. 
Varying schemes, they do not distract the will." 

Composition. 

1. Name the subject of the foregoing piece, and make such remarks 
as may occur to you with regard to it. 

2. Explain why midnight is a suitable time for reflection. 

3. Give some reasons why happiness does not dwell in gay assemblies, 
nor in the hermit's cell. 

4. Explain why beauty, fortune, and wit, do not produce happiness. 

5. Explain the nature of that happiness which we find in friendship. 

6. The only method of obtaining true happiness. 

7. What part must reason act in the pursuit of happiness. 



232 PAKSING LESSONS. 

Notes. 

" Does the moon smile 9" To smile means to contract the features in 
a certain way which shows that we are pleased, or affected with 
moderate joy. This pleasure or joy produces the appearance of bright- 
ness in the face and eyes. Hence the moon when shining, is said to 
smile. 

When we say the moon smiles, we use a metaphor, or a comparison 
not introduced by the words like or as. 

The student maybe informed that the word passion means some feel- 
ing of the mind; such as, joy, grief, desire, hope, fear, love, hatred, 
anger. When we speak of a mental power, we mean the faculty, ability, 
or capacity of the mind to act in certain ways. Thus the power by 
which objects can be brought up before the mind, or simply made to 
appear, is called Fancy. The power which places before the mind the 
images of things, is called Imagination. The power of retaining things 
in the mind, is called Memory. The power of perceiving resemblances, 
is called Comparison. The mind has various powers. 

As the soldier moves silently and secretly to the camp of his enemy, 
to make an attack, so invading sorrow steals through the cloister's deep 
recess. 

As the musician tunes his instruments, causing the notes to harmo- 
nize, so harmonious reason tunes the passions, that discord may be 
prevented. 

LESSON V. 

The Imprisoned Eagle. 

Scan and read in concert. 

Iambic Verse of four Feet. u | u | u | ° 

Analyze. Define. Parse. 

1. 
Oh! 't M was itv a mean and dastard thing, af 
To bind the mountain eagle's wing : otv 
A tyrant's forge 110 the fetters otv framed, tT 
And tyranny 110 the deed otv proclaimed." 
My spirit 110 sickens itv when I no see tv 
That noble bird otv in misery. 
Break, tT break* the kingly eagle's chain, " 
And give tT him" 1 ' to the skies again. 



PARSING LESSONS. 233 



2. 



His powerful wing, abpl that " nature" gave, 
Sublime o'er mountain tops to wave ; 
For sailing round the loftiest peak, 
The home otv of princely sires to seek ; 
That powerful wing n0 now drooping low, 
Folds itv round him like a robe" of wo. 
! break u the kingly eagle's chain, " 
And give tv him otv to the skies again. 



Once he n0 loved tv on the sun to gaze, otv 

But now he" sliuns u the dazzling blaze ; otv 

His eye" is dimmed, tvpv a feebler light" 

Suits tv best the captive eagle's sight. 0tv 

Oh! were itv he" free, his glance" would dare tv 

The vivid lightning's fervid glare. otv 

Break," break^ the kingly eagle's chain, " 

And give tv him otv to the skies again. 

4. 

'T" was 1 " the thought af of a dastard mind, 
The eagle's free-born wing " to bind ; 
Freeman, M if freedom's honored name" 
The homage 0tv of thy heart can claim," 
Unclose 1 '' the prisoner's gratecUdoor, " 
And let" him " far and freely soar. 

Break," break tv the kingly eagle's chain, " 

And give" him " to the skies again. 

Stat nominis umbra. 

Explanations. 

1. 

It, to bind the mountain eagle's wing, a phrase ap it. See R. I. 3. It 
represents the thing. And 7 sns. When 7 conj adv sns, and qualifies 
the two verbs, sickens and see. Break, Rule VII. 1. [ye or you or thou.) 
Give R. VII. 1. Again 5 nc give. 

20* 



234 PARSING LESSONS. 



2. 

Sublime 5 wave. To wave 4 itv if gprep (in order). Far 5 sailing. 
Sailing 4 itv ing wing. To seek 4 ir if gprep in order. Low 5 droop- 
ing. Like 5 nc folds. Robe, like as a robe folds. 



Once 5 nc loved. To gaze 4 itv if loved. But 7 sns. Were he, i. e., 
if he were, g 66. 3. 

4. 

jft (the thing), to bind the eagle's freeborn wing, a phrase ap it. R. I. 3. 
Unclose R. VII. 1. LefR. VII. 1. >SW 4 itv if gp him. See R. X. 3. 

Definitions. 

Captive, made prisoner. Peak, the top of a hill or moun- 
Dazzling, overpowering with light. tain ; a point. 

Dastard, cowardly. Princely, royal ; grand. 

Drooping, hanging down. Sires, male parents. 

Fervid, very hot , burning. Soar, to mount on the wing. 

Fetters, chains for the feet. Spirit, elevation of mind ; anima- 
Forge, a place where iron is heated tion ; state of excitement. 

and hammered. Sublime, on high ; loftily. 

Glare, a very bright dazzling light. Tyranny, arbitrary exercise of 
Grated, furnished with cross bars. power ; cruel government. 

Homage, reverence ; worship. Vivid, very bright. 
Kingly, royal ; like a king. 

False Syntax. — Rule III. Reasons. 

" Me seeing the bird in misery, my spirit sickened. Him being given 
to the skies, I rejoiced. Him being free, his glance would dare the 
lightning's glare. Me being fond of liberty, it is pleasing to see others 
enjoy it. 

Composition. 

1. Read an account of the eagle in your natural history ; close the 
book, and write what you remember of the description. 

2. Read carefully the preceding piece of poetry, and, in your own 
words, relate what you can remember. 

3. Your own thoughts about imprisoning the eagle. 



PARSING LESSONS. 235 



LESSON VI. 
Vengeance. 
Scan and read in concert. 

Trochaic Verse, having four Feet in the odd Lines, and three Feet 
with an additional Syllable, in the even Lines. 

Analyze. Define. Parse. 

1. 

Vengeance" calls tv you! otv quick, be itv ready— 

Rouse 1 ' 7 ye, no in the name of God: 
Onward, onward! strong and steady — 

Dash u to earth th' oppressor's rod. ' 7 
Vengeance 110 calls ! itv ye brave, ye brave ! 
Rise, 1 ' 7 and spurn tv the name of slave. ' 7 



Grasp 17 the sword ! otv — its edge" is itv keen ; 

Seize tv the gun ! 0tv — its ball no is itv true; 
Sweep' 7 your land olv from tyrants clean ; 

Haste, xU and scour tT it otv through and through. 
Onward, onward! Vengeance" cries/ 7 
Rush 1 ' 7 to arms — the tyrant ™ flies. iu 

3. 
Vengeance" calls' 7 you ! olv quick, be itv ready — 

Think 1 ' 7 of what your sires na have been : ltT 
Onward, onward! strong and steady — 

Drive tv the tyrant ' 7 to his den. 
On, and let' 7 the watchword ' 7 be 
Country, home, and liberty. Percival. 

Explanations. 

1. 

Quick 2 rp you understood. Be 4 ir itv ip 2p pi you. Ready 2 rp 

you. Onward 5 nc march understood, see Rule XII. 7. Strony 2 rp 

you. Steady 2 rp you. Dash R. VII. 1 . Ye 3 m 2p pi abd. Brave 2 

men. Rise, spurn, R. VII. 1. And 7 rise and spurn. 



236 PARSING LESSONS. 

2. 

Grasp R. VII. 1. Seize R. VII. I. Sweep R. VII. 1. Clean 2 rnv 
qualifies the noun land and the verb sweep. See R. V. 1. Haste, scour, 
see R. VII. 1. Through, through 5 nc scour. And 7 through and 
through. Rush R. VII. 1. 

3. 

Think R. VII. 1. 0/6 think and tf/% understood. What 3 rl (</*%) 
af have been. Drive R. VII. 1. On 5 nc march understood. R. XII. 7. 
Let R. VII. 1. Be 4 ir itv if gn watchword, see R. X. 3. Country, home, 
liberty, 1 o af to be. 

False Syntax. — Rule IV. 

Place the sign of the possessive where it is required. 

"A mothers tenderness and a fathers care are natures gifts for mans 
advantage. The milliner makes girls and ladies bonnets, and the hatter 
makes boys and mens hats. (Sing.) The deers flesh. (Plu.) The deers 
flesh. See \ 19. 7." 

Definitions. 

Oppressor, one who imposes unjust burdens on others ; a tyrant. 

Rod, an instrument of punishment. 

Scour, to pass swiftly over ; to cleanse ; to purge. 

Spurn, to scorn to receive or accept. 

Vengeance, infliction of pain in return for an injury or an offence. 

Composition. 

1. Look in Webster's large Dictionary for vengeance; read all the 
definitions, and, in your own words, show the difference between 
vengeance and revenge. 

2. Give several examples of vengeance. 

3. Give several examples of revenge. 

4. What can you mention (to be found in the first verse,) which 
would be a just cause for vengeance ? 

5. The consequence of submitting to an oppressor. 

6. You can tell (in third verse,) who set us the example of resisting 
tyrants. Write*what you know about our sires. 

7. Think of country, home, and liberty, tyrant, base submission 
misery, vengeance, in connection, and write what you can. 



PARSING LESSONS. 237 

LESSON VII. 
War-Song of the Revolution. — Officers — Soldiers. 
Scan and read in concert. 

Let a portion of the class be appointed for officers, and the rest 
for soldiers. The officers will read in concert first ; the soldiers 
will respond. 

Anapestic Verse of four and three Feet alternately. 

-—or |— ,— J—. 

or-—\- |-—. 

Analyze. Parse. Define. 

1. Officers. 

Arm, ity arm itv for the battle — invasion 110 has come ltv — 
His shadow 110 has darken'd tv our soil. " 

2. Soldiers. 

We n0 are itT ready — all ready — our swords" shall strike 1 " home, 
Ere the robber" has gathered 17 his spoil. " 

3. Officers. 

Arm, 1 " arm 1 " for the battle— Vis 1 " liberty af calls, 11 ' 
The tyrants' 10 are leagued itv as her foe. ap 

4. Soldiers. 

We" are itv ready — all ready — our hearts" are itT her walls, 1 * 
Which olv tyrants" will ne'er overthrow. 1 ' 

5. Officers. 

Arm, arm for the battle — our children" and wives" 
Are sinking, 1 " with terrors oppressed. 

6. Soldiers. 

We are ready — all ready — and pledged" 1 " are our lives, 110 
That these dear ones" in safety shall rest. itv 



238 PARSING LESSONS. 



7. Officers. 

Arm, arm for the battle — and cowards' 10 may fly itT — 
The foe" like a torrent sweeps on. itv 

8. Soldiers. 

We are ready — all ready — we no '11 shout, w ere we no die itT — 
Hurrah ! for the battle 110 is won. tvpv Anonymous. 

Explanations. 

1. Arm Rule VII. 1. 2. All 2 nc rp we. Ready 2 rp we. Home 
R. XIII. 1. Ere 7 conj adv sns, and qualifies the two verbs shall strike 
and has gathered, R. XII. 8. 3. After the word liberty supply that, 3 rl 
calls. Foe, R. I. 7. Are leagued, better have leagued. § 37. 3. 5. Op- 
pressed 4 ps par children and wives. With 6 oppressed and terrors. 
6. Are pledged. That 7 sns. Ones 3 idf m and f pi shall rest. 7. Like 
as a torrent 110 sweeps on itv understood. Foe 110 sweeps on. Uv Like 5 nc 
sweeps on. 8. Hurrah! for the battle is won, sentence, object of shout. 
R. IX. 2. For 7 sns. 

Definitions. 
Foe, an enemy, an opponent. 

Invasion, the entrance of a hostile army into a country for conquest 
or plunder — here an enemy. 

Leagued, united for the aid of each other. 
Oppressed, overpowered; depressed. 
Spoil, plunder taken from an enemy ; pillage ; booty. 
Torrent, a violent or rapid stream. 

False Syntax. — Rale V. Reasons. 

Observations. 

7. "He fought ten battle under the same general. The cannon ball 
weighed twenty- four pound. The ditch around the fort was eighteen foot 
wide, and twenty foot deep. 12. There were six brave officers — Col. Har- 
ney was the braver of them all. There were three battles — the latter 
was the more bloody. 13. The holy war was more unholy than all wars. 
A war declared against a tyrant who would deprive us of country, home, 
and liberty, is more justifiable than all wars. 14. A defensive war is 
the most justifiable of all other wars. 15. A more crueler tyrant. The 



PARSING LESSONS. 239 

most bravest general. 16. The chiefs officer. War produces extrem- 
es^ misery. 17. Protect them children. Save them wives. Strike clown 
them foes. 18. A general should conduct himself in a manner suitably 
to his station. 19. Such innocent children. Such cruel enemies. War 
makes some miserable poor. 20. Either of the six generals. Neither 
of the ten soldiers. 

Composition. 

1. Look in Webster's large Dictionary for the word War, and, from 
memory, give a definition of it. 

2. Explain offensive war; purposes for which it is undertaken; evils ; 
loss of liberty ; life ; property destroyed ; miseries ; widows ; orphans ; 
effects upon the inhabitants of the country in which it is waged ; effects 
upon the soldiers. 

3. Explain defensive war ; for what undertaken ; when just. 

4. War of the Revolution ; offensive or defensive ; for what under- 
taken; just or unjust. 

5. Some remarks about the Christian religion, in connection with 
war. 

6. Any thoughts which may be suggested. 

LESSON VIII. 
Meet the Foe. 
Scan and read in concert. 

Iambic Verse of four and iliree Feet alternately. Tlie second Line 
lias iliree Feet and a short syllable. 



Analyze. Parse. Define. 

1. 
Ye aM sons ap of sires who 110 fought itT and bled' 

For liberty and glory, 
Whose fame no shall ever wider spread itv 

'Till time 110 is itT bent and hoary— 
Awahe su to meet 17 the invading foe ! otT 

Eouse iu at the call of danger! 
Beat down tv again his standard otv low, 

And backward hurl tv the stranger ! otv 



240 PARSING LESSONS. 

2. 
They no knew tv no fear, otv those sires abpl of old— 

'Mid swords and bayonets clashing, 
Still high they 110 bore tv their 'banner's fold, otv 

Its stars abp like lightnings flashing. 
Be itv like those sires ! — With free-born might, 

Kenew tv the deeds otT of story ! 
Who" lives** shall win tv a wreath otv of light — 

Who 110 falls, itv shall sleep itv in glory. Percival. 

Liberty. 
Four and three Iambics. 



Analyze. Define. Parse. 

3. 
Beneath our country's flag we no stand, itv 

And give tv our hearts otv to thee, 
Bright power, abd who 110 steel'st tv and nerv'st tv our hand, otv 

Thou, abd first-born Liberty ! ap 
Here, on our swords we no swear itv to give tv 
Our willing lives otv that thou no may'st live. itv 

4. 
For thee, the Spartan youth 110 of old, 

To death devoted, fell! ity 
Thy spirit" made tv the Roman otv bold, 

And fired tT the patriot 01 * Tell ! oap 
Our sires, no on Bunker, fought itv for thee — 
Undaunted fought, itT and we no are itv free! 

5. 
Kun up tv your starry flag otv on high I 

No storm" 8 shall rend tv its folds ; otT 
On, like a meteor™ through the sky, 

Its steady course otT it no holds. tv 
Thus high in heaven our flag abpl unfurled — 
Go, ,tT bear tv it, otv Freedom, abd round the world. Percival. 



PARSING LESSONS. 241 

Explanations. 

1. 

Ever 5 nc shall spread. Wider 5 ce shall spread. Till 7 conj adv sns. 

Bent 2 ft'rae. Hoary 2 tome. «4wa/ce R. VII. 1. To meet 4 ir if gprep 

(in order). Rouse R. VTL 1. Again b nc beat down. Low 5 beat down. 

And 7 sns. Backward 5 nc Awr/. iZiwZ R. VII. 1. 

2. 
7%ey 3 m pi sim, subject of hiew. See R. VI. 23. [Though they 
were) amid swords and bayonets clashing. 'Mid for Amidst 6 were and 
swords, bayonets. Clashing 4 it ing swords and bayonets. Still 7 conj 
adv sns. ift^ 5 bore. Like. — The stars are not like the lightnings — 
there is no resemblance between the two objects ; but the stars flash in 
the same manner as lightnings flash. Like 5 nc flashing. Lightnings" 
flash iu understood. Be, Rule VII. 1. Like. — In this place like is an 
adjective; it does not express manner, but quality: Be men like unto 
those sires ; or, Be you like unto those sires. Sires 1 m pi o op unto 
understood. Renew R. VII. 1. He understood is the antecedent of 
who, and subject of shall win, shall sleep. 

3. 
Give 4 ir lp pi we understood. First-born 2 nc liberty. Here 5 nc to 
give. That 7 sns. 

4. 

For thee adjunct of fell. Old 2 times understood. Devoted 4 ps par 
youth. Fired 4 ps spirit understood. Undaunted 2 nc sires. 

Definitions. 

Banner, a square flag ; military Patriot, one who loves and defends 

ensign. his country. 

Clashing, striking against. Roman, of or belonging to Rome, 

Devoted, doomed ; consigned. a city of ancient Italy. 

First-born, most excellent or ex- Standard, staff with a flag or 

alted. colors; ensign. 

Flag, ensign or colors. Steelest, makest hard. 

Glory, honor ; fame ; renown. Stranger, a foreigner. Here an 

Hoary, white or gray with age. enemy. 

Invading, entering a country for Spartan, of or belonging to Sparta, 

war, conquest, or plunder ; a city of ancient Greece. 

attacking; assaulting. Undaunted, not subdued or de- 
Liberty, freedom from restraint. pressed by fear ; intrepid. 
Nervest, givest strength to. Wreath, a garland ; a chaplet. 

21 



242 PARSING LESSONS. 

False Syntax. — Rule VI. 
Observations. 

4. Was you among those who stood beneath the flag ? Perhaps you 
has seen Bunker hill. 6. He, and you, and I was small boys at the 
time of the Revolution. 7. You and he is old now. 8. Thou shouldst 
love peace, but you must fight for liberty. 9. You that love your 
country, and who fight for it, will be honored. 10. He will defend his 
country, who loves liberty. 11. Our country is not in the same situa- 
tion it was in 1776. 12. That is the house where the continental con- 
gress held its meetings. 13. They are the sires which fought for liberty. 
14. William Tell who was but another name for patriotism, roused the 
Swiss to arms. 19. We cannot believe but what the strength of nations 
consists in resolution and courage. 21. We must be resolute and 
courageous ; without which we cannot succeed in war. 22. A man asked 
another whether this was the person whom he saw in company with his 
friends. 24. Our sires, they were undaunted. Our flag, go bear it. 
William Tell, he was a patriot. The Spartans and the Romans, they 
were brave. 

Composition. — Our Sires. 

1. Who they were ; in what cause they were engaged ; at what period; 
what made the Americans dislike the English ; Declaration of Indepen- 
dence. 

2. What inducement mentioned to rouse the sons. 

3. Why liberty can give us strength. 

4. The four examples given to show that we should die for liberty. 

6. Remember to say when only wars are justifiable, and to condemn 
them when not justifiable. 

6. Do not forget at the close of your composition to ascribe the 
possession of our liberties, as well as our happiness and prosperity, 
not to the arms of our sires, but to the aid of Almighty God, who was 
with them in the Revolution. Washington fought, but God gave victory. 

LESSON IX. 

Old Ironsides. 

By Old Ironsides is meant the United States' frigate Constitution : 
and truly she may be called Old Ironsides; for no vessel of her class 
(she was rated forty-four guns, but mounted fifty,) ever had so many 
hard knocks and narrow escapes. She was a noble ship of war — she 



PARSING LESSONS. 243 

•waged many victorious battles, captured hundreds of cannon, thousands 
of men, and millions of dollars' worth of property. Her deck was 
never soiled by the foot of a conqueror, and her star-spangled banner 
was never struck to the flag of any nation under heaven ! The old 
ship, though she had many masters, seemed destined by fate "to ride 
o'er the deep." 

" With her we need no bulwark, 
No towers along the steep ; 
Her march is o'er the mountain waves, 
Her home is on the deep." 
Well may we value the relics of this old favorite of the nation and 
of the navy ; which, in the forms of canes, snuff-boxes, and ornaments 
of various kinds, are now scattered far and wide in every land. 

When she was condemned to be broken up, the following spirited 
lines, written on the occasion, forcibly uttered the indignant tone of 
public sentiment. 

Iambic Verse of four and three Feet alternately. 

° I u I u 

Analyze. Parse. Define. 

1. 
Ay, tear tv her tattered ensign otv down! 

Long has it n0 waved itT on high, 
And many an eye no has danced ity to see 

That banner 0,y in the sky: 
Beneath it rang itv the battle-shout, 110 
And burst itv the' cannon's roar ; no 
The meteor 110 of the ocean air, 

Shall sweep ,T the clouds otv no more! 
2, 

Her deck, no once red with heroes' blood, 

Where knelt itv the vanquished foe," 
When winds™ were hurrying 1 ' 7 o'er the flood, 

And waves" were itv white below, 
No more shall feel tv the victor's tread, 0tr 

No more the conquered knee ; otv 
The harpies" of the shore shall pluck* 

The eagle otv of the sea. 



244 PARSING LESSONS. 



Oh ! better that her shattered hulk" 

Should sink itv beneath the wave — 
Her thunders 00 shook tv the mighty deep, otr 

And there should be i,v her grave ! no 
Nail tT to the mast her holy flag, otv 

Set tT every threadbare sail, otv 
And give tv her otv to the God of storms, 

The lightning, and the gale ! Holmes. 

Explanations. 
1. 

Ay 5 nc R. XII. 9. Down 5 nc tear. Tear R. VII. 1. Long 5 waved. 
On high 5 phrase nc waved. And 7 sns. Many 2 eye R. V. 9. To see 
4 ir if gprep (for), i. e. for seeing. No 5 nc qadv more. More 5 ce 
sweep. 

2. 

Deck subject of shall feel. Once 5 nc qadj red. Where 5 nc knelt. 
When 7 conj adv sns, qualifies knelt and were hurrying. And 7 sns. 
Below 6 sr n and n waves, and deck understood. No more shall feel the 
conquered knee. 



Better 2 ce qualifies the sentence, " That her shattered hulk should 
sink beneath the wave." This whole sentence is the subject of is under- 
stood. That 7 intro. Nail R. VII. 1. Set R. VII. 1. Lightning 1 o 
op (to). Gale 1 o op (to). 

Definitions. 

Ay, yes ; yea. 

Deep, the ocean ; the sea. 

Ensign, flag ; banner. 

Gale, amongst the poets, it may mean a moderate breeze or current 
of air ; among seamen, a violent wind, storm, or tempest. 

Harpies, fabulous winged monsters, ravenous and filthy, having the 
face of a woman, and the body of a vulture. Their feet and fingers 
were armed with sharp claws. Their names were Aello, Ocyp'ete, and 
Cele'no, or Cela'eno. They were sent by Juno to plunder the table of 
Phineus. 



PARSING LESSONS. 245 

Hulk, the body of a ship. 

Mast, a long, round piece of timber, elevated in the middle of a ship, 
to which the yards, sails, and rigging are attached. 

Meteor, a fiery body which floats in the atmosphere, and explodes — 
sometimes called a shooting-star. 

Tattered, torn into rags. 

Threadbare, worn to the thread ; worn out. 

Vanquished, overcome ; subdued ; conquered. 

Victor, a conqueror ; a vanquisher. 

False Syntax. Rule VII. 
(a.) Single word. Old Ironsides are a name given to the Constitution. 
Phrase. Fighting battles produce wo and misery. 

Sentence. That the Constitution was the theme of poets, 
orators, and statesmen, are not at all strange. 
(b.) Two words. Neither man nor woman were pleased, when Old 
Ironsides was broken up. 
Two Phrases. Neither riding upon the mountain waves, nor 
approaching the batteries of the enemy, were 
feared by the crew of the Constitution. 
Two Sentences. That the Constitution should be our pride, or that 
her commanders should be extolled for their 
gallant deeds, are not to be wondered at. 
(c.) That noble vessel, and fast sailer, were built at Boston by Colonel 
George Claghorn. 

(d.) Every officer, and every soldier, were brave. 
(e.) After the war in 1815, there was fifty-three cannon on the Con- 
stitution. 

(/.) Tioo words. The Cyane and Levant was captured by the crew 
of the Constitution. 
Two Phrases. Receiving hard knocks, and making narrow escapes, 

was common with the Constitution. 
Sentences. That the Constitution received many hard knocks, 
that she made many narrow escapes, and that 
her star-spangled banner was never struck to 
the flag of any nation, is facts admitted. 
(g.) Neither the captain nor the sailors was alarmed. 

Observations. 

3. Neither you nor I are fond of war. 

4. Commodore Preble, with all his marines, were brave. 

21* 



246 PARSING LESSONS. 

Composition. 

1. Read an account of the Constitution in some history of the United 
States. Relate what you read, from memory, in your own words. 

2. Add to it what you can remember of the preceding piece of poetry. 

3. Give your own views about vjar, and endeavor to prove that it is 
the greatest evil that can befall a nation. 

4. Make some remarks about the goodness of God — his aid in 
achieving our independence — our duty to ascribe to Him alone, our 
liberty, our prosperity, and our happiness. 

False Syntax. Rule VIII. 

It is me who forget all time. It is thee in whose conversation I 
delight. These are them which inhabited the garden of Eden. Whom 
are our first parents ? Whom are they that behold God's works with 
ceaseless praise ? It is them who walk the earth, both when we wake 
and when we sleep. Whom is he that made those fires ? It is Him who 
rules the universe. 

LESSON XL 
The Hermit. 
Scan and read in concert. 
Anapestic Verse of four Feet, the first of which may be an Iambus. 

Analyze. Parse. Define. 

1. At the close of the day, when the hamlet is still, 
And mortals the sweets of forgetfulness prove, 
When nought but the torrent is heard on the hill, 
And nought but the nightingale's song in the grove, 

5. 'Twas thus by the cave of a mountain afar, 

While his harp rung symphonious, a hermit began; 
No more with himself or with nature at war, 

He thought as a sage, though he felt as a man. 
" Ah ! why all abandoned to darkness and wo ? 
10. Why, lone Philomela, that languishing fall ? 
For spring shall return, and a lover bestow, 

And sorrow no longer thy bosom enthral. 



PARSING LESSONS. 247 

But if pity inspire thee, renew the sad lay ; 

Mourn, sweetest complainer, man calls thee to mourn ; 
15. soothe him whose pleasures, like thine, pass away : 
Full quickly they pass — but they never return. 
Now gliding remote on the verge of the sky, 

The moon, half-extinguished, her crescent displays ; 
But lately I marked when majestic on high 
20. She shone, and the planets were lost in her blaze. 
Roll on, thou fair orb, and with gladness pursue 
The path that conducts thee to splendor again ; 
But man's faded glory, what change shall renew ! 
Ah ! fool, to exult in a glory so vain ! 
25. 'Tis night, and the landscape is lovely no more : 

I mourn ; but, ye woodlands, I mourn not for you ; 
For morn is approaching, your charms to restore, 

Perfumed with fresh fragrance, and glittering with dew. 
Nor yet for the ravage of winter I mourn ; 
30. Kind nature the embryo blossom will save : 
But when shall spring visit the mouldering urn ! 

when shall day dawn on the night of the grave ! 
'Twas thus, by the glare of false science betrayed, 
That leads, to bewilder, and dazzles, to blind ; 
35. My thoughts wont to roam from shade onward to shade, 
Destruction before me, and sorrow behind ; 
pity, great Father of light, then I cried, 

Thy creature, who fain would not wander from thee! 
Lo, humbled in dust, I relinquish my pride : 
40. From doubt and from darkness thou only canst free. 
And darkness and doubt are now flying away ; 

No longer I roam in conjecture forlorn : 
So breaks on the traveller, faint and astray, 
The bright and the balmy effulgence of morn. 
45. See truth, love, and mercy, in triumph descending, 
And nature all glowing in Eden's first bloom ! 
On the cold cheek of death smiles and roses are blending, 
48. And beauty immortal awakes from the tomb." 

Beattie. 



248 PARSING LESSONS. 

Explanations. 

1 — 5. At shows the relation between began and close. Mortals 00 — 
sweets. otv Nought 110 is heard tvpv . But 6 sr nought and torrent. But 
6 sr nought and song. 

5 — 10. Afar 5 nc qn mountain. Symphonious 2 harp. No 5 nc q adv 
more. More 5 ce qaju at war. Sage — man, R. VIL, Note. Why 5 nc 
{art understood). All abandoned 2 nc rp {thou understood). 

10 — 15. Why 5 nc (is understood). Fall ao (is). For 7 sns. Lover olv 
shall bestow. No 5 nc longer. Longer 5 ce shall enthral. Renew i 
mourn, R. VII. 1. To mourn 4 it if gprep (for). 

15 — 20. Like 5 nc pass. Thine 3 f 2p ' gn (pleasures). Full 5 nc 
qadv quickly. Now 5 nc qpar gliding. Gliding 4 it ing moon. Remote 
2 moon. Majestic 2 moon. On high, adverbial phrase, qualifies shone. 

20 — 25. Thou abd. Orb ap thou. Glory otv renew. Fool abe. To 
exult, 4 it if gprep (for). 

25 — 30. Night 1 af is. No more (w). Charms otv restore. To restore 
4 if gprep (w order). Yet 7 sns (though vegetation appears to be 
destroyed), yet do I mourn for the ravage of winter. By supplying the 
ellipsis, we clearly perceive the office which yet performs. 

30 — 35. Betrayed 4 pspar rp /. Bewilder 4 if gprep (in order). To 
blind as bewilder. (That leads us, in order to bewilder us ; and that 
dazzles us, in order to blind us.) 

35 — 40. Thoughts abp (being). Wont 2 thoughts. To roam 4 it if gadj 
wont. Destruction abp (being). Sorrow abp (being). Behind 6 sr v and p 
(Sorrow and me). Fain 5 nc would wander. Humbled 4 pspar rp /. 

40 — 45. Only 5 nc qp thou. Are flying taken together. Forlorn 
2 nc /. Effulgence is the subject of breaks. 

Definitions. 

All-abandoned, forsaken by all. 

All-glowing, all shining intensely. 

Balmy, soothing; soft; mild. 

Betrayed, misled; deceived. 

Bewilder, to perplex ; to lead into confusion. 

Blending, uniting ; mingling together. 

Complainer, one who laments, or expresses grief. 

Conduct, to lead ; to guide ; to show the way. 

Conjecture, guess ; surmise. 

Crescent, the form of the moon when increasing. 



PAUSING LESSONS. 249 

Dazzles, overpowers with light. 

Displays, shows ; presents to view. 

Eden, the name of the garden of paradise. 

Effulgence, brightness ; splendor. 

Embryo, the rudiments of a plant before budding. 

Enthral, to enslave ; reduce to bondage. 

Exult, to leap for joy ; to rejoice exceedingly. 

Fall, a sinking of tone ; cadence. 

Fain, gladly; with joy or pleasure. 

Faint, exhausted ; weak ; feeble ; languid. 

Forgetfulness, the quality of losing remembrance of a thing. 

Forlorn, forsaken; lost; helpless; deserted. 

Fragrance, sweetness of smell ; grateful odor. 

Glare, a bright, dazzling light. 

Gliding, passing along gently and smoothly. 

Glittering, shining; sparkling with light; gleaming. 

Half-extinguished, half put out ; half destroyed. 

Hamlet, a little cluster of houses in the country. 

Hermit, a person who lives in solitude. 

Immortal, that will never fade or die. 

Inspire, to breathe into ; to infuse poetic spirit. 

Landscape, a tract of country seen in a single view. 

Languishing, becoming or being feeble. 

Lay, a song ; tune of a bird. 

Majestic, grand; splendid. 

Mortals, human beings. 

Mouldering, turning to dust by decay ; crumbling. 

Orb, a round body ; a globe or sphere. 

Perfumed, filled with sweet odors. 

Philomela, the nightingale. 

Planets, the heavenly bodies which revolve around the sun. 

Ravage, ruin ; waste ; destruction. 

Relinquish, to give up ; to renounce claim to. 

Remote, far distant in place. 

Renew, begin again ; repeat. 

Restore, to return ; to replace ; to bring back. 

Sage, a wise man ; a philosopher. 

Science, principles or truths collected in order; knowledge. 

Soothe, to soften ; to calm ; to please. 

Splendor, great brightness ; brilliant lustre. 



250 PARSING LESSONS. 

Symphonious, agreeing in sound ; harmonious. 

Tomb, a vault for the dead. 

Torrent, a stream running rapidly. 

Triumph, victory; joy for success. 

Urn, a vessel in which the ashes of the dead were kept. 

Vain, empty ; worthless ; unreal. 

Verge, brink ; the edge ; border ; margin. 

Wander, to rove ; ramble ; stray ; depart. 

Wont, accustomed ; habituated. 

False Syntax. — Rule IX. 

Who should Philomela soothe ? Who did false science betray ? Who 
should we ask to pity us ? 

Observations. 

5. The hermit was taught false science. 6. It repented him of his 
folly ; and he fled himself from destruction. 7. Soothe with him whose 
pleasures pass away. I relinquish from my pride. 

Composition. 

Write in prose the preceding piece of poetry, using your own words, 
and adding your own reflections. 

False Syntax. — Rule XL 

Observations. 

5. The worshiping a Supreme Being is practiced by all nations. 
Confining of all my sense. . The binding nature fast in fate. Giving 
of free bounty. 6. The ship was being built. The tragedy was being 
acted. Wheat is being sold low. An attempt is being made. At that 
time a conspiracy was being formed. 7. To see the good from ill was 
gave me. Pope written the piece. He knowed his duty, but done it 
not. 8. He confest his faults, and was dismist unpunished. 

False Syntax. — Rule XII. 

Observations, 

1. Who could suffer here being below? He licks the hand raised 
just to shed his blood. Humbly hope then. God not gives thee to 
know. Oh! blindness to the future given kindly. 2. Hope humble 
then. He who tries to invert the laws of order, acts wicked. 3. We 



PARSING LESSONS. 251 

know not whether we will live till to-morrow or no. God knows our 
thoughts, whether we conceal them from men or no. 4. We cannot 
conceal no thing from God. No fiends do not torment the Indian in his 
happy island. No Christians do not thirst for gold. 5. The then state 
of affairs. The above piece of poetry. Think of thy often transgres- 
sions. Some seeds may be sown in the soon part of spring. 6. He 
became intemperate at college, since when he has been miserable. 
Until then he was a promising youth. He could have been temperate 
until now. 

Examples of correct expressions. 

[To be written and read in concert by the pupils.] 

Rule XIII. — Prepositions. 

The sinner abandons himself to vice. But he should have an abhor- 
rence of it. The land abounds with, or in good things. The small 
grammar is abridged from the larger one. The gentleman was absent 
from home. I want access to your library. The means were accommo- 
dated to the end. My heart accords with my tongue. Catiline was 
accused of conspiring against his country. He was acquainted with all 
the abandoned youth. He was not acquitted of his crimes. We should 
acquiesce in a just decision. We have provision adapted to our wants. 
The means employed was adequate to the object. Men often adhere to 
a party, for party's sake. The prize was adjudged to the victor. A 
true friend admonishes us of our faults. He addresses himself to our 
sense of right and wrong. Our laws give foreigners admission to the 
rights of citizens. Admission into the room was not allowed. Advan- 
tage over a competitor, of a friend. Affinity between husband and 

wife, to the ocean, with Pharaoh, of bodies for one 

another. Affection for a father. They agree with the teacher, to 

a proposition, upon union among themselves. Agreeable to the 

taste. Allude to his remarks. Annex to a noun. There is an analogy 
between plants and animals. A plant has some analogy to or with an 

animal. Antipathy to certain kinds of food, against some nations. 

Approve of a measure. Arrayed with glory, in purple. Arrive at 

a conclusion. Ascendant over another. Ask for help, of God, 

after the news. Aspire to a crown, after immortality. Asso- 
ciate with the good. Assent to a statement. Assured of fidelity. 
Attain to the end. Averse to sin. Banish from England to Australia. 
We believe in God, on his name. Bereaved of my children. 



252 PARSING LESSONS. 

Bestowed on or upon thee. Betray to a person, into a thing. To 

call on a person, at a place. Capacity for. Careful of his money, 

in writing. Compare with each other, to the sun. Compli- 
ance with. Concur with one, in a measure. Confide in God. Con- 
formable to or with. Consonant to. Consist of parts, — — in obedi- 
ence. Conversant with persons, in things. Corresponds with or 

to. Denounce against one. Derogate from. Derogatory to. Differ 
from. Difficulty in agreeing. Disgusted at or with. Dissent from. 
Engage in a thing. Equal to or with. Exception from or to. Expert 

at, in. Familiar to, with. Founded upon, on, in. Inculcate 

on. Influence on, over, with. Invested with, in. Made much of. Occa- 
sion for. Penetrate into. Prefer to, over, above. Prejudice against. 
Prevail with, upon, on, over, against. Profit by. Reconcile to or with. 
Reduce under, to. Resemblance to. Similar to. Sink into, beneath. 

Skilful in, at. Swerve from. Taste of for. Unite to, with. 

Union to or with. Vest in, with. 

False Syntax. — Rule XIV. 
Observations. 

5. We should aid such persons that are needy. Worship no other 
being but God. Our nature is such, as we must be dependent. None 
else but an Almighty could inflict what I feel. He no sooner saw his 
enemy, but he ran. The pupil neither reads or writes. I know not if 
the master consents or no. See Rule XII. 3. 

6. He has no more property, besides one lot of land. They no sooner 
arrived, but they commenced their work. The army could retreat no 
farther but to the river. 

7. We do not doubt but that God exists ; and we fear lest we will in- 
cur his displeasure. 

9. Both you, and I, and our neighbor, have neglected our duty. 
Both the representatives, the senators, and the president approved of 
the measure. 



ADDENDA. — MISCELLANEOUS EXAMPLES. 253 

ADDENDA. 

• MISCELLANEOUS EXAMPLES. 

1. Say, "The Misses Floyd," and "The two Miss Floyds;" "The 
Messrs. Harper," and " The three Mr. Harpers." 

2. A Relative Pronoun may relate to a Personal Pronoun in the pos- 
sessive case ; as, " Sing His praise who rules the universe. 

3. Than and as are, in some instances, used as Relative Pronouns ; 
as, " Use no more words than are necessary. Use such expressions as 
are authorized. The arguments are such as follow." 

4. The subject it is understoood in the following expressions : "as 
appears, as concerns, as regards." 

5. In parsing, do not take words together which can be separately 
construed; as, " Manchester is over against Richmond." Over 5 qv is. 
Against 6 sr is and Richmond. "He descended from above the clouds." 
From 6 sr descended and above the clouds. Above governs clouds. "As 
for this man, i. e. as it may be for this man. As to this argument, i. e. 
as it relates to this argument. He used all his efforts, and get he failed, 
i. e. and (though he used all his efforts,) get he failed. The lady treated 
Laura as if Laura were her daughter, i. e. the lady treated Laura as 
she would have treated her if she were her daughter. Now then, we 
can perform the work, i. e. then 7 sns we can now 5 nc perform the 
work. Farewell, i. e. fare thou well. Welcome ! i. e. you are welcome. 
Strange ! i. e. it is strange. What if, i. e. what matters it if. What 
though, i. e. what would be the consequence though. 

6. The words whatsoever, whichsoever, &c, are sometimes divided; 
as, " What plan soever. Which road soever." 

7. The adjective the may relate to an adjective; as, "William is the 
stronger of the two." 

8. So may represent (1,) a sentence ; as, " Your father is well ; I heard 
so." (2,) An Adjective ; as, " She is kind ; I believe she is so." 

9. The lady is as 5 nc qadj good as 7 sns her word. (Supply requires 
her to be.) My reasons for employing him as my foreman are as follow. 
The first as 7 connects him and foreman. Second as 3 rl relates to 
reasons, subject of follow. He is more eminent as a scholar than as a states- 
man ; i. e. than he is as a statesman. He was regarded as accountable, 
i. e. as he should be regarded if he were accountable. I esteem the 
favor as one seldom bestowed, i. e. as I esteem one. 

10. " Firstly, let us examine his right." (First.) 

22 



254 ADDENDA — COMPOSITION. 

COMPOSITION. 
Use such of the following suggestions as may suit you. 
A Book. 

1. Describe the different parts,- folio, quarto, octavo, duodecimo, 
eighteenmo, pages, leaves, paper, printing, binding, leather, boards, 
label, title-page, chapters, sections, captions. 

2. Name some of the principal kinds, and the subjects on which 
books are written ; as, school-books, law-books, &c. ; arithmetic, 
geography, grammar, history, &c. 

3. The uses to which it is applied. 

Examples. 
Tree, house, garden. 

Iron. 

1. Where obtained. How. When was its use known. Quality, 
tenacious, dense, malleable. 2. Its various uses. Name such as you 
can think of. Steel, how prepared, quality. Things made of steel. 

Describe an elephant, a horse, a cow. 

Exercise. Model. 

Expand the following expressions. 

The tree bears. The beautiful little tree bears apples. The beauti- 
ful little tree which you planted a few years ago, bears large apples 
of a red color. 

The land produces. Bees make. The horse draws. 

Independence. 

1. The meaning of independence. 2. Its effects upon the character. 
3. Its effect upon society. 4. The different kinds of independence. 
5. The difference been independence and obstinacy. — Weld's English 
Grammar. 

Commerce. 

1. What is it. 2. Who first engaged in commerce; when; what 
nations followed. 3. How carried on ; overland trade between Europe 
and the East Indies. 4. Discovery of America ; the passage around 
the Cape of Good Hope. 5. Advantages ; education ; civilization ; 
Christianity, &c. 

The preceding hints are taken from " Quackenbos's First Lessons in 
English Composition." The student is referred to this book for further 
^,id. It is one of the best works which have been written upon the 
subject of Composition. 



QUESTIONS. 255 



QUESTIONS ON THE INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 



Lesson I. — What does English Grammar teach? Treat of? Of what 
does Orthography treat ? Spell and define Orthography. Letter. Syl- 
lable. Word. Spelling. How many letters has the Alphabet? Repeat 
them. From what is the word Alphabet derived ? Answer the ques- 
tions in the exercises. 

Lesson II. — Write what is required. What is Synthesis? Separate 
the words as directed. What is Analysis ? Sound the letters a, e, i, o, u. 
How were the sounds made? AVhat are these letters called? Why? 
Select the vowels, as directed. Endeavor to sound b, p, d, t, m, alone. 
What are they called ? Why ? Sound the vowels in the words void, 
joy, fold, fowl, ay. Why are the two vowels called a Diphthong? What 
are three vowels in one syllable called? Spell and define Synthesis. 
Analysis. Vocal, or Vowel. Consonant. Diphthong. Triphthong. 

Lesson III. — Write as directed. What are the words called ? Why ? 
Select letters as directed. What are the words called ? Why ? Write 
as directed. What are the words called? Write as directed. What 
are the words called ? Recite the list of words as required. What is 
the word simple derived from ? Ans. From sine, without, and plica, a 
folding. Give examples. Why Simple words? What is a Compound 
word? Examples. Separate them. Why Compound? Write the 
words. What is a Primitive word ? Why is sign a Primitive word ? 
How is a Derivative word formed ? Analyze the examples. Write as 
directed. Spell and define Monosyllable. Dissyllable. Trisyllable. 
Polysyllable. Compound. Primitive. Derivative. Prefix. Suffix. 



QUESTIONS ON PART I. 

What does English Grammar teach? Heads. Punctuation. Or- 
thography. § 1. A Letter. Alphabet. Number of Letters. Give the 
rules for capital letters. Correct the exercises. Italics, g 2. Divisiors 
of letters. A Vowel. Name the vowels. A Consonant. Name the 
consonants. A Diphthong. Proper. Improper. Proceed with the 
examples according to the Model. A Triphthong. Proper. Improper. 



256 QUESTIONS. 

Examples according to the Model. Of Diphthongs. \ 3. Proceed with 
the sounds of the vowels according to the Model. Give examples in 
the Table of Similar Sounds, g 4. Let the teacher give out examples 
of consonants having but one sound. $ 5. Recite the exercises on 
consonants having but one sound, according to the Model. \ 6. Recite 
the exercises on terminations by the Model, $ 7. Recite by the Model 
the list of words having silent letters. Recite by the Model the table 
of equivalents. Recite by the Model the table for sounding the Diph- 
thongs. $ 8. What is a Syllable ? Analyze the example. Hyphen. 
Monosyllable. Dissyllable. Trisyllable. Polysyllable. Recite the 
exercises by the Model. $ 9. A word. A Primitive word. A Deriva- 
tive word. A Compound word. Recite the exercises by the Model. 
§ 10. What is Spelling ? Rule I., Obs. 1, 2, 3. Exercises (see Model). 
Rule II., Obs. 1. Exercises. Rule III., Obs. 1. Exercises. Rule 
IV. Exercises. 



INTRODUCTORY LESSONS IN ETYMOLOGY. 

Note. In the succeeding part of the work, an analysis of the subjects 
is given, with such questions as the author deems necessary. The 
teacher, having the subjects before him, can vary the forms of his 
questions as he thinks proper, so as to adapt them to the age, capacity, 
and progress of the pupil. If the student understands the subject, the 
better method is to permit him to explain it, without waiting to be 
questioned. 

.Lesson I. — Derivation and meaning of Etymology. Treats of. The 
first class includes. The words called. Derivation of Noun. Exer- 
cises. Seeing. Distinction. Habits. Names of all objects. 

Lesson II. Explain Abstract Nouns by the examples. Derivation of 
Abstract. Proper Noun. Examples. Write. Explain Common Nouns 
by examples. Write. Explain Collective Nouns. Write. Derivation 
of collective. Verbal Nouns. Examples. Write. Derivation of verbal. 

Lesson III. — Explain the Persons. Exercises. Read the Note. 
Examples. Gender. Masculine. Feminine. Questions and exercises. 
Neuter Gender. Write. Number. Singular. Plural. Examples. 

Lesson IV. — A Sentence. Simple. Compound. Examples. Which 
words are nouns ? Which verbs ? What is the actor called ? The verb, 
or word which expresses the action ? Exercise. Subject. Predicate. 
Object. What is farmer, and why? Cuts? Grass? Analyze. 
Declaratory sentence. Imperative. Interrogative. Exclamatory. 



QUESTIONS. 257 

Lesson V. — Limited Subject. Analyze. Modified Subject. Modi- 
fied Predicate. Principal parts of a sentence. What is analyzing a 
sentence? Method of analyzing. Subject or actor. Object. Posses- 
sive Case. Analyze. 

Lesson VI. — Preposition. Relation. Adjunct. Analyze the exam- 
ple from Weld. Of, to, for, &c. The preposition, with the words fol- 
lowing. The noun following a preposition. Exercises. 

Lesson VII. — Adjective. Write. Add. Exercise. Name of the 
class. What is an Adjective? Qualifying. Limiting. Comparison. 
Positive. Comparative. Superlative. Derivation. Meaning. 

Lesson VIII. — Read. Explain why / is first person. We. Thou, 
you, yourself. He, she, thqy. It. Personal Pronouns. Derivation of 
Pronoun. Derivation and meaning of Relative. Of Antecedent. What 
are Relative Pronouns. Name them. The word who in a direct ques- 
tion — in an indirect question. Note, with regard to Interrogative and 
Indefinite Pronouns. Exercise. 

Lesson IX. — A Verb. Without action. Transitive. Derivation. 
Explain a Transitive Verb. An Intransitive Verb. What is a Transi- 
tive Verb ? An Intransitive Verb ? Exercise. Write. Voices. The 
subject of a verb in the Active Voice. In the Passive Voice. Write. 

Lesson X. — Mode. Meaning of Indicative Mode. Examples. This 
Mode then. Potential. Potential Mode. Also implies. Also used. 
Write. Subjunctive. Subjunctive Mode. Write. Imperative Mode. 
For what else ? Write. Infinitive. Infinitive Mode. Write. 

Lesson XL — Read. Tense. Is singing. Sung. Will sing. Write. 
Principal divisions of time. Define and explain the Present Perfect 
Tense. The present time may include. Write. Define and explain 
the Past Perfect Tense. Write. Define and explain the Future Per- 
fect Tense. Write. Exercise. 

Lesson XII. — Participle. Present. Past. Perfect. Exercises. 
Number and Person of a verb. A verb in the Infinitive Mode. Auxi- 
liary. An Auxiliary Verb. Name the auxiliary verbs. Exercise. 
Note. Principal parts of a verb. Regular. Irregular. Regular 
Verb. Irregular Verb. Exercise. Defective Verb. 

Lesson XIII. — Progressive Form. Conjugation means. The conju- 
gation of a verb. Impersonal or Unipersonal Verb. Derivation of 
Unipersonal. Compound Verbs. Adverbs. Time. Place. Manner. 
Degree. Doubt. Quantity. Comparison. Analyze, &c. 

Lksson XIV. — Derivation of Conjunction. What are Conjunctions? 
Some of the principal. Write. 

22* 



258 QUESTIONS. 



PART II. ETYMOLOGY. 

Etymology treats of. \ 12. Classes of words. \ 13. Word noun. 
Common. Proper. Collective. Abstract. Verbal. Exercises. \ 14. 
Properties of nouns. § 15. Persons. Exercise, g 16. Gender. Mascu- 
line. Feminine. Neuter. Exercise. Name the three methods of distin- 
guishing the Masculine and the Feminine Gender. Recite the words 
as directed. Nouns personified. Examples. Why Masculine ? Why 
Feminine ? Some nouns either Masculine or Feminine. Such words 
in the plural. $ 17. Number. Singular. Plural. Exercises. § 18. 
Case. Nominative. Meaning of absolute. Possessive. Objective. 
Exercises. Address. Pleonasm. Exclamation. Abridged expression. 
Exercises on the possessive case. Objective case. § 19. Declension. 
Plural of first declension. Decline king. House. Spell, define, and 
decline as directed. Plural of the second declension. Church. Spell, 
define, and decline as directed. Plural of the third declension. Fly. 
Spell, define, and decline as directed. Plural of fourth declension. 
Loaf — life — staff. Spell, define, and decline as directed. Proper 
nouns. Additional examples. Decline the irregular noun man. Spell, 
define, and decline as directed. Spell and define the list of words in 
No. 7. Possessive case. Spell and define the nouns used only in the 
singular. Things weighed or measured. Spell and define the words 
used only in the plural. Spell and define the compound nouns in No. 
10 — singular and plural. Nouns which change both words. Plural of 
letters and figures. Words singular in form, plural in sense. Plural 
of nouns derived from foreign languages. S in the possessive case. 
Vocabulary of words. § 20. An adjective. Exercises. Qualifying 
adjectives. Limiting adjectives. \ 21. Comparison. Positive Degree. 
Comparative. Superlative. Positive not ending in e. Positive ending 
in e. Adjectives ending in y. Adjectives having the final consonant 
doubled. Adjectives compared by means of adverbs. Adjectives which 
do not admit of comparison. Irregular Comparison. (Give out.) 
Analyze. Parse. Vocabulary. Exercise. 

$ 22. A pronoun. Exercise. Principal kinds of pronouns. \ 23. 
A personal pronoun. The simple pronouns. Decline 7, thou, he, she, it. 
Explain indefinite personal pronouns. Decline one, other, another. 
Remark about some, both, any, same, none, &c. This, that, these, those, 
former, latter. Decline this, that. Why called demonstrative ? Explain 
distributive personal pronouns. Name them. Why so called ? Explain 
compound personal pronouns. Decline myself, thyself, himself, herself, 
itself. Exercise. The pronoun it. \ 24. A relative pronoun. Simple. 



QUESTIONS. 259 

Compound. Antecedent. What, and the compound relatives. Decline 
who, what, which, that. How are the compound relative pronouns 
declined ? The. word as. Exercise. $ 25. The word who in a direct 
question. In indirect questions. Exercise. Which and what. $ 26. A 
verb. Exercise. \ 27. Classes. Transitive verb. Intransitive verb. 
Voices. A transitive verb in the active voice. In the passive voice. 
Same meaning either in the active or passive voice. An intransitive 
verb conjugated. Exercise. $ 28. Forms of verbs. Regular. D 
only — ed. Exercise. Irregular. Principal parts of an irregular verb. 
Defective verb. Progressive form. An auxiliary. Name. Exercise. 
$ 29. Unipersonal verbs. Compound verb. Exercise. § 30. Mode. 
Name. Indicative. Potential. Subjunctive. Imperative. Infinitive. 
Exercise. g 31. Tenses. Name. Present tense. Present perfect 
tense. Past tense. Past perfect tense. Future tense. Future Per- 
fect tense. Exercise. $ 32. Numbers and persons. Exercise. § 33. 
Participle. Name. Present. Past. Perfect. Exercise. § 34. Con- 
jugation. Verb "to be." Principal parts, &c. {Conjugate it through.) 
Subjunctive mode. § 35. The verb " to love," subjunctive mode. § 36. 
Passive voice. § 37. A transitive verb in the passive voice, conjugated. 
An intransitive verb. A few intransitive verbs. § 38. The teacher will 
name the present. Formation of the tenses of irregular verbs, 1-2. 
Past tense. Tenses of the passive voice. Write, blow, &c. In the 
inflection of verbs. 

§ 40. Defective verbs. List. Ought. § 41. An adverb. Exercise. 
§ 42. Adverbial phrases. Name. Adverbs briefly express. Spell and 
define as directed. § 43. A conjunctive adverb. They modify. Exer- 
cise. § 44. Adverbs compared. Compare as directed. Irregular com- 
parison. (The teacher will name the positive.) § 45. A preposition. 
A preposition with its object. Exercise. Some of the principal pre- 
positions. § 46. A conjunction. Exercise. Some of the principal 
conjunctions. § 47. An interjection. The principal. Exercise. § 48. 
Vocabulary. § 49. Vocabulary. § 50. Vocabulary. § 51. Vocabulary. 
§ 52. Vocabulary. § 53. Learn the Abbreviations. Model for parsing 
a noun. An adjective. Example. Explain the Note. 

Lessons I., II., III., IV., V. — Abbreviations. Model for parsing a 
verb. Examples. VI., VII. — Abbreviations. Model for parsing a 
pronoun. Repeat the Note about a pronoun. Example. Note about 
number and person. Note about gender. Lesson IV. Give the Model 
for the participle. For the infinitive mode. Exercises. § 54. Exer- 
cises in writing. 



260 QUESTIONS. 



PART III. SYNTAX. 

Syntax. Derivation. A sentence. Derivation. A phrase. The 
principal parts of a sentence. Examples. The subject. The predicate. 
A simple sentence. A compound sentence. Examples of simple sen- 
tences. Of compound sentences. § 57. Ellipsis. Of the noun. (The 
teacher will read the example, and the pupil will supply the ellipsis.) 
Adjective. Pronoun. Verb, &c. Adverb. Preposition, &c. Conjunc- 
tion, &c. Interjection. Instances of ellipsis. §58. Subject or Nomi- 
native may be used. Exercises. The subject may be modified. It 
may be. The object may be modified. Exercises. § 59. The verb 
used. Examples. A verb may be modified. Exercises. § 60. The 
adjective may be modified. Exercises. § 61. An adverb may be modi- 
fied by. Exercises. § 62. A simple subject. A compound subject. A 
compound predicate. Exercises. § 63. Method of analyzing a simple 
sentence. A compound sentence. § 64. Explain the Model for parsing 
a noun. Abbreviations. (Let the teacher proceed thus : What does 1 
stand for? &c.) Model for parsing an adjective. Abbreviations. 
Model for a personal or a relative pronoun. For a distributive or a 
demonstrative personal pronoun. For an indefinite or an interrogative 
pronoun. Abbreviations. For a verb. For the infinitive mode. For 
the participle. Abbreviations. For an adverb. Abbreviations. Model 
for a preposition. Abbreviations. For a conjunction. Abbreviations. 
An interjection. 

§ 65. Repeat Rule I. (Memorize all the Rules). (Note. The student 
should turn to the examples for illustrating the Rule, on pages 158 and 
159, analyze and parse them, and show how they serve to explain the 
Rule. Correct all the errors, and perform the exercises as required. 
Instead of memorizing the Observations, the student should read them 
carefully, and explain them by the examples, which are numbered to 
correspond with them. Adopt the same method throughout Syntax.) 
From what is the word apposition derived ? Explain the Rule. Explain 
Observations 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8. Analyze, parse, correct the errors, 
and perform all the exercises as required. § 66. The subjunctive mode. 
Improper to use that form in which shall or should is omitted. Correct 
the errors where doubt only is expressed. Doubt and futurity. The 
word subjunctive. Subjunctive mode found. How often placed ? 
Examples. Clauses connected. Examples. g 67. The imperative 



QUESTIONS. 261 

mode sometimes used. Examples. \ 68. Correct tue errors in form. 
Lie, lay, sit, set. Correct. 2. The present indicative used. Correct 
the errors. 8. For what other purpose is it used ? Analyze. Parse. 

4. After when, as soon as, &c. Example. 5. The present potential. 
Examples. • 6. The past potential. Explain. Analyze. Parse. 7. The 
past subjunctive. Explain. Analyze. Parse. 8. The present of the 
infinitive. The perfect of the infinitive. Correct the errors in Obser- 
vations 8 and 9. 10. Rule for using properly words and phrases. 
Correct. Analyze. Parse. §60. Such — so. Correct. Analyze. 
Parse. § 70. Correct in concert. Analyze. Parse. 1. Words 
expressing motion or tendency. Correct. § 71. Correct the common 
errors. 72. Analyzing and parsing. 

Lesson I. — Explain by the examples. 1, That, a relative. Example. 
2. An adjective. Ex. 3. A conjunction. Ex. 4. But, an adverb. Ex. 

5. A preposition. Ex. 6. A conjunction. Ex. 7. As, a relative. 8. An 
adverb. 9. A conjunction. 10. Either, a conjunction. 11. An adjec- 
tive. 12. Both, a conjunction. 13. An adjective. 14. Yet, a conjunc- 
tion. An adverb. 

Lesson II. — Since, a preposition. A conjunction. 18. For, a con- 
junction. A preposition. 20. What, a relative pronoun. An adjec- 
tive. An interjection. 23. More, a noun. 24. More and most, adjec- 
tives. Adverbs. 26. Much, a noun. An adjective. An adverb. 
29. Then, an adverb. Then, a conjunction. 

Lesson III., IV., V. — Recite the contractions. Analyze the verses. 
Note with regard to a conjunction or conjunctive adverb. A relative 
pronoun. Composition. 

Punctuation. 

§ 73. Punctuation treats of. These points and marks. The princi- 
pal points or marks. Write them on your slate or on paper. 
§ 74. Rule for the clauses of a compound sentence. Examples to be 
written according to directions. The subject connected with several 
words. Examples. Words and phrases. Ex. Words in apposition. 
Ex. More than two words in the same construction. Ex. Pairs of 
words. Ex. Explanatory relative clause. Ex. Words omitted. 
Ex. Words in opposition. Ex. Words repeated. Ex. An adjective 
with the words depending on it. Ex. § 75. Semicolon used. Ex. 
§ 76. Colon employed. Ex. § 77. Period used. Ex. § 78. Note of 
interrogation used. Ex. § 79. Note of exclamation. Ex. § 80. Dash. 



262 QUESTIONS. 

Ex. § 81. Parenthesis. Ex. § 82. Apostrophe. Hyphen. Dividing 
a word at the end of a line. The cedilla. Dioeresis. Accent. Short 
syllable. Long syllable. The ellipsis. Brace. Caret. Section. 
Paragraph. Quotation marks. Quotation within a quotation. Index 
or hand. Crotchets or brackets. Asterisk. Obelisl^ Double dagger. 
Parallels. Letters and figures. 



PAETIV. PROSODY. 

83. Prosody treats of. Accent — Emphasis. Quantity. Versifica- 
tion. Derivation. Properly means. Also used to signify. Rhyme. 
Blank verse. A stanza. A couplet or distich. Triplet. Foot. Princi- 
pal feet. An Iambus. Trochee. Anapest. Scanning. Iambic verse 
may consist of. Scan and explain. Scan and explain the examples of 
trochaic verse. Of anapestic verse. A spondee. Pyrrhic. Dactyl. 
Amphibrach. Tribrach. The different lines in poetry. 



THE END. 



HISTORICAL SERIES. 




PINNOCK'S HISTORICAL SERIES 



PINNOCK'S ENGLAND. 

REVISED EDITION, 



PINNOCK'S IMPROVED EDITION OP DR. GOLDSMITH'S HISTORY OF ENGLAND, 

FROM THE INVASION OF JULIUS C^SAR 

TO THE DEATH OP GEORGE THE II. 

WITH A CONTINUATION TO THE YEAR 1845: 
WITH QUESTIONS FOR EXAMINATION AT THE END OF EACH SECTION; 

BESIDES A VARIETY OF VALUABLE INFORMATION ADDED THROUGHOUT THE WORK, 

Consisting of Tables of Contemporary Sovereigns and eminent Persons, copious Expl* 

natory Notes, Remarks on the Politics, Manners and Literature of the Age, 

and an Outline of the Constitution. 

ILLUSTRATED WITH NUMEROUS ENGRAVINGS 

fOETT-FTFTfl AMERICAN, CORRECTED AND REVISED FROM THE THIRTY-FIFTH ENGLISH EDITION. 

Br W. C. TAYLOR, LL. D., op Trinity College, Dublin, 



Author of a Manual of Ancient and Modern History, &c. &e. 



46? 



HISTORICAL SERIES. 



PINNOCK'S FRANCE, 

KIST03 Y OF FRANCE AND NORMANDY, FROM THE EARLIEST TIMES TO 
THE REVOLUTION OF 1848, 

WITH QUESTIONS FOR EXAMINATION AT THE END OF EACH SECTION 

By AY. C. TAYLOR, LL. D., of Trinity College, Dublin, 

k 'lthor of a Manual of Ancient and Modern History, &c. &c, and Editor of Pinnock.'fi 
Improved editions of Goldsmith's Greece, Rome, and England. 

ILLUSTRATED WITH NUMEROUS ENGRAVINGS. 

FIRST AMERICAN FROM THE THIRD ENGLISH EDITION. 



PINNOCK'S ROME, 

REVISED EDITION, 

PINNOCK'S IMPROVED EDITION OF DR. GOLDSMITH'S HISTORY OF ROMS, 

TO WHICH IS PREFIXED 

AN INTRODUCTION TO THE STUDY OF ROMAN HISTORY, 

AND A GREAT VARIETY OF INFORMATION THROUGHOUT THE WORK, 
€N THE MANNERS, INSTITUTIONS, AND ANTIQUITIES OF THE ROMANS; 

WITH QUESTIONS FOR EXAMINATION AT THE END OF EACH SECTION. 

TWENTY-FIFTH AMERICAN, FROM THE NINETEENTH LONDON EDITION, IMPROVED 

BY W. C. TAYLOR, LL.D., 

WITH NUMEROUS ENGRAVINGS BY ATHERTON AND OTHERS. 



PINNOCK'S GREECE, 

REVISED EDITION, 

PINNOCK'S IMPROVED EDITION OF DR. GOLDSMITH'S HISTORY OF GREECE, 
REVISED, CORRECTED, AND VERY CONSIDERABLY ENLARGED, 

BY THE ADDITION OF SEVERAL NEW CHAPTERS, AND NUMEROUS 
USEFUL NOTES. 
" WITH QUESTIONS FOR EXAMINATION AT THE END OF EACH SECTION. 

TWENTY-FIFTH AMERICAN, SROM THE NINETEENTH LONDON EDITION, IMPROVED 

BY W. C. TAYLOR, LL.D., 

WITH NUMEROUS ENGRAVINGS, BY ATHERTON AND OTHER* 

(47) 




A 






*/ 













N C , 



* <*> 
















^> <$ 









V* 1 ^ 



Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process. 
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
Treatment Date: Oct. 2006 












V 



PreservationTechnologies 

A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 

1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
Cranberry Township, PA 16066 
(724)779-2111 





















* 





































\ 






















V ^ 























"^ 



